Vous êtes sur la page 1sur 320

BUILDING REGULATIONS OF TURKMENISTAN

SAFETY RULES IN CONSTRUCTION


RULES OF PROCEDURE AND ACCEPTANCE OF WORK

СНТ 3.01.03-06

MINISTRY OF CONSTRUCTION AND CONSTRUCTION MATERIALS INDUSTRY OF


TURKMENISTAN
Ashgabat-2006
BUILDING REGULATIONS OF TURKMENISTAN

SAFETY RULES IN CONSTRUCTION


RULES OF PROCEDURE AND ACCEPTANCE OF WORK

СНТ 3.01.03-06

MINISTRY OF CONSTRUCTION AND CONSTRUCTION MATERIALS INDUSTRY OF


TURKMENISTAN

Ashgabat-2006
СНТ 3.01.03-06 Safety rules in construction.
Rules of procedure and acceptance of work
.

Developed by: Turkmen information center of standards of the Central State Service
“Turkmenstandartlary”.

Project manager- Lukmanov B.

Executing officer in charge - Suhanov.А.S, Niyazov.S.К

Prepared for approval by the directorate of architecture, town planning and science of the
Ministry of Construction and Construction Materials Industry of Turkmenistan.

Enacting СНТ 3.01.03-06 “Safety rules in construction. Rules of procedure and acceptance of
work” expires in the territory of Turkmenistan СНиП III-4-80*, published 1989, “Safety rules
in construction. Rules of procedure and acceptance of work”
Ministry of construction and Building regulations of Turkmenistan СНТ
construction materials industry 3.01.03-06
of Turkmenistan
Safety rules in construction. For the
Rules of procedure and acceptance of first time
work

GENERAL PROVISIONS
Present norms and rules shall be followed during execution process of construction and
assembly works at construction of new, reconstruction expansion and technical re-equipment
of functioning enterprises, buildings and installations, and taken into account during work
process project planning.
In cases of application of methods of civil and erection works, designs, materials, cars, tools,
furniture, production tooling, the equipment and transport means on which safety production
requirements are not provided by the present rules, it is necessary to observe requirements of
corresponding state standards, and also rules or the instructions confirmed in established order
by state supervision bodies, ministries and departments in coordination with the Ministry of
construction and construction materials industry of Turkmenistan
Functional duties of heads, experts, foremen and workers related to performance of
requirements of the present norms and rules at the enterprises and in the organizations (further
in the text - the organizations) on which are not extended by the application of the law of
Turkmenistan “On enterprises” and “On entrepreneurial activity” are defined on the basis of
Model regulation according to the appendix 1 and affirmed by the head of the organization in
coordination with trade-union committee.
Responsibility for observance of safety requirements at operation of cars, electrical and air
instrument and production tooling is assigned:
For operating conditions of cars, tools, production tooling, including protective equipments, -
for the organization on balance of which they are, and at transfer them for the rent – for the
organization (person) defined by the contract;
For conduction of labor safety trainings, for organization with the staff;
For observance of labor safety requirements – for the organization executing the works;
During execution of works on construction site by several organizations it is necessary to
provide labor safety measures in accordance with the Regulation on mutual relations of
organizations- general contractors with subcontract organizations approved in established
order.
Prior to beginning the works in the territory of functioning enterprises and workshop, the
customer and the general contractor with participation of subcontracted agencies shall draw
up admittance document in the form as per Appendix 2. Managers of construction and
erection organizations and the functioning enterprise are responsible for observance of
measures provided in admittance document.
Prior to beginning the works on the places where there is or may appear any accident at work
(beyond nature of works), the responsible executor must be given warrant-admittance for
performance of the work in danger zone as per Appendix 3.
Note: In case of performance of potentially dangerous works the organization performing
these works should have license for execution of those works issued by Head state service
«Turkmen standards» in accordance with the Law of Turkmenistan «On licensing of separate
kinds of activity» and Regulation on state licensing of potentially dangerous productions,
works and the kinds of activity in the national economy, confirmed by Decree of the President
of Turkmenistan from January 13. 1999 № 4039.
APPROVED by Order of the Ministry of Commissioning date from March 1, 2007
construction and construction materials
industry of Turkmenistan from February
26, 2007 № МВ-30

The list of works requiring for performance warrant-admittance, shall be drawn up on the
basis of approximate list of works as per Appendix 4 as well as local conditions and nature of
construction and approved by chief engineer of construction and erection organization.
Warrant-admittance shall be issued by engineering and technical personnel from the list of
individuals authorized for this by order of the head of construction and erection organization.
Moreover, during performance of works in the territory of functioning enterprise warranty-
admittance must be signed by corresponding official of the functioning enterprise.
The warranty-admittance shall be given for the term necessary for performance of the set
amount of works. In case of change of conditions of works the warranty-admittance shall be
cancelled and renewal of works will be permitted only after issues of new warranty-
admittance document.
The person, who has issued warranty-admittance for execution of works, is obliged to control
over performance of labor safety provisions by the responsible head of works.
Individuals (workers and engineering manpower) aged over 18 years, who has undergone
medical checkup and identified as suitable, having not less than 1 year steeple jacking
experience and not lower than 3-rd wage category are permitted for independent steeple
jacking. Workers permitted for steeple jacking for the first time shall work within one year
under direct supervision of experienced workers appointed by order of the head of the
organization.
Note: Works performed at the height of over 5 meters high from the ground level, covering or
working platform, above which works are performed from structures at their erection or
repair, where key enabler protecting workers from fall is safety belt, is considered as steeple
jacking.
Workers, heads, experts and employees shall be provided and obliged to use working clothes,
protective footwear and other personal protection means, corresponding TDS-12.4.011-89
(СТ СЭВ 1086-88), as per requirements of the Law of Turkmenistan «On labor safety»,
Instruction on provision order of workers and personnel with working clothes, protective
footwear and other personal protection means and norm of free delivery of working clothes,
protective footwear and other personal protection means in the system of the Ministry of
construction and construction materials industry of Turkmenistan and other functioning
legislative documentation.
All persons on the site are obliged to wear protective helmets on TDS-12.4.087-84. Workers
and engineering manpower without protective helmets and other necessary personal
protection means are not allowed to perform the works.
Issue, store and use working clothes, protective footwear and other personal protection means
shall be carried out in accordance with Instruction on provision order of workers and
personnel with working clothes, protective footwear and other personal protection means and
norm of free delivery of working clothes, protective footwear and other personal protection
means in the system of the Ministry of construction and construction materials industry of
Turkmenistan and other functioning legislative documentation.
Workers, heads, experts and the employees working on the site, shall be provided with
sanitary-household premises (wardrobe, dryers for clothes and footwear, shower cubicles,
dinning premises, rest and heating, hygiene rooms for women and toilets) in accordance with
the requirements of the Law of Turkmenistan «On labor safety», functioning legislative
documents approved in established order.
Preparation for operation of sanitary-household premises and facilities for workers working
on site shall be finished prior to beginning of the major civil and erection works.
At reconstruction of the functioning enterprises sanitary-household premises shall be arranged
taking into account sanitary requirements, observance of which is obligatory at performance
of production process of the reconstructed enterprise.
On each facility it is necessary to allocate premises or places to place first-aid sets with
medicines, stretcher, fixing splints and other first-aid means.
All workers working on the site shall be provided with drinking water meeting sanitary
requirements. Drinking installations shall be placed at the distance of no more than 75 m
horizontally and 10 m vertically from workplaces.
The head (the manager, the chief) of the organization is obliged to control observance by all
the workers of office regulations related to labor safety, in accordance with The rules of
internal labor order for the workers and personnel, approved by heads of enterprises,
establishments and organizations in established order.
Unauthorized persons as well as drunken workers not admitted to the territory of site,
industrial, sanitary-household premises and workplaces.
Heads general contractor organization shall provide timely notification of all divisions and
the subcontract organizations working on under control facilities, about sharp change in the
weather (sandstorm, hurricane, dust storm, thunder, snowstorm, mud torrent, snowfall, etc.).
Lineman engineering manpower (masters, executors of works, senior executors of works,
local mechanics) and other engineering manpower under the list of posts approved by the
head of the organization, coordinated with bodies of the Head state service «Turkmen
standards», are obliged periodically, not less than once in a year, to pass check of knowledge
on safety regulations and industrial sanitary taking into account the nature of carried out
works. Unplanned check is carried out at the moment of transfer of the worker to another post
and also on request of bodies of labor safety state supervision and other public bodies
supervising labor protection in accordance with requirements of the Law of Turkmenistan
«On labor safety» and the Single labor protection control system in the national economy of
Turkmenistan.
Examination is carried out by the commission appointed by the head of organization, with
registration of recording in log file and in the certificate in the form as per Appendix 5.
Certificates shall be issued against receipt.
Workers with poor knowledge of safety regulations and industrial sanitary shall not be
permitted to manage performance of the works until repeated check.
The knowledge of the specified rules by workers of safety rules service, master mechanics,
chief power engineering specialists, heads of engineering and industrial offices, and heads of
organizations is checked by the commission of the higher organization according to the
Regulation about labor safety rules, norms and instructions knowledge checking order from
heads and experts of the enterprises, approved by the Head state service «Turkmen
standards».
Prior admission to work of workers again taken at the staff to the organization and in the
course of performance of works by them the administration is obliged to provide trainings
about labor safety in accordance with TDS-12.0.004-90 requirements, and also to provide
workers against receipt with labor safety instructions corresponding to development of labor
safety instructions Regulation requirements approved by the Head state service «Turkmen
standards».
Repeated labor safety training is required to conduct for all the workers not less than once in
three months.
At performance of civil and erection works in territory of functioning enterprise training shall
be conducted attracting personnel of labor safety (safety rules) of the territory of the
enterprise or workshop administration where main works are carried out.
Workers again taken at the staff to the organization and earlier had not been trained to safety
rules in accordance with the profession specified in the order on putting on the list not later
than a month from the date of putting on the list shall be trained to safety rules on the basis of
14 hours program, and the workers admitted to performance of works, which require
additional safety demands as per p.1.21 shall be trained prior to beginning of works on the
basis of 18 hours program. Training programs shall be drawn up taking into account the list of
questions specified in attachment 10, and approved by the engineering manager of the
organization.
Workers are not allowed to independently perform works (without supervision of experienced
workers, appointed by administration) before having trainings.
After completion of trainings, and further annually or at transition from one organization in
another it is necessary to inspect knowledge of workers in safety in the volume of programs
approved engineering manager of the organization.
Examination shall be carried out by the commission appointed in accordance with the order of
the head of organization. Examination shall be drawn up by recording in the registration and
in certificate under the form as per Appendix 5. Certificates are issued against receipt.
The personnel of the organizations charged in service of cars, equipment and installations and
works controlled by the Head State service «Turkmenstandards» and Ministry of energy and
industry of Turkmenistan is permitted to work in accordance with the rules established by
them.
The list of professions of workers and forms of civil and erection works which require
additional labor safety demands is established by the ministries (departments) in coordination
with the Head state service « Turkmenstandards » and corresponding branch trade unions on
the basis of the approximate list indicated in the appendix 6.
Only skilled specialists not younger than 18, trained to safe methods and receptions of these
works and the received corresponding certificates are permitted for performance of civil and
erection works, requiring labor safety requirements. Those who had not taken trainings are
not permitted for independent works.
Students of vocational schools, secondary special vocational schools, and students of the
higher schools till 18 years, during practical training (specialty training at work) can be used
at factories, professions and workplaces included in “The List of productions, professions and
works with heavy and harmful working conditions which do not require use of labor of
individuals under 18», approved by Head state service «Turkmenstandards», no more than 4
hours a day under condition of strict observance of functioning sanitary-and-hygienic norms
in these productions and under the leadership and supervision of the master of training and the
worker of the organization appointed for a management of practical training (specialty
training at work).
During the work of students of vocational schools, secondary special vocational schools, and
practical trainings of students of the higher schools, specialty training at work the
administration is obliged:
To establish tightened supervision over performance of safety rules and industrial sanitary at
workplaces, having appointed engineer responsible for safety works;
do not allow using of indicated individuals on works not provided by the contract between the
organization and educational institution or entering into the list of dangerous works, approved
by the Head state service «Turkmenstandards» and coordinated with corresponding branch
trade union;
To train indicated individuals prior to direction them to the workplaces to safe methods and
receptions of works under typical programs for workers in accordance with professions
specified in the order on putting on the list, and during issue of production task to provide
training of each to labor safety as per p. 1.19 of the present chapter;
To provide sanitary-household services for specified individuals and distribute working
clothes, protective footwear, and personal protective means.
Workers and lineman engineering manpower engaged in works with harmful and dangerous
labor conditions shall undergo medical examination in order and in terms defined in
functioning legislative documents and performing works in the territory of the functioning
enterprise, moreover, in order established for individuals, working in this enterprise.
For carrying out training-methodical work and propaganda of safety rules in construction and
erection trusts and subsidiary organizations shall be settled labor safety rooms corresponding
to Standardized regulation on safety rules rooms approved by the Ministry of construction and
construction materials industry of Turkmenistan in coordination with bodies of the state
supervision on labor safety and the National centre of trade union of Turkmenistan, and in
household premises-established stands on safety rules.
Limit values of temperatures of external air and force of wind in this climatic area, that
require to hold up performance of works in the open air and to stop transportation of people
in not heated transport means, are defined in established order by corresponding services of
districts on the location of sites.
Heads of the organizations are obliged to observe limitations in using women’s labor in
compliance with the List of productions, professions and works with difficult and dangerous
working conditions, which forbid use of women’s labor, approved by the Head state service
«Turkmen standards».
The organizations developing and confirming works execution project (WEP) shall provide in
them decisions on labor safety, by structure and the content corresponding to the requirements
specified in the appendix 7. Performance of works without WEP, containing specified
decisions, is not allowed.
At performance of civil and erection works it is necessary to observe requirements TDS-
12.3.002-75* (СТ СЭВ 1728-79) and to provide manufacturing sequence so that the previous
operation could not be a source of industrial danger during performance of the subsequent.
Used in performance of civil and erection works vehicles, equipment and tooling shall by
technical features correspond to conditions of safe performance of works.
Cars, equipments, tools, stock, tooling and the materials used in performance of civil and
erection works, are subject to obligatory certification in established by the Law of
Turkmenistan «On certification of production and services» order.
1.31 Polymeric materials and items are permitted to use only by coordination with
bodies of the State sanitary-and-epidemiologic service and in existence of approved is
established order their use instructions.
At use of such materials and items it is necessary to be guided by passports for them, signs
and inscriptions on container.
During construction, reconstruction, repair of buildings and installations using load lifting
cranes in conditions when operated, inhabited, public, industrial or other buildings and
installations, transport or sidewalks can be in the dangerous zones defined in accordance with
p. 2.7, in the construction organization project (COP) shall be provided, decisions on
provision of human security including:
Displacement of transport and sidewalks beyond the limits of dangerous zones;
Eviction of people from buildings and installations or scheduling construction works
performance covering execution of construction works during absence of people in these
buildings.
When necessary maintenance of specified facilities, except for public gathering places
theatres, children’s, medical and educational institutions and other places shall be permitted
subject to using technical decisions, specified in p. 16 of Appendix 7, excluding dangerous
zones in the places of people gathering.
In case of accidents at the moment of performance of civil and erection works its technical
investigation shall be carried out in accordance with Instructions on technical investigation
and record of accidents in execution approved by decision of the Head state service
«Turkmen standards» from September 15, 1995 № 20.
Investigation of accidents during performance of civil and erection works is carried out
according to Regulation on investigation and record of accidents in execution approved by
Decree of the President of Turkmenistan from January 13, 1999 № 4039 with compensation
of the damage caused to the worker according to Rules of compensation of a damage, caused
to the worker by severe injury, occupational disease or other damage of health connected with
execution of labor duties, approved by Decree of the President of Turkmenistan from January
13, 1999 № 4039.
2. ORGANIZATION OF SITE, WORKING AREA AND WORKPLACES

Organization of site, work areas and workplaces shall provide labor safety of those working in
all stages of performance of works.
All territorially isolated sites shall be provided with telephone service or radio
communication.
During Organization of site, work areas and workplaces, site organization, placing of sites of
works, workplaces, building cars and vehicles passages, passes for people it is necessary to
establish dangerous to people zones within the limits of which constantly function or
potentially may function factor of production.
Dangerous zones shall be marked with safety signs and inscriptions of established form.
Constantly operating dangerous factors of production zones are:
Zones close to uninsulated live part of electrical installation;
Zones close to not enclosed differentials at the height of 1,3 m and above;
In places where there are hazardous substances in concentration more than allowed or effects
noise of higher than maximum intensity.
Constantly operating dangerous factors of production areas are:
Area of a territory close to building (installation) under construction; floors (tiers) of buildings
and installations in one work area, where assembly (disassembling) of structures or equipment
taking place;
Cars, equipment, or their parts, labor body travel zones, where displacement of goods by
hoisting cranes take place.
Zones of constantly operating dangerous production factors in order to avoid access of
outsiders shall have safety barriers, meeting requirements of TDS-23407-78(TDS-12.4.059-
89).
Execution of civil and erection works in these zones, is permitted in accordance with works
execution project WEP, containing specific decisions on protection of workers.
Zones of potentially operating dangerous production factors shall possess the alarm
protections meeting requirements TDS-23407-78.
During execution of civil and erection works in specified dangerous zones it is necessary to
carry out organizational-technical actions providing safety of the workers.
Operation of buildings and their separate parts which are close to the buildings under
construction or reconstructed, is allowed under condition if overlapping of the top floor of
operated building is not in dangerous zone of possible falling of subjects near the building
under construction (reconstructed) or displacement of cargoes by hoisting cranes, defined
depending on height of possible falling of a subject before overlapping of the top floor of
operated building, and also at performance of following actions:
Window, door apertures of operated building or its separate parts, getting into the zone of
possible falling of subjects shall be closed by safety barriers;
Entrances and exits of operated building shall be installed beyond the limits of dangerous
zones.

Borders of dangerous zones in places where displacement of cargoes by hoisting cranes as


well as close to buildings and installations under construction are fixed as per table 1.

Table 1.
Borders of dangerous zone, m
In places of displacement of Close to building and
cargoes by cranes (from installation under
horizontal projection of construction (from its
displacement locus of external perimeter)
maximum overall dimension of
cargo in case of falling)

1 2 3
Till 10 From 0 till 4 From 1,5 till 3,5
From 10 till 20 From 4 till 7 From 3,5 till 5
From 20 till 70 From 7 till 10 From 5 till 7
From 70 till 120 From 10 till 15 From 7 till 10
From 120 till 200 From 15 till 20 From 10 д till 15
From 200 till 300 From 20 till 25 From 15 till 20
From 300 till 450 From 25 till 30 From 20 till 25

Borders of dangerous zones within the limits of which function dangerous electrical shock is
fixed as per table 2.
Table 2.
Limiting dangerous zone distances from unprotected
uninsulated parts of electrical installation (electrical equipment,
cable and wire) or from vertical plane formed projection to the
ground of close wire, overhead power transmission line which
is under voltage
Till 1 1,5
From 1 till 20 2,0
From 35 till ПО 4,0
From 150 till 220 5,0
330 6,0
From 500 till 750 9,0
800 (direct current) 9,0

Value of maximum permissible concentration of dangerous substances in the air of working


zone, excess of which creates danger to human and defines borders of dangerous zone, fixed
in appendix 8.
Borders of dangerous zones near motion works and movable operating element of cars
defined by distance within the limits 5 m, if there are no other excess demands in the passport
or manual of the plant-manufacturer.
Construction site in inhabited areas or in the territory of functioning enterprises, to prevent
access of outsiders shall be enclosed. The structure of enclose shall satisfy requirements of
TDS-23407-78. Enclosures adjoining mass passage of people shall be equipped with
continuous visors.
During placement of temporary installations, enclosures, storehouses, and scaffolding it is
necessary to follow requirement on size of adjoining installations to traffic of nearby transport
means.
Fire security in site, working areas shall be provided in accordance with demands of Fire
safety rules at execution of civil and erection works, specified in established order and TDS-
12.1.004-91.
Electrical safety in site, works area and working places shall be provided in accordance with
demands of TDS-12.1.013-78.
Control over content of dangerous substances in the air of working zone, specified in
Appendix 8, as well as control over lightning, limit value of vibration and noise, temperature
norms, atmospheric moisture capacity and air speed in working areas shall be carried out with
devices, approximate number of which is indicated in appendix 9.
Construction laboratories shall be used to control specified values and specialized
laboratories on labor safety and sanitary laboratories shall be used to control other dangerous
factors in production.
During execution of civil and erection works in the territory or in workshops of functioning
enterprises control over observance of sanity norms shall be executed in order, established for
given enterprise.
Site, working areas and working places, passages and approaches shall be provided with
lightening during evenings in accordance with TDS-12.1.046-85. Illumination must be even
without dazzle of lighting fixtures for the workers. Execution of works in unilluminated areas
not allowed.
Wells, open test pits and other ditch in soil in places of possible access of people shall be
closed with coverings, durable shields or fenced. In the dark enclosures shall be marked with
electrical alarm lamps not higher that 42 В voltage.
Storage of materials, construction of rail tracks, installation of bearings for overhead power
transmission lines and communication shall be carried out as a rule beyond the collapse of
dredged soil prism (foundation pit, trench), walls of which are not fixed and their placement
within the limits of prism collapse of soil near the ditch with fixation is allowed under
condition of preliminary inspection by calculation fixation durability taking into account load
dynamic magnification factor.
Traffic diagram of transport means shall be fixed at the site entrance and visible traffic sign
regulating order of traffic of transport means in accordance with road regulations, approved
by resolution at wayside and passages.
Movement speed of motor transport near works execution place shall not exceed 10 km/h in
direct areas and 5 km/h at turns.
At crossings of motor roads and rail tracks in the site shall be equipped with continuous deck
(traject) with counterrails built in level with rail heads.
Traject shall be equipped with warning lights and gates in accordance with railway
engineering instructions of Turkmenistan approved by the Ministry of Railway Transport of
Turkmenistan. Traffic through railway lines in other places not allowed.
Thoroughfares, passages and working area shall be cleaned up regularly, do not block, and
those located beyond the building sprinkle with sand or dross in winter season.
Passages with inclination of more than 20° shall be equipped with ladders or stairs with
enclosure.
Width of passages to the working areas and in the working area shall be not less than 0,6 m,
and the height of passages to the light – not less than 1,8 m.
To uplift and lowering of workers to workplaces at construction of buildings and installations
with the height or depth of 25 m and more passenger or passenger-and-freight lifts shall be
used.
Ladders or saddle clips, used for uplift and lowering of workers to work places located at the
height or depth of more than 5 m, shall be equipped with devices for fastening of a safety belt
(ropes with safety catch, etc.).
Portable stairs prior to operation shall be tested for statistical loading 1200 Н (120 кгс),
applied to one of stairs in the middle of flight of stairs located in operational state. In the
process of operation of wooden stairs shall be tested every six month and metallic once a year.
Entrances to the building (installations) under construction shall be protected from above by
continuous fence roof with the width not less than the width of entrance with the gab at the
distance not less than 2 m from the wall of the building. The corner, formed between the fence
roofs and located above wall over the entrance, shall be within 70-75 °.
Working places and passages at the height of 1,3 m and over and at the distance of less than 2
m from border of differential at the height shall be protected with temporary fences in
accordance with TDS-12.4.059-89 requirements.
In the luck of installation of those fences at the height shall be executed using safety belts
complying with TDS-12.4.089-86 and safety ropes TDS-12.4.107-82.
Recesses in the blockings, intended for installation of equipment, installation of lifts,
staircases, etc. to which access of people is possible, shall be closed by continuous deck have
barriers.
Recesses in the walls at one-sided abutment to them deck (enclosures) shall be protected, if
the distance from the level of the deck till the bottom of the recess less than 0, 7 m.
Workplaces depending on conditions of works and accepted production engineering of works
shall be provided, in accordance with normal complete set, corresponding to their purpose
means of industrial equipment and means of collective protection, and also means of
communication and alarm systems.
Giving of materials, construction structures and piece of equipment to working places shall
be carried out in technological sequence providing labor safety. Storing of materials and
equipment on work places shall be carried out to avoid creation of a danger at performance of
works and constraint passages.
Use of open flame within the radius of less than 50 m from the place of using and storage of
materials, containing highly inflammable or explosive substance is not allowed.
Paint and varnish, insulating, finishing and other materials allocating explosive or harmful
substances, is permitted to store on workplaces in the quantities which do not exceed
replaceable requirement.
Prior to performance of works in places where occurrence of harmful gas is possible,
including in the closed capacities, wells, trenches and pits, it is necessary to carry out the
analysis of the air in accordance with requirement of p 2.15.
At occurrence of harmful gases execution of works in this place must be stopped and
continued only after provision of workplaces with ventilation (airing) or if workers use
personal protection equipment.
Works in wells, pits or the closed capacities shall be carried out, using hose gas masks, while
two workers, being out of the well, pit or capacities, have to insure direct executors of works
with ropes with attached to them safety belts.
During performance of works in collectors or communication tunnels two nearest hatches or
doors shall be opened so that the workers were between them.
During performance of works using laser beam it is necessary:
Fulfill the requirements of TDS-12.1.040-83*;
To designate a workplace where the laser device is used, corresponding safety signs as per
established forms;
In places of possible pass of people to establish protective blankets excluding distribution of
laser beam beyond the limits working areas;
Do not allow installation of mirrors and other reflecting light items on the way of passage of a
laser beam.

At combination of works on one vertical (except for provided in p 12.2) workplaces located
below shall be equipped with corresponding protection devices (floorings, grids, peaks),
established at the distance no more than 6 m on a vertical from workplace above.
Simultaneous performance of waterproofing or anticorrosive works using bitumen mastics, as
well as welding of polymeric materials with other works in one premise (capacity) is allowed
only at one level if actions as per p 2.6 are not carried out.
Construction wastes of buildings under construction and scaffoldings shall be discharged
through closed trenches, in closed boxes or containers. The bottom end of a trench shall be
not higher that 1 m above the soil or enter into the bunker. Discharging of wastes without
trenches or other devices is allowed from the height not more than 3 m. Places where wastes
are placed shall be fenced or danger warning supervision installed.
During performance of civil and erection works on the rivers and other reservoirs safety
admission of ships, floating constructions and rafts in accordance with sailing in internal
navigable routes rules approved in established order shall be provided.
During performance of works in water or over the water, the saving station (saving post) shall
be organized. All areas of performance of works in the water or over the water shall be
provided with saving means. In execution of diving works it is necessary to fulfill
requirements of corresponding legislative documents.
Storage of materials, structures and equipment shall be carried out in accordance with
requirements of legislative and other documents for materials, items and equipment.
Materials structures and equipment shall be placed on smooth areas preventing spontaneous
displacement, sagging, falling and rolling of stored materials.
Backings and bearing in dump of stored materials and structures shall be placed on one
vertical plane. Their thickness at stockpiling of panels, blocks and similar structures shall be
higher than the height of coming out mounting loop not less than for 20 mm.
Not less than 1 m in width passages, the width of which depend on size of transport means
and loading and unloading mechanisms, serving the storehouses shall be provided between
stacks (racks) in warehouses.
To lean (support) materials and items to fences and elements of temporary and capital
installations is not allowed.
Dust-like materials must be stored in closed capacities, taking measures against dispersion in
the process of loading and unloading. Loading apertures shall be closed with protective
lattices, and hatches – shutters.
The bunkers and other capacities with more than 2 m depth for storage of loose and dust-like
materials shall have devices for prevention of formation of arches and lags of materials or for
their compulsory collapse.
Materials containing dangerous or explosive solvent shall be stored in hermetically closed
containers.
Actions with use of fire or provoking sparking are not allowed on workplaces where glues,
mastics, paints and other materials allocating explosive or harmful substances are used or
prepared. These workplaces must be aired.
Electrical installations in such premises (zones) shall be in explosion-proof execution.
Besides, the measures preventing occurrence and accumulation of charges of a static
electricity should be taken.
Premises, where works with dust-like materials are carried out, as well as working places
near mechanisms for crushing, grinding and riddling of those materials shall be provided with
aspirating or ventilating systems (airing). Management of shutters, feeders and mechanisms
on installations for processing of lime, cement, plaster and other dust materials shall be
carried out from portable panels.
Before dismantling or demolition of structures measures to provide safe performance of
works shall be developed.
The structures subject to dismantling, prior to beginning of works must be disconnected from
water, heat, gas, power, sewerage networks and technological delivery duct and take measures
against their damage. Switching-off shall be made by the organization supervising the
specified networks, and drawn up by corresponding documentation. The scheme of temporary
power supply in development process shall be independent from wiring diagram of
demolished structure.
Territory, where dismantling of building is carried out, shall be fenced in accordance with
requirement of p. 2.11.
Materials received at dismantling of buildings, shall be stored on special platforms.
Before storage nails and cramps must be taken off from material of dismantled wooden
designs, suitable for further use.
Dismantling of structures in several tiers on same vertical and bringing down dismantled
structures to overhead cover is now allowed.
Used in dismantling of structures mechanisms and cars shall be places beyond the zone of
collapse of designs. In case of application of "felling" method the length of working ropes
must be three times longer than the heights of structure.
At dismantling of buildings by explosive method it is necessary to follow the requirements of
Single safety regulation in blasting, confirmed in established order.
At collapse of designs of the buildings (constructions) subject to demolition by means of a
wedge-hammer or ball-hammer, it is not allowed staying near the building (construction) at
the distance of less than its height.

3. OPERATION OF CONSTRUCTION VEHICLES


Operation of construction vehicles (Mechanisms, rigging), including maintenance service,
shall be carried out in accordance with requirements of TDS-12.3.033-84, СНиП 3.01.01-85
and instructions of manufacturers. Moreover, Operation of load-lifting vehicles shall be made
taking into account requirements of Organization Rules Safe Operation of load-lifting cranes
approved in established order.
Individuals responsible for the maintenance of construction vehicles in-service state are
obliged to provide conduction of their maintenance service and repair in accordance with
requirements of operational documents of manufacturer.
Heads of the organizations, performing civil and erection works with application of vehicles
are obliged to appoint the engineering and technical personnel responsible for safe
performance of those works from the list of individuals, who underwent examination
concerning the regulations and instructions on safe performance of works using given
vehicles.
Prior to beginning of work with use of vehicles the head of works shall define routing and
placement location of vehicles, places and ways of neutral grounding (grounding) of the
vehicles having electric drive, to specify ways of interaction and the alarm system of the
machinist (operator) with the worker-signalman serving the vehicle, to define (if necessary)
location of the signalman, and provide appropriate illumination of a working zone.
Workplace of vehicles shall be defined to provide space sufficient to view working zone and
maneuvering. In case when the machinist or mechanic operating the vehicle, has no sufficient
visibility of working space or does not see the worker (especially signalman), giving him
signals, it is necessary to set bilateral radio communication or telephone communication
between the machinist and the signalman. Use of intermediate signalmen for signaling to the
machinist is not allowed.
Meaning of the signals given in the process of the work or movement of the vehicle shall be
explained to all persons engaged in this work.
In the zone of work of the vehicle signs on safety and precautionary inscriptions shall be set
up.
It is not allowed to leave the vehicle with operating (switched on) motor.
3.8 Displacement, installation and operation of the vehicle close to ditches (trenches, tranche,
canals and etc.) with loose slope is allowed only beyond the prism of collapse of ground at the
distance, fixed by work performance project taking into account depth of underground water
bedding level.
At absence of corresponding instructions in work performance project, permissible distance
on horizontal from the bottom of cut slope till the nearest bearings of vehicles shall be made
in accordance with the table 3.

Table 3
Depth of cut,m Ground
Sandy Sandy-loam Loamy Argillaceous
Distance on horizontal from the bottom of cut slope till the nearest
bearings of vehicles, m
1,0 1,5 1,25 1,00 1,00
2,0 3,0 2,40 2,00 1,50
3,0 4,0 3,60 3,25 1,75
4,0 5,0 4,40 4,00 3,00
5,0 6,0 5,30 4,75 3,50

3.9 Measures preventing triggering or spontaneous movement under the wind or at the
slope shall be taken during operation of vehicles.
During performance of works using vehicles in security zones of overhead power
transmission line it is necessary to fulfill requirements TDS-12.1.013-78.
Maintenance service of vehicles shall be carried out only after stop of the engine and pressure
removal in hydraulic and pneumatic systems, except for those cases provided by instructions
of the manufacturer.
During maintenance service of vehicles with the electric drive the measures not allowing
casual supply of pressure must be taken. Posters «Do not switch on- people work! » must be
placed on starting devices. Fusible inserts of safety locks in the feed circuit of electric motors
should be taken out.
The assembly units of the vehicle having possibility to move under the influence of a body
weight, at maintenance service shall be blocked or lowered to the support to avoid moving.
Use of open fire for reheating the units of the vehicle and operate the vehicle in case of flow
in fuel and oil system is not allowed.
In case of moving of vehicle itself, on tug or on transport means road regulations
requirements approved by resolution of the President of Turkmenistan Saparmurat
Turkmenbashy № 6185 from 31 March 2003 shall be followed.
Movement of vehicles through natural or artificial obstacles, as well as through unprotected
railway crossings is allowed only after inspecting condition of a way of movement. If
necessary the way of movement of the vehicle shall be planned and strengthened taking into
account the requirements specified in the passport of the vehicle.
Assembly (disassembly) of the vehicles shall be carried out in conformity with the instruction
of factory - manufacturer and under the guidance of the person responsible for a technical
condition of vehicles.
The installation zone shall be fenced or designated by safety signs and precautionary
inscriptions.
Carry out installation works in ice-slick, fog, snowfall, thunder-storm, at air temperature
below or at the speed of a wind above the limits provided in the passport of the vehicle is not
allowed.
Manometers in the pneumatic - hydraulic actuator system of the vehicle shall be tested and
sealed up. In case of fault condition of a manometer operation of the vehicle is not allowed.
In case of use of manual vehicles it is necessary to follow safe operation rules provided in
TDS-12.1.013-78, and also instructions of manufacturers.
Work schedule of workers (duration of breaks, medical -preventive actions, etc.) during use of
the vehicles creating vibration, shall be defined in accordance with sanitary requirements and
rules of working with instruments, mechanisms and equipment, creating vibration transferred
to the arms of the workers, approved in established order.
Containers used for displacement of materials shall satisfy safety requirements to construction
and displacement.
4. OPERATION OF PRODUCTION TOOLING AND INSTRUMENT
Civil and erection works shall be executed using industrial tooling (scaffolds, container for
concrete mix, solution, loose and piece materials, load gripper and devices for adjustment and
temporary fastening of designs), collective protection means and construction hand tools,
defined by the structure of standard complete sets, and their operation - according to
operational documents of manufacturers.
Development order and tests of industrial tooling and protection means shall be observed
taking into account corresponding legislative documents.
Scaffolds and other devices providing safety performance of the work shall comply with
demands of the present chapter TDS-27321-87, TDS-24258-88 и TDS-28012-89.
Scaffolds shall have equal working floorings with backlash between boards no more than 5
mm, and at flooring arrangement at the height of 1,3 m and more protections and onboard
elements. Connections of floorings panels lapped allowed only on its length, and the ends of
joined elements shall be located on the support and block it not less than 0,2 m to each party.
Ground surface to scaffolding is fixed, must be plan, beaten hard and provided water
diversion from it. Scaffolding shall be attached to the wall of building under construction.
Places and ways of fastening are specified in works performance project
In the absence of special instructions in the project or instruction of factory-manufacturer
fastening of scaffolding to the walls of buildings shall be carried out not less than through one
circle for extreme racks, through two width for the top circle and one fastening on each 50 м 2
projections of surface of scaffoldings to the building
Near passages scaffolds shall be fixed at the distance not less than 0,6 m from the size of
transport means.
In case of need transfer to the scaffolding additional loading (from the vehicles for lifting of
materials, hoisting areas and etc.) their structure shall take into account these loadings.
4 meters high scaffoldings are allowed for operation only after their acceptance by executor of
works or the master and works registration log, and higher 4 m - after acceptance by the
commission appointed by the head of the civil and erection organization, and registration by
the certificate.
In case of acceptance of scaffoldings shall be checked up: presence of communications and
fastenings providing stability, separate elements fastening units, working floorings and
protections, verticality of racks, reliability of bearing platforms and grounding (for metal
scaffoldings).
In places of lifting of people on scaffoldings posters with size and scheme of placing of
loadings shall be provided.
Scaffoldings in the process of operation shall be observed by resident engineer or the master
not less than every 10 days.
Scaffoldings where was not work within a month and more, before renewal of works shall be
accepted in order provided by p 4.6. After the rain or thaw which could affect bearing ability
of the foundation under them, as well as after mechanical influences Scaffoldings are subject
to additional inspection. In case of detection of deformations in Scaffoldings must be
corrected and accepted repeatedly in order specified in p 4.6.
During performance of works from Scaffoldings in height of 6 m and more shall be not less
than two floorings: working (top) and protective (bottom), and each workplace on the
Scaffoldings adjoining to the building or construction, must be protected from above by
flooring located at the distance on height no more 2 m from a working flooring.
In cases when performance of works, movement of people or transport under Scaffoldings
and near is not provided, the installation of protective (bottom) flooring is not necessary.
During dismantling of Scaffoldings adjoining to the building all door ways of the first storey
and exits to the balcony of all storeys (within the bounds of dismantling area) must be closed.
Spacing between the wall of the building under construction and working flooring of the
scaffolding established near, shall not exceed 50 mm at stone laying and 150 mm - painting
and decorating.
During performance of heat-insulating works the spacing between isolated surface and
working flooring shall not exceed double thickness of isolation plus of 50 mm. The specified
spacing of the size more than 50 mm in all cases must be closed, in case where there is no
work.
Swinging scaffolds and suspending scaffold after their installation can be admitted to
operation only after they will stand tests within 1h by static loading exceeding standard by 20
%.
Suspending scaffold, moreover, shall be tested for the dynamic loading exceeding standard by
10 %.
Results of tests of Swinging scaffolds and suspending scaffold shall be reflected in the
acceptance certificate or in the general log of works.
In cases of repeated use of Swinging scaffolds and suspending scaffold they can be admitted
to operation without testing under conditions that the structure to which scaffolds are hung up,
checked for loading exceeding settlement not less than twice, and fastening of scaffolds
carried out by the typical units (devices) standing necessary tests.
The structure elevating scaffolds (cradles) used during performance of civil and erection
works, shall correspond to requirements TDS-27372-87.
Elevating scaffolds during break time in works shall be pulled down. Passage from elevating
scaffolds to the building or installation not allowed.
Construction hoist, used for placement of elevating scaffolds and established on the ground,
shall be loaded by the ballast the weight of which must exceed for not less than twice hauling
capacity of construction hoist. The ballast shall be fixed on the frame of construction hoist.
Track gradient for moving of mobile woods in diametrical and longitudinal directions shall
not exceed specified in the passport and the instruction of manufacturer of scaffolds.
Moving of scaffolds in wind with the speed of more than 10 km/s is not allowed. Before
moving mobile scaffolds shall be released from materials and container and no people shall be
on them.
Accommodation ladders without working platforms allowed using only for crossing maenad
by separate circles of building under construction and for performance of the works which do
not demand from the executor support in its design.
Ladders should be equipped with not sliding support and to be put into working position
under 70-75 ° against horizontal plane.
The design of ladders shall correspond to the requirements provided in TDS-26887-86.
The sizes of ladder shall provide the worker with possibility to perform the work in the
position standing on a step, which is at the distance of not less 1 m from the top end of a
ladder. In case of work from a ladder at height more than 1,3 m it is necessary to use safety
belt attached to the structure of a construction or to a ladder under condition of its fastening to
the structure.
Installation places of ladders on areas of movement of transport means or people shall be
protected for the period of performance of works.
In case of carrying or transportation of instrument its sharp sides shall be closed with cases.
Load hooks of load grippers (slings, traverse), used in performance of civil and erection
works shall be supplied with safety closing devices preventing spontaneous loss of cargo.
Slings, traverses and container in the process of operation shall be exposed to technical
checkup by the person responsible for their operable condition, in terms established by the
requirements of installation and safety operation of hoisting cranes rules approved in
established order, and other industrial tooling - not less than every 6 months if other not
specified in standard documents or manufacturer instructions. Results of survey shall be
registered in the works log.
5. TRANSPORTATION WORKS
In case of transportation construction goods, except for the requirements of the present
chapter, depending on kinds of vehicles it is necessary to fulfill traffic regulations
requirements, confirmed by the resolution of the President of Turkmenistan Saparmurat
Turkmenbashy № 6185 from 31 March 2003, Rules of technical operation of the railways,
approved by the Ministry of railway transportation of Turkmenistan, Rules of internal
navigable ways and Rules on labor safety on the motor transport, approved in established
order.
The organization-owner of vehicles is obliged to provide their timely maintenance service and
repair according to the manufacturer instruction.
Transportation of long-measuring, heavy or large-sized cargoes shall be carried out, as a rule,
on means of specialized transport.
Transportation of explosive, radioactive, poisonous and inflammable cargoes shall be made on
the vehicles equipped according to requirements and instructions for the given category of
cargo, approved in established order.
Dangerous cargoes demanding supervision during transportation shall be transported
accompanied by the conductors competent in dangerous and harmful properties of cargoes, as
well as ways of their transportation.
To avoid moving (or falling during transport movement) the cargoes shall be placed and fixed
on transport means in accordance with specifications on loading and fastening of the given
type of cargo.
Lorries for transportation of people shall be equipped according to requirements of traffic
regulations approved by the resolution of the President of Turkmenistan Saparmurat
Turkmenbashy № 6185 from 31 March 2003. In traveling sheet of the driver intended for
transportation of people, there shall be a motor transport service mark: «For transportation of
people» and indicated possible number of transported passengers. The traveling sheet shall be
signed by the person responsible for safe operation of the given vehicle. During
transportation of people the driver must define route of the vehicle with instructions of
dangerous parts of the road.
It is forbidden to transport people, including loaders, in bodies of cars-dump-body trucks,
trailers, semi trailers and tanks, and in bodies of the onboard cars specially equipped for
transportation of people.
Only the drivers having special permission of the head of a motor transport service are
allowed to management lorries intended for transportation of people.
Workers responsible for security provision and seniors of the group shall appointed in
transportation of people.
Special platforms shall be equipped or other devices providing safety of people is used in
Boarding and drop-off places. Before starting the engine the driver is obliged to be convinced
of correctness of Boarding and drop-off of people and to warn them about the movement
beginning.
Movement of vehicles on ice of the rivers and reservoirs is allowed only on specially
designated routes having indications about maximum permissible load-carrying capacity of
ice passage. Movement is permitted with opened doors of the driver. The head of the
organization supervising the passage fixes the Date of opening and the movement termination
on ice passage.
Unloading of cars-dump-body trucks on embankments or in dredging shall be fixed not
closer than 1 m from the edge natural slope (border of prism of a collapse), and unloading
from the pier the latter shall be equipped with reliable timber fenders.
Cars-dump-body trucks shall be supplied with special props for bearing the body in necessary
cases in the lifted position. It is not allowed to carry out maintenance service of the car-dump-
body truck with the lifted body without installation of props for bearing the body. A
movement of cars-dump-body trucks with the lifted body is forbidden.
People are not allowed in towed transport means. (except for the driver).
Backward movements of the vehicle where any works are being carried out are executed by
the driver only under the command of individuals engaged in these works.

6. WELDING AND GAS-FLAME WORKS

6.1 During performance of electric welding and gas-flame works it is necessary to fulfill
requirements of the present norms and rules, TDS-12.3.003-86 and TDS-12.3.036-84, as well
as Sanitary welding rules, built-up welding and cutting of metals approved in established
order. Moreover, during performance of electric welding works it is necessary to fulfill the
requirements TDS-12.1.013-78 and ПТБ ЭЭП User Safety Rules during operation of
Electrical Equipment.
6.2 Places of performance of electrical welding and gas-flame works on given, as well as on
below located circles (in the absence of fireproof protective flooring or flooring protected by
fireproof material) shall be released from combustible materials in radius not less than 5 m,
and from explosive materials and installations (including gas bags and gas generators) - 10
m.).
During element cutting of structure, measures to prevent accidental falling of cut elements
shall be taken.
To make welding, cutting and heating by open flame devices, vessels and pipelines containing
under pressure any liquids or gases, filled with combustible or harmful substances or related
to electro technical devices, is not allowed without coordination with the maintaining
organization of actions for safety maintenance.
During performance of electrical welding and gas-flame works inside of closed capacities or
structure cavities it is necessary to provide workplaces with exhaust ventilation. Air Speed in
capacity (cavity) shall be within 0,3-1,5 km/s. In case of performance of welding works using
liquefied gases (propane, butane) and carbonic acids the exhaust ventilation shall have suction
below.
Before welding (cutting) of capacities with combustible liquids or acids, they shall be cleaned,
washed, dried and subsequently checked confirming absence of dangerous concentration of
harmful substances.
Simultaneous performance of electrical welding and gas-flame works inside of closed
capacities not allowed.
Illumination during performance of welding operations inside of capacities shall be carried
out by means of the fixtures installed outside, or by means of manual portable lamps with
voltage of no more than 12 B. Welding transformer shall be placed out of the welded capacity.
Fixation of gas supplying sleeves on nipples of burner, cutters and reducers, as well as in
places of escalating of sleeves shall be carried out with the help of tension band
Welding current supply to electrode holders and to burners for arc welding it is necessary to
use isolated flexible cables intended for reliable work at the maximum electric loadings taking
into account duration of a welding.
Junction of welding cables shall be carried out as a rule by molding, welding and soldering.
Connection of cables to welding device shall be carried out by means of molded or solder
cable lug.
In laying or moving of welding wires it is necessary to take measures against damage of their
isolation and contact with water, oil, steel ropes and hot pipelines. The distance from welding
wires to hot pipelines and cylinders with oxygen shall be not less than 0,5 m, and with
combustible gases - not less than 1 m.
Reliable protection of the elements under the pressure shall be provided in electrical welding
devices and their power supply.
Metal parts electrical welding equipment, not under the pressure, as well as welding items and
structures during entire welding time shall be earthed, and moreover welding transformer
shall have connected earthling bolt of the case to secondary winding clip joined to return
cable.
Performance of electrical welding works during the rain or snowfall at the absence of shelters
over electrical welding equipment and workplace of the electric welder is not allowed.
Workplaces of welders indoors during welding by opened arch shall be separated from
adjacent workplaces and passes by fireproof screens (screens, boards) with the height not less
than 1,8 m.
During welding in the open air such protections shall be put in case of simultaneous work of
several welders close to each other and on the sites of intensive movement of people
Gas vessels are allowed to convey, store, deliver and receive only for the people who
underwent management training.
Gas vessels shall be protected from the strike and effect of direct sunbeam and removed from
heating devices at the distance of not less than 1 m.
Gas vessels shall be stored in special dry and aired premises according to requirements
Installation order and safety operation of vessels working under the pressure, approved in
established order. Empty vessels shall be stored separately from the vessels filled with gas.
Upon completion of work gas vessels shall be placed specially allocated for storage place
excluding access of other persons, and portable acetylene generators shall be released from
carbide calcium with its subsequent removal in specially allocated places.
During operation, storage and moving of oxygen vessels, measures against contact of vessels
and sleeves with lubricants, as well as clothes and cleaning material having marks of oils shall
be provided.
Moving of gas vessels shall be carried out on specially intended trolleys, in containers and
other devices providing steady position of vessels.
Placing of acetylene generators in passages, places of mass stay or pass of people, as well as
near place of air intake by compressors or fans is not allowed.
It is not allowed using of a device for metal cutting operated in liquid fuel during performance
of gas-flame works in tanks, wells and other closed capacities.
During quality control of welded seams with the help of gamma scale crack detection it is
necessary to fulfill the requirements of Basic sanitary rules of work with radioactive
substances and other sources of the ionizing radiation, approved in established order.
During quality control of welded seams with the help of ultrasound it is necessary to fulfill the
technical operation of electrical installation requirements.

7. HANDLING OPERATIONS

7.1 Handling operations shall be carried out as a rule, by mechanized way according to
requirements of the present norms and rules, TDS-12.3.009-76* (СТ СЭВ 3518-81) and
Installation rules and safety operation of handling cranes approved in established order.
During execution handling operations connected with use of railway means or motor
transport, it is necessary, to observe safety engineering rules and industrial sanitary at
handling operations on railway transportation, labor safety Rules on motor transport approved
in established order.
Area for handling operations shall be planned and have scope not more than 5°.
In appropriate places it is necessary to install the sign «Entrance», «Exit», « U-turn» and etc.
7.3 Hoisting machines, load gripping mechanism, containerization and packing means used
during performance of handling works, shall meet the requirements of standard documents for
them.
Slinging of cargoes shall be carried out by inventory slings or special load gripping
mechanisms made under approved project (drawing). Slinging methods shall exclude falling
or sliding possibility of cargo.
Installation (packing) of cargoes to transport means shall be providing steady position of
cargo at transportation and unloading.
During performance of handling works displacement of slinging cargo in unstable position,
and removal of slinging devices are not allowed
During movement of cargoes especially in glass container shall be taken measures for
prevention of jerk and blow.
Handling operations with dust-like materials (cement, lime, plaster, etc.) shall be carried out
in mechanized way. Manual works on cement unloading, as exception, is permitted to carry
out at the temperature not above 40 °С.
Before loading or unloading of panels, blocks and other modular ferro-concrete structures
assembly loops shall be examined, cleared from solution or concrete and if necessary
corrected without structure damage.
During loading of vehicles by excavators or cranes, the drivers and other individuals are not
permitted to be in the body of the vehicle which is not protected with shield.
At loading of transport means it is necessary to consider, that the top of transported cargo
shall not exceed dimensional height passages under bridges, as well as tunnels passages.
Unloading of transport means from piers without fender bars is not allowed.

8. ISOLATING OPERATIONS

During performance isolating works (waterproofing, heat insulating, anticorrosive) with use
of inflammable materials, as well as discharging harmful substances it is necessary to provide
protection of working from affect of harmful substances as well as from thermal and chemical
burns.
During performance of anticorrosive operations TDS-12.3.016-87 requirements besides of
requirements of the present norms and rules.
Bituminous cement shall be delivered to workplaces as a rule through bitumen supply line or
by means of handling vehicle. In case of need of moving of hot bitumen to workplaces
manually it is necessary to use metal tanks having the form of the truncated cone, wide part
downwards, with densely closed covers and shut-off devices.
It is not allowed to use in work bituminous cement with the temperature higher than 180 °С.
Pots for boiling and a warming up of bitumen mastics shall be equipped with devices for
gauging of temperature of mastic and densely closed covers. Put into pot filling material must
be dry. Hit of ice and snow into pot is inadmissible. Near boiling pot there shall be fire
extinguishing means.
Use of device with opened fire for heating bitumen structures inside of premises is not
allowed.
During performance of isolating works inside of devices or closed premises their airing and
local electric lighting from the electric system under the pressure not higher 12 B with
armature in explosion-proof execution shall be provided.
Before the beginning of isolating works in devices and other closed capacities all electric
motors shall be disconnected, and on pull-on technological pipelines to put blind flanges and
in corresponding places to hang out the posters (inscriptions) warning about work of devices.
During performance of works using hot bitumen by several working chains the distance
between them shall be not more than 10 m.
Glass-wool and slag wool shall be delivered to the work place in containers or packages,
following conditions excluding spraying.
On surfaces of structures or equipment after covering them with heat insulating materials
fixed by knitting wire for the purpose of preparation for daub isolation shall not be coming
out ends of the wire.
Heat insulating works on technological equipment and pipelines shall be executed in
accordance with TDS-12.3.038-85 and, as a rule, before their installation or after constant
fastening in accordance with the project.
In preparation of coating composed of solvent and bitumen, molten bitumen shall be poured
in solvent.
Do not allow pouring in solvent to molten bitumen.
9. EARTH WORKS

9.1 Prior to beginning performance of earth works in places of location of operating


underground communications these shall be developed and coordinated with the
organizations, maintaining these communications, actions for safe working conditions, and
the arrangement of underground communications places shall be designated by corresponding
signs or inscriptions.
Performance of earth works in zone of operating underground communications shall be
carried out under direct management of the manager of the works or the master, and in
security cable zone under the pressure, or functioning gas pipeline, under supervision of
workers electric - or gas economy.
In case of detection of explosive materials earthling operations in these areas shall be stopped
immediately till gaining permission from corresponding agencies.
Prior to beginning performance of earthling works on the areas with possible pathogenic
infection of soil (dump, burial ground for animal refuse, cemeteries, etc.) there is need
permission of State sanitary-and-epidemiologic service bodies of the of Ministry of Health
and medical industry of Turkmenistan.
Foundation pits and the trenches developed in streets, passages, in yard of settlements, as well
as places of movement of people and transport, shall be protected by protective fence taking
into account requirements TDS-23407-78. Warning inscriptions and signs, and at night -
alarm illumination shall be installed on fences.
Places of passage of people through trenches shall be equipped with passage bridges,
illuminated during the night times.
Muck from foundation pit and trenches shall be placed at the distance of not less than 0.5 m
from pit edge.
Working out of the soil in foundation pits and trenches “undermining” is not allowed.
Detritus and stones as well as soil layers found in scopes shall be removed.
Trenching of foundation pits and trenches with vertical walls without strengthening in
unrocky and not frozen soils above the level of underground waters and at the absence of
close to underground installations is allowed to the depth not more, m:
1,0 – in filling, sandy and large fragmental soils;
1,25 – in loamy sands;
1,50 – in clay loam and clay.
9.10 Trenching of foundation pit and trenches with scope without fastening in unrocky
soils above the level of underground waters (taking into account capillary lifting) or in soils,

Table 4

Note: During bedding of various kinds of soils steepness of scopes for all measures subject to mark on the most weak kind of the so
dried with the help of artificial water lowering, is allowed at the depth of the pit and steepness
of scopes as per table 4.
The steepness of slopes of dredging with the depth more than 5 m in all cases and depth less
than 5 m under hydro-geological conditions and kinds of soils, not provided p. 9.10 and tab. 4,
shall be established by the project.
At impossibility of using of inventory fastenings of walls of foundation ditches or tranches it
is necessary to apply the fastenings made under individual projects, approved in established
order.
At installation of fastenings their top part shall come out over pit edge not less than for 15 sm.
It is necessary to establish fastenings in bottom-up direction in accordance with development
of the pit to the depth not more than 0,5 m.
Dismantling of fastenings shall be carried out in bottom-up direction in accordance with side
layer of the pit.
Working out of tranches with vertical walls without fastening with rotor-type and trench
excavator in cohesive soils (loams, clay) is allowed to the depth no more than 3 m. In places
where stay of workers is required, shall be arranged fastenings of tranches or slopes.
Performance of works in foundation pits and trenches with slopes, exposed to humidifying, is
permitted only after careful survey by the executor of works (master) of a condition of slope
soil and collapse of unstable soil in places where "peaks" or cracks (delimitation) have been
detected.
Prior to admission of workers to foundation pits or trenches with depth more than 1,3 m shall
be checked stability of slopes or fastening of walls.
Foundation pits and the trenches developed in winter, in case of thaw has set in shall be
examined, and by results of survey measures related to provision of stability of slopes or
fastenings shall be taken.
In cases of necessity of performance of works connected with electrical heating of soil,
requirements TDS-12.1.013-78 shall be observed.
Warmed up area shall be protected, warning signals established, and illuminated at night. The
distance between protection and a contour of a warmed up site should be not less than 3 m.
On the warmed up area under the pressure, stay of people is not allowed.
9.20 Lines of temporary power supply to warm up sites of the soil shall be carried out though
isolated wire, and after each moving of an electric equipment and transposition of electric
wiring it is necessary to check their serviceability visually.
9.21 During extraction of the soil from dredging by means of tubs it is necessary to arrange
protective shelter- shield for covering working in dredging.
9.22 Loading of the soil to the dump trucks shall be carried out from back or side flange.
9.23 During working out of dredging in soil by excavator with direct shovel the face height
shall be defined so that in the course of work "peaks" could not form from the soil.
During working out, transportation, unloading, lay-out and packing of the soil by two and
more self-propelled or hook-on vehicles (scrapers, graders, skating rinks, bulldozers, etc.),
going one after another, and distance between them shall be not less than 10 m.
One-sided filling up pocket at just laid breast walls and foundations is allowed after
realization of measures providing stability of structures, under accepted conditions, ways and
filling up order.
During working out of the soil by hydro mechanization method:
Work zone of hydro monitor within the limits of one-and-a-half distance of action of its flow,
as well as zone of possible collapse of soil within the limits of no less than three days
elaboration shall consequently designate by warning signs and inscriptions and fence bottom;
Arrangement of hydro monitor with manual (directly by operator) management shall be so
that between head beam of hydro monitor and bottom wall has been provided the distance
not less the than height of face and between hydro monitor and overhead power transmission
line in all cases-not less than double distance of action of its water flow;
Water conduit and sludge line shall be placed beyond the limits of a security zone of overhead
power transmission line;
slide valve to stop water flow in emergency situations shall be provided on water conduit
within the limits not more than 10 m from the working place of hydro observer;
drop places of washed soil is subject to fencing or marked with warning signs;
cleaning up of control receiver standage is allowed only after switching on of hydro monitor
and hydraulic dredge;
perform works during the storm is not allowed;
working place of hydro monitor observer shall be protected from bottom by protection screen;
During development of the soil by explosive way it is necessary to follow Single safety
rules during explosive works, approved in established order.
At mechanical impact tillage of soil the presence of people at the distance closer than 5 m
from tillage places is allowed.

10. STONEWORK

At moving and giving of brick, ceramic stones and small blocks to the workplace by handling
cranes it is necessary to use pallets, containers and load gripping mechanism excluding falling
of cargo at lifting.
During construction of walls of the buildings to the height till 0,7 m from working flooring
and distance from its level behind erected wall till earth surface (overlapping) more than 1,3
m it is necessary to use collective protection means (protecting or catching devices) or safety
belts.
Construction of external walls with thickness till 0,75 m in standing position on the wall is not
allowed.
In case of more than 0,75 m thickness wall it is allowed to perform laying from wall, using
safety belt fixed to special safety device.
10.4 Construction of walls of the subsequent floor of buildings without installation of
interfloor overlapping bearing structures, as well as platforms and marches in staircases is not
allowed.
During construction of the wall higher than 7 m it is necessary to use safety shields through
the perimeter of the building meeting the following requirements:
width of protective shields shall be not less than 1,5 m, and they shall be fixed with bias to a
wall so that the corner, formed between the bottom part of a wall of the building and shield
surface were 110 °, and the backlash between the wall of building and shield flooring did not
exceed 50 mm;
Protective shields shall sustain evenly distributed snow loading specified for given climatic
area, and concentrated loading not less than 1600 Н (160 kg), enclosed to the middle of span;
The first row of protective shields shall have continuous flooring at the height no more than 6
m from the earth and will remain before the full termination of walls construction, and the
second row made by continuous or from mesh materials with cell no more 50x50 mm, -
established at the height of 6-7 m over the first row, and then on construction course to be
rearranged through each 6-7 m
Workers engaged in installation, clearing or removal of protective shields, shall work with
safety belts. To go on shields, to use them as scaffold, and put on them materials is not
permitted.
Construction of wall with the height till 7 m with marking dangerous zones through the
perimeter of the building is permitted to perform without installation of protective shields.
At laying of industrial brick pipes not allowed performance of works on the top of pipes
during the thunderstorm or the wind with the speed more than km/s
On the height of 2,5-5m double protective flooring from boards with thickness not less than
40 mm shall be installed over place of lift loading.
To remove temporary fastenings of elements of cornice or wall covering, is allowed after
achieving stability of solution established by the project.
Construction of stone structures by freezing method is allowed at the presence of instructions
in the project about possibility, order and conditions of using such method.
Method of Defrosting of structures shall be defined for stone structures performed by
freezing method (natural or artificial) and measures to provide firmness and geometric
invariability of the structures for the period of defrosting and admission of solution firmness
shall be specified.
Constant control shall be organized in the period of defrosting and curing of solution in stone
structures performed by the method of freezing. Presence of persons in the building or
installation who are not engaged in measures on provision of firmness of specified structures
is not allowed.
Processing of natural stones within the territory of the site shall be carried out in specially
allocated places, where presence of persons not engaged in these works is not allowed.
Working places, located at the distance of not less than 3 m from each other shall be divided
by protective screens.

11. CONCRETE AND REINFORCED CONCRETE WORKS


Decking used for construction of monolithic concrete structures, it is necessary to fabricate
and use in accordance with the works performance project approved in established order.
During installation of decking elements for several tiers the following tier shall be fixed only
after fixation of the lower tier.
Placement of equipment and materials on the decking not specified in works performance
project as well as presence of people not engaged in performance of works on the covering of
the decking is not allowed.
Dismantling of the decking shall be carried out (after achieving specified firmness of the
concrete) with permission of works performer and particular responsible structures with
permission of the chief engineer (under the list approved by the project).
Purveyance and processing of reinforcement shall be executed in specially allocated for this
and correspondently equipped places.
In execution of works on purveyance of reinforcement it is necessary:
enclose places, intended for unwinding of coil (reeling) and straightening of fittings;
during cutting of reinforcement bar by engineering tools for cutoff with the length of 0,3 m it
is necessary to use accessories providing their throw out;
enclose the working place during processing of reinforcement bars coming out from the size
of workbench and double sided workbenches divide the workbench in the middle by
longitudinal metallic protective cell not higher than 1 m;
assemble prepared fixing in special allocated for this places;
Close by shields butt-end parts of reinforcement bars in 1 m wide general passages.
11. 7 In performance of works on tendon jacking it is necessary: fix in passage places working
protective enclosures not higher than 1,8 m; equip installation to tighten the reinforcement
with warning signal, activated in switching of the drive of stretching device; do not allow
presence of persons at the distance of closer 1 m from reinforcement bars heated by current.
11.8 Elements of cage of reinforcement shall be packaged taking into account their lifting,
storage and to mounting area transportation conditions.
11.9 Using steam for heating inert materials which are in bunkers or other capacities, it is
necessary to use measures against penetration of steam to working premises. Steam pipeline
shall be regularly checked for tightness and integrity of heat insulation. Faucet of steam
pipelines shall be placed in places with comfortable approaches to them.
11.10 Descent of workers to the steam heated chambers is allowed after switching off
supply of the steam as well as cooling of the camber including materials and items in it till 40
°С.
In preparation of concrete mix using chemical additives it is necessary to take measures to
prevent burn of the skin and injury of eyes of the workers.
Bunkers (bucket) for concrete mix shall comply with TDS-21807-76. Movement of loaded or
empties bunker is permitted only with closed closure.
Assembly, disassembly and repair of concrete supplier as well as removal of left concrete
(faucets) is allowed only after lowering of the pressure till atmospheric.
In cleaning (testing, blowing off) of concrete suppliers with compressed air, the workers not
engaged in performance of this operation shall be removed from concrete supplier to the
distance of not less than 10 m.
Every day prior to laying the concrete to the decking it is necessary to check condition of
container decking. Detected shortcomings shall be removed immediately. Prior to lying of
concrete mix by vortex it is necessary to check exactness and reliability of fixation of all
chains of vortex between them and safety cable.
In lying of the concrete from buckets or bunker the distance between lower edge of the
buckets or bunker and earlier fixed concrete or the surface where the concrete is laid shall be
not more than 1 m, if other distances are not provided by works performance project.
In tightening of the concrete mix by electrovibrators it is not allowed to move vibrator behind
current supplying hoses and in break times during the work and in transition from one place to
another the electrovibrators shall be switched off.
Workers laying the concrete mix on the surfaces with the slope over than 20°, shall use safety
belts.
Trestles for supply of concrete mix by dump trucks shall be equipped with fender skids. Not
less than 0,6 m passages shall be provided between fender skids and fence. Crosscut fender
skids shall be fixed on lateral trestles.
In electrical heating of the concrete, the assembly and connection of electrical equipment to
power system shall be executed only by wiremen having skilled group on safety rules not
lower than III.
In the zone of electrical heating it is necessary to use isolated flexible cables or wires in
protective hose. It is not allowed laying of wire directly on the earth or scob layers as well as
wire with upset isolation.
During electrical heating of the concrete, the electrical heating zone shall have protective
enclosure, meeting TDS-23407-78, light alarm system and security signs. Signal lamps shall
be switched on so that during their blowing voltage supply could be switched off.
Concrete electrical heating zone shall be under round-the-clock control of electricians
performing assembly of power supply.
Presence of persons and performance of any works in these areas is not allowed, except for
works performed by personnel possessing not less than II electrical safety qualification degree
and using corresponding safety means.
Opened (not concrete-enveloped) concrete of reinforced concrete structures connected with
the area under electrical heating subject to earthing (neutral grounding).
After each movement of electrical equipment used in concrete heating to the new place it is
necessary to check conditions of wire isolation, enclosure and grounding safety means.

12. INSTALLATION WORKS


On the site (division) where installation works are conducted, performance of other works and
presence of outsiders is not allowed.
In construction of buildings and installations it is not allowed perform works connected with
presence of people in one section (division, site) on the floors (tiers) in the place of
displacement, installation and temporary fixation of building block or equipment.
At erection of one-section buildings or constructions simultaneous performance of assembly
and other civil work on different floors (circles) is allowed at presence between them reliable
(proved in accordance with calculation on action of shock loadings) floors under the written
order of the chief engineer after realization of measures providing safe performance of works,
and under condition of presence of specially assigned persons on the place of works
responsible for safe performance of assembly and displacement of cargoes by cranes, and
also for control of performance by the crane operator, slinger and signalmen of labor safety
industrial instructions.
12.3 Constructional elements and equipment slinging methods shall provide their supply to
installation place in the position close to design.
12. 4 Lifting of precast concrete structures not having assembly loops or labels, providing
correct slinging and installation is forbidden.
12.5 Cleaning of subject to assembly constructional elements from dust and naled shall be
carried out prior to lifting.
12.6 Slinging of structures and equipment shall be executed by load gripping means meeting
the requirements of p 7.4 and providing possibility of remote removal of slings from working
horizon in cases when height till latch mechanism of load gripping means do not exceed 2 m.
12.7 Elements of mounted designs or equipment during moving shall be kept from rocking
and rotation by flexible delays.
Presence of people in construional elements and equipment during their lifting or diplacement
is not allowed.
Leaving of lifted constructional elements and equipment hanging during break times is not
allowed.
Guy lines for temporary fixation of mounted structures shall be fixed to reliable support
(foundations, anchors, etc.). The number of guy lines, their materials and section, tension
methods and place of fixation is established by works performance project. Guy lines shall be
located outside of dimensions of movement of transport and construction vehicles. . Guy lines
shall not touch sharp corners of other structures. Bending of guy lines in places of contact
with the elements of other structures is allowed only after checking durability and stability of
these elements under the influence of efforts from guy lines.
Inventory ladders, crossovers and traps with enclosures shall be used for erectors to pass from
one structure to another.
Transition of erectors through established structures and their elements (girders, crossbars,
etc.) on which it is impossible to install enclosure providing the width of the passage in
accordance with p.2.23 without using special safety devices (reliably tensed along the girders
or crossbar of rope for fastening of a carbine of the safety belt, etc.) is not allowed.
12.12 Fixed in final position constructional elements or equipment shall be fixed to provide
their firmness and geometrical immutability.
Removal of slings of constructional elements and equipment fixed in final position shall be
carried out after constant and temporary reliable fixation. Move fixed constructional elements
or equipment after removal of slings, except for those cases specified in works performance
projects (WPP) is not allowed.
12.13 It is not allowed to perform assembly works at the height in opened places at the speed
of wind 15m/s and more, during ice-slicks, thunderstorm, or frog, excluding visibility within
the bounds of work front. Works on displacement and installation of vertical panel and similar
structures with big windage shall be stopped at wind speed of 10m/s and over.
12.14 Presence of people under mounted elements of structures and equipment before
installation in final position and fixation is not allowed. If presence of workers under the
mounted equipment (structures), and also on the equipment (structures) required he special
measures providing safety of workers shall be carried out.
Mounted assembly sites, ladders and other devices necessary for work of erectors at the
height, it is necessary to establish and fix on mounted structures before their lifting.
In performance of assembly (disassembly) works under conditions of functioning enterprise
operated power networks and other functioning engineering systems in the zone of works
shall be as a rule switched off and equipment and hydraulic hookups released form explosive,
combustion and dangerous agents.
During performance of assembly operations it is not allowed using for fixation of
technological and assembly tooling equipment hydraulic hookups as well as technological and
construction structures without agreement with individuals responsible for proper operation.
Prior to performance of assembly works it is necessary to define conventional symbol
exchange order between assembly operations supervisor and the operator (machinist). All the
symbols are given by one person (erection crew chief, work team leader, and scaffold worker)
except for stop signal which can be given by any workers who noticed danger.
In peculiar responsible cases (lifting of structures using difficult lifting gear, method of
rotations, sliding large sized and heavy structures, lifting them by two or more mechanisms
and etc ) the signal can be made only by erection crew chief at the presence of engineering
and technical personnel responsible for development and performance of technical measures
on provision of safety demands.
12.19 In sliding (hauling) of structures and equipment by construction hoist the load-carrying
ability of brake construction hoist shall be equal to load-carrying ability of tractive, if others
were not specified by the project.
Erection of structures of each following tiers (area) of the building and installation shall by
carried out only after reliable fixation of all the elements of previous tiers (area) as per the
project.
Mounted metallic ladders over 5 m in height shall comply with requirements of p 2.24 or be
fenced by metallic arches with vertical connections and reliably fixed to the structure or
equipment. Lifting of workers through mounted ladders to the height of more than 10 m is
allowed only in cases if the ladders are equipped with rest zones not less than through every
10m by height.
In assembly of wire-frame building, establishment of the following tiers of skeleton frame is
allowed only after installation of enclosure structures or temporary fences on previous tier.
During assembly of structures, buildings or installations the erectors shall be on earlier
installed and reliable fixed structures or scaffold.
Erection of flight of stairs and squares of buildings (installations) as well as cargo-passenger
construction lifts shall be executed simultaneously with erection of building structures.
Enclosures shall be installed immediately on mounted flight of stairs.
In the division where erection of building structure is being carried out it is no allowed
using of cargo-passenger lifts during displacement of constructional elements.
In erection of fabricated metals from rolls, measures against spontaneous folding of the roll
shall be taken.
Coloration and rust-preventive protection of structures and equipment in cases when they are
executed on the site, shall be carried out as a rule prior to their lifting to the project sign. After
the lifting, coloration and rust-preventive protection shall be applied only in the link-up places
or connections of structures.
Unpacking and depreservation of subject to erection equipment shall be carried out in zone,
allocated in accordance with works performance project and executed on special stillage or
pads not higher than 100mm.
During depreservation of equipment it is not allowed use of materials with explosive and fire-
hazardous means.
Site joint and prefabrication of subject for erection structures and equipment (cutting of rifle
on tubes, bending of tubes, adjustment of joints and other similar works) shall be carried out
as rule on specially intended for these places.
In Process of performance of erecting operations combination of holes and check of their
coincidence in mounted elements shall be executed using special instruments (taper arbor,
assembly corks and etc). Check of coincidence of holes in mounted elements by fingers is not
allowed.
During erection of horizontal drums composed of separate side-bars, slip cleats and other
devices excluding possibilities of spontaneous seaward run of side-bars shall be used.
During erection of equipment under conditions of explosive environment, instruments,
accessories and tooling excluding possibilities of spark formation shall be used.
Spontaneous or accidental switch on of equipment in the process of erection shall be
excluded.
In the process of move of structures or equipments by several lifting or tractive means shall
be excluded possibility of overloading of any of these means.
At moving of structures or equipment the distance between them and coming out parts of the
mounted equipment or other structures shall be across not less than 1 m, on vertical-0,5m.
Deviation angle on vertical of cargo ropes and polyspast of load-lifting means in the process
of installation shall not exceed the size specified in passport, approved in the project or
legislative document for this load-lifting means
In the process of equipment erection using hoisting jacks shall be taken measures excluding
possibilities of obliquity or tripping of hoisting jacks.
At descent of structures or equipment on inclined plane it is necessary to apply the brake
means providing necessary regulation of speed of descent.
Installation of knots of the equipment and links of pipelines and air pipes near electric wires
(within the distance equal to the greatest length of the mounted knot or link) it shall be made
at the removed pressure. At impossibility of removal of pressure the work shall be carried out
under the dress-admission approved in established order.
All works on removal of constructive shortcomings and liquidation of defects on the mounted
process equipment tested by product shall be carried out only after working out and
affirmation by the customer and the general contractor together with corresponding
subcontract organizations of labor safety measures.
Installation and removal of squinches (communications) between mounted and functioning
equipment, and also enable of temporary installations to functioning systems (electric, steam,
technological etc.) without written permission of the general contractor and the customer is
not allowed.
At dismantling of structures and equipment it is necessary to execute requirements qualified
to erection works.
Synchronous dismantling of structures or dismantling of equipment in two or more tiers on
one vertical is not allowed.

13. ELECTRIC INSTALLATION WORK


In the process of electric equipment installation it is necessary to fulfill requirements of TDS-
12.3.032-84* (СТ СЭВ 4032-83), ПТЭ ЭП User’s Electrical Equipment standard code and
ПТБ ЭЭП User’s Electrical Equipment standard code and the general requirements qualified
to erection works (section 12).
It is not allowed to use not accepted in operation in established order electric networks,
switching centers, boards, panels and their separate branches and to attach them as temporary
electric networks and installations, and also to execute electrical installation works on the
mounted and transferred under adjustment electrical installation without permission of
setting-up organizations.
Persons engaged in electrical installation works, shall not perform the works related to
operation of an electrical equipments of the customer and the general contractor.
It is not allowed to carry out works or be at the distance less than 50 m from the place of test
of air switches.
The safety valve on an air collector of air switches shall be adjusted and tested for the
pressure not exceeding working more than by 10 %. In the process of performance of works
connected with presence of people inside of air collector, gates on pipelines for air supply in
air collector shall be closed with installation of locks and to hang out warning posters. Bleed -
off gates shall be opened and marked with warning posters or inscriptions.
13.4 Moving, lifting and installation disconnectors and cutting type other devices is carried
out in position "Switched on", and supplied with returnable springs or mechanisms of free
distribution - in position "Switched off"
During performance of works on adjustment of switches and disconnectors, connected to
drives, the measures warning about possibility of unforeseen switching or switching-off shall
be taken.
Safety devices of control circuit of mounted mechanism shall be removed for the whole
period of erection.
In case of need of supply of operative current for approbation of electric chains and devices
on them it is necessary to establish precautionary posters, signs or inscriptions, and the works
which not connected with approbation, shall be stopped, and the people engaged in these
works, led out.
Supply of pressure for electric equipment approbation is carried out under the written demand
of the responsible person of the electrical assembly organization (the master or the
construction superintendent), appointed by special order.
On mounted transformers outlet of preliminary and repeated windings shall be short-circuited
and grounded for the whole period of performance of electrical assembly works.
Prior to the beginning of drying of electric mechanisms and transformers by electric current
their cases shall be earthed.
Drying of transformers in own casing or in special metal tank by induction losses method
shall be carried out, taking the measures excluding possibility of touch to the magnetizing
winding.
At measurements of resistance of isolation in the course of drying by electric supply current
of magnetizing and working windings shall be disconnected.
In premises where installation of the battery pack is carried out, prior to the beginning of
works under ration of plates and pouring of jars with electrolyte, painting and decorating
operations shall be finished, systems of ventilation, heating and illumination tested and in
accessible places capacities for neutralization of acids and alkalis established.
Tightening of wires through lingering boxes, boxes, pipes, blocks with the wires inside which
are under the pressure, as well as wiring and cabling in pipes, trays and the boxes which have
been not fixed under the project, are not allowed.
Check of resistance of isolation of wires and cables with the help megaohmmeter shall be
made by the personnel with qualifying group on electrical safety not low then III. The ends of
wires and cables which in the course of test can be under the pressure shall be isolated or
protected.
At performance of installation works from cranes opened trolleys under the pressure, lighting
networks and power trunk which are in the zone of work, shall be disconnected or protected.
During cabling of lines it is necessary to fulfill requirements СНиП 3.05.06-85. Unwinding of
a cable from drum is permitted only in the presence of the brake device. Cabling which was in
operation is permitted only after its switching-off and grounding.
At heating of a cable by an electric current it is not allowed to apply pressure over 380 V.
Case of electric mechanisms and devices used for heating, at the pressure over 42 B, as well
as metal cover of a cable shall be earthed, on heating sites fire-prevention means shall be
placed and watching organized.
Lighting of torches, blowtorches, heating of cable mass and solder fusion shall be carried out
at the distance not less than 2 m from a cable well. The fused solder and heated cable mass is
allowed to drop into well only in special ladles or closed tanks.
During heating of cable mass for pouring cable boxes and funnels in indoors its ventilation
shall be provided.
Capacities used for heating shall comply with fire safety requirements.
During installation of overhead power transmission line it is necessary:
To earth sites of the mounted transmission line; thus the distance between ground leads shall
be no more than 3 km;
To have wires or elevating cables at height not less than 4,5 m, and in places of transport
passage - at height not less than 6 m.
Presence of workers from the internal corner formed by wires or cables, located on support or
on the earth is not allowed.
Electrical mounting works in functioning electrical installations, as a rule, shall be carried out
after removal of pressure from all current carrying parts which are in the zone of works
performance, their detachment from functioning part of electrical installation, provision of
visible ruptures of electric circuit and grounding of disconnected current carrying parts. The
zone of performance of works shall be separated from functioning part of electrical
installation by the continuous or meshy enclosure preventing casual penetration into this part
of the personnel of the assembly organization.
Passage of the personnel and passage of mechanisms of the assembly organization to the
screened zone of works performance as a rule, shall not be conjugated with crossing of
premises and territories where functioning electrical installations are located.
Allocation of works performance zone for the assembly organization, acceptance of measures
on prevention of erroneous supply of voltage and enclosure from functioning part with
indication of places of passage of the personnel and passage of mechanisms shall be made out
by admission certificate according to the appendix 2. The personnel of the assembly
organization perform works related to order-admission issued in the form as per the appendix
3. During issue of order-admission for performance of works shall be specified including
other electrical safety measures provided by mentioned above admission certificate.
In cases when installation works are to be carried out in functioning opened or closed
distributors, fulfilling the requirements stated in p 13.20 and if thus there is no possibility to
fulfill requirement of p 13.21 works shall be executed under order-admission issued in the
form as per the appendix 3. In these cases the admission to works shall be carried out by
operation personnel of the maintaining organization. Passage of the personnel and passage of
mechanisms in the territory of functioning part of the distributor to fenced zone of works
performance is allowed only to the accompaniment of authorized for this representative of the
maintaining organization.
In unusual cases if it is impossible to fulfill the requirement of p 13.20-13.21 works are
carried out under order-admission issues in the form as per the appendix 3 in which along
with other requirements there shall be instruction that the works in given site is allowed to be
carried out only in the presence of the representative of the maintaining organization –
observing. Observer bears responsibility for safety of temporary enclosures of workplaces,
precautionary posters and prevention of supply of working voltage to the disconnected current
conducting parts, observance by members of the assemblers’ crew safe distances to the current
carrying parts under the voltage.
The personnel of the electrical assembly organizations before admission to work in
functioning electrical installations shall be instructed about electrical safety matters in
workplace by the responsible person admitting to work.
Working voltage on again mounted electrical installation can be supplied only under the
decision of the working commission. In need of elimination of revealed defects electrical
installation shall be disconnected and transferred to the category of invalid by dismantle of
loops, tires, descents to the equipment or detachments of cables and the disconnected current
carrying parts shall be short-circuited and earthed for the whole time of performance of works
related to elimination of defects.

14. TESTING OF EQUIPMENT


Test of the mounted equipment shall be made in accordance with requirements of the present
chapter, rules and the instructions approved by state supervision agencies in established order,
and also instructions of manufacturers on operation of the given equipment.
Prior to equipment test it is necessary:
manager of the works shall acquaint the personnel engaged in tests, with work order and safe
performance measures;
warn workers on the adjacent sites about testing time;
Perform visual, and if necessary by means of devices check of fastening of the equipment,
condition of isolation and grounding of an electric part, presence and serviceability of
armature, starting and brake mechanisms, supervisory instruments and plug fittings;
fence and indicate with corresponding signs testing area;
install the alarm system (if necessary);
provide possibility of emergency switch-off of tested equipment;
check up absence of extraneous subjects inside and outside of equipment;
Indicate with warning signs temporary plug fittings , hatches and flange joints;
establish a posts within visibility limits of another, but is not less than each 200 m from each
other, to warn about dangerous area;
define places and safe conditions of the persons engaged in testing;
set ready fire extinguishing means and the service staff capable to work on liquidation of a
possible fire;
provide illumination of workplaces not less than 50 lux;
Define people responsible for performance of measures on provision of safety of the tests
provided by the program
Equipment survey shall be carried out after decrease in test pressure till working pressure.
In blowing of equipment and tubes after testing, protection enclosures (screens) shall be
installed in front of open hatches and connecting branches.
Testing of equipment under the load shall be executed after its idle testing.
To start testing of equipment is allowed only after timely warning of people around and
receipt of permission from the manager of the testing. During equipment testing it is not
allowed to:

Remove protection fences;


Open hatches, fences, clean and grease the equipment, touch its operating parts;
Carry out checking and correction of electric circuit, electrical equipment and automatic
equipment.

14.7 Remove shortcomings in equipment detected in testing process shall be carried out after
its switching off and full stop.
14.8 Concurrent hydraulic test of several tubings, mounted on one bearing structures or piers
is allowed only in case if these bearing structures or piers are intended for corresponding
loadings.
14.9 During pneumatic testing of pipes protection valves shall be regulated to appropriate
pressure.
14.10 At pneumatic testing of external pipelines of water supply, sewerage system, heat
supply (further pipelines), besides of the requirements of the present chapter, it is necessary to
observe requirements performance rules and acceptance of works, as well as labour safety
rules. It is not allowed making of pneumatic tests of pipelines on piers, in channels and trays
where operating pipelines are laid.
14.11 For the period of conducting pneumatic testing of the pipelines on the trenches, the
dangerous zone the size which is specified in tab. 5 shall be established. Borders of dangerous
zone shall be designated with safety signs according to TDS-12.4.026-76. Presence of people
in dangerous zone in the period of blower and at keeping of the pipeline under the pressure
during testing is not allowed.

Attachment Table 5
Tube material Test pressure Passing-pipe size, Distance from edge
mm of the
(preliminary or trench and pipe ends
accepted) МПа till the border of
dangerous area, m

Steel 0,6-1,6 Till 300 300-1000 7,0 10,0 20,0


Св. 1000
Cast iron 0,15 0,6 Till 500 till 500 10,0 15,0
0,15 Св. 500 20,0
0,6 Св. 500 25,0
Asbestos cement 0,15 Till 500 15,0
0,6 Till 500 20,0
0,15 Св. 500 20,0
0,6 Св. 500 25,0
Plastics:

Unplasticized
polyvinyl- chloride
UPC, type from
1,6
t 1,0 63-315 10,0
s 0,6
sl 0.4
Polypropylene PP, од
type:T
SL 0,6 63-315 8,0
L 0,25
Low pressure
polyethylene
LPP, type :
Т 1,0
С 0,6
СЛ 0,4 63-1200 6,0
Л 0,35
High pressure
polyethylene, HPP type
Т 1,0
С 0,6
СЛ 0,4 63-160 4,0
Л 0,25
(ПВХ,ПП,ПНД,ПВД)* 0,06 110-1200 1,0
Note: * on gravity sewers

14.12 In presence of pipes close to residential or operated public or industrial buildings


pneumatic testing shall be carried out under conditions, that window and door openings of
these buildings situated within the limits of dangerous area defined as per table 5, shall be
closed by protection enclosures (shields, lattices).
14.13 Compressors and manometers used in testing of pipes shall be placed beyond the trench
zone where pipe under the test is situated.
Placement of compressor in dangerous area at the distance not less than 10 m from trench
edge is allowed, in this case it shall be protected by protection fences.
14.14 Inspection of pipes is allowed to carry out only after reduce of the pressure, МПа:
In steel and plastic pipes – till 0,3;
In cast-iron, ferroconcrete and asbestos-cemented – till 0, 1.
Defects of pipes shall be removed after reduce of pressure till atmospheric pressure.
14.15 Tapping of weld joints straight during testing time of pipes and equipment is not
allowed.
14.16 Connect and disconnect the lines, supplying the air from compressor to tested pipe is
allowed only after stop of supplying of the air and reduce of the pressure till atmospheric.
14.17 During performance setup labor on newly mounted electrical installation the working
pressure to can be supplied by the operational personnel only after introduction of operational
mode to electrical installation and in the presence of the written demand of the head of setup
labor.
Allowed temporary supply of the voltage lowed 1000 B for carrying out setup labor under the
constant scheme for boards, management station and power assemblages on which the
operational mode is not entered, but in this case duties on performance of measures providing
safe working conditions in given voltage are bearded to the head if setup labor.

15. ROOFING WORKS


Admission of workers to performance of roofing works is allowed after inspection of
serviceability of bearing structures of roof and enclosures by resident engineer or the master
together with foreman.
During performance of roofing works it is necessary to fulfill requirements TDS-12.3.040-86.
15.2 During performance of works on roof with slope more than 20 ° workers shall use safety
belts. Places of fastening of safety belts shall be specified by the master or resident engineer.
15.3 For pass of the workers performing works on a roof with slope more 20 °, and also on a
roof with the covering which is not intended for loadings from weight of workers, it is
necessary to install traps 0,3 m in width with cross-section laths for support for feet. Traps
during whole operating time shall be fixed.
15.4 To place materials on roof is allowed only in the places provided in works performance
project, with acceptance of measures against their falling, including from wind influence.
During breaks in work technological adaptations, tool and materials shall be fixed or removed
from roof.
15.5 Performance of roofing works during ice, fog excluding visibility within works front,
thunder-storm and wind with the speed 15 km/s and more is not allowed.
15.6 Elements and details of roofs, including expansion piece in joints, protective aprons,
links of drainpipes, runoff, cantilever, etc. it is necessary to give elements to workplaces
prepared. Preparation of the specified elements and details directly on a roof is not allowed.
During performance of works on the device of a roof using bitumen mastics it is necessary to
follow the requirements of section 8.
At performance of roofing works with using bitumen mastics, premises for rest, heating of
people, storage and dinning shall be placed not closer than 10 m from workplaces.

16. FINISHING WORK

Scaffold used in plaster or painting works, in places under which other works are carried out,
shall have flooring without backlashes.
During performance of plaster works using mortar pumping installations it is necessary to
provide two-way communication of the operator with the machinist of installation.
To dry premises of buildings and installations under construction at impossibility of using
heating systems it is necessary to use air heaters (electric or working on liquid fuel). During
installation it is necessary to fulfill Fire security requirements in performance of civil and
erection works, TDS-12.1.004-91.
It is forbidden to warm and dry premise by braziers and other devices allocating in a premise
products of combustion of fuel.
It is necessary to prepare painting structures, as a rule, centrally. At their preparation on site it
is necessary to use for these purposes the premises equipped with ventilation, not supposing
excess of maximum permissible concentration of harmful substances in air of a working zone.
Premises shall be provided with harmless washing-up liquids and warm water. Operation of
mobile painting stations for preparation of the painting structures which have been not
equipped with compulsory ventilation is not allowed. During performance of painting works it
is necessary to fulfill TDS-12.3.035-84 requirements.
It is not allowed to prepare painting structures, violating instructions of manufacturer and use
solvents without certificate with instructions about the character of harmful substances.
In places of using of nitro dye and other paint and varnish materials and structures forming
explosive steams, measures using of fire or causing sparking is forbidden. Electric wiring in
these places shall be disconnected or executed in explosion-proof execution.
Container with explosive materials (varnishes, nitro dyes, etc.) during breaks in work shall be
closed by stoppers or covers and opened by the tool which is not causing sparkling.
During performance of painting works using the structures containing harmful substances, it
is necessary to follow sanitary rules at painting works with application of the manual sprays
approved in established order.
Places of glassworks shall be fenced.
Prior to beginning of glassworks it is necessary to visually check reliability and operability of
windowsash.
Lifting and transportation of the glass to installation place shall be carried out using
corresponding fire safety devices or in special container.

17. INSTALLATION OF FOUNDATION AND DRILLING WORKS

17.1 Performance of drilling works and works on installation of foundation of the buildings
and installations – pile, from artificially grounded soil and etc., constructed near underground
communications as well as in places of presence of highly explosive materials or in places
with pathogenic infection of soil, is allowed only under condition of performance of the
requirements stated in section 9.
17.2 Assembly, dismantle and moving of drill towers and lead towers shall be carried out in
accordance with technological cards under direct management of the persons responsible for
safe performance of specified works. Assembly, dismantle and moving of drill towers and
lead towers at 15 km/s wind and more or thunder-storm is not allowed.
Before lifting of structures of drill towers or lead towers all its elements shall be reliably
fixed, and the tool and loose subjects removed. At lifting of the structures assembled in
horizontal position, all other works in the radius equal to the length of the structure plus of 5
m. shall be stopped.
Technical condition of drill towers or lead towers (reliability of fastening of knots,
serviceability of communications and working floorings) shall be checked before each shift.
Each lead towers and drill towers shall be equipped by the sound alarm system. Before their
start-up in action it is necessary to give a sound signal.
To provide operation safety of drilling device on the lead towers (tower) lifting height limiter
of the drilling instrument or hauling device shall be installed.
It is not allowed to work with drilling instrument with unwrapped till the end and unfastened
threaded connections.
During descent and extraction of boring casing, the persons not participating in performance
of given works, are not allowed to drill towers at the distance less its one-and-a-half height.
Before survey, greasing, cleaning or elimination of any malfunctions of the drilling machine
the drilling instrument shall be put in steady position and the engine switched off.
The drilled chinks at stop of work shall be reliably closed by boards or fenced. On boards and
enclosures shall have warning signs and alarm illumination.
Limit mass of a hammer and pile for lead towers shall be specified on its holding or frame.
Overload limiter shall be installed on lead towers.
Poling is allowed to fix on straight line within the limits of visibility of the machinist of the
lead tower only through angle pulley fixed at lead tower bottom.
Haulage of lead towers shall be carried out on planned area with lowered hammer. Condition
of ways for Haulage of lead towers shall be checked before each shift. In the process of
hammering and after work of lead towers it shall be fixed by antitheft devices.
Lifting of pile driving hammer and poling (rabbet) shall be made consistently. Simultaneous
lifting of pile driving hammer and poling is not allowed.
In the process of cutting of poling rammed in ground it is necessary to provide measures
excluding sudden falling of the cut off part.
17.16 In driving of piles by floating pile driver it is necessary to provide its guying to the
anchors fixed on the coast or in the bottom, and also communication with the coast by means
of persons on duty natatory means or the foot bridge. Floating pile driver shall be provided by
saving means and boat. It is not allowed to carry out pile operations in the rivers and water
reservoirs during roughness over 2 points.
17.17 During driving of ice from the ice it is necessary to control condition and thickness of
the ice at the beginning and end of the shift. Work place shall be cleaned from the snow.
Holes in the ice during diving of piles to them shall be closed by shields or fenced.
17.18 During diving of piles with the help of silent pile drivers it is necessary to provide
dense and reliable connection of silent pile drivers with pile caps, and also free condition
supporting silent pile drivers of the ropes. During each break in the work silent pile drivers
shall be switch off.
17.19 At diving of piles-covers access of workers to the suspended scaffolds for joining to an
immersed pile-cover of silent pile drivers cap or the following section of pile-cover is
permitted only after that submitted structure will be lowered by the crane to the distance no
more than 30 cm from the top of an immersed pile-cover.
17.20 Immersion of the open caisson shall be carried out under direct control of the manager
of the work and the master.
17.21 Walls of open caisson from inside shall be equipped not less than by two reliably fixed
hinged ladders.
17.22 The sequence of working out of the soil under knife edge of the open caisson shall
provide its stability. It is not allowed to develop the soil below 1 m from the knife edge the
well. During working out of mobile soils with water outflow or in the presence of a layer of
such soils above the knife of the well measures on maintenance of the fast evacuation of
people on case of sudden break of ground and well flooding shall be provided.
17.23 On the internal perimeters of the open caisson it is necessary to install protective shield.
The sizes, durability and order of installation of shield shall be defined in the project
17.24 Equipment and pipelines intended for performance of works on freezing of the soil shall
be tested:
Devices of freezing station after completion of the assembly by pneumatic and hydraulic
pressure specified in passport not less than 1,2 МПа (12 kg/sm2) for soaking up and 1,8 МПа
(18 kgs/sm2) for outlet side;
Freezing columns before lowering in chinks by hydraulic pressure not less than 2,5 МПа (25
kgs/sm2).
17.25 Performance of civil work in soil artificial fastening zone by freezing is allowed only
after achievement of design thickness by ice soil fence. Permission for performance of works
shall be drawn up by certificate.
17.26 Extraction of the soil from foundation pit which has ice soil fence is allowed to carry
out during stable protection of frozen wall from the rain and sunbeam. During the work it is
necessary to follow measures on protection of ice soil enclosure from mechanical damages.
17.27 The order of the control of the sizes and temperature of ice soil enclosures of the
foundation pit in the course of freezing and ground thawing shall be specified by the project.
17. 28 Pipelines, hoses and injectors, used in injection works on chemical fixation of soils
(silicatization, etc.), shall be exposed to hydraulic tests by the pressure equal to one-and-a-half
size of the worker, but not later 0,5 МПа (5 kgs/sm2).
17.29 Silicate melting of steam-cured type and other devices which are under the pressure in
the process of service, shall be exposed to regular technical examination and periodical
hydraulic tests according to Vessels installation and safe operation Rules working under
pressure.
17.30 Premises for preparation of solutions fro chemical fixation of the soil shall be equipped
with ventilation and corresponding closed capacities for storage of materials.

18. UNDERGROUND WORKS

In performance of underground works it is necessary to fulfill corresponding requirements of


the present chapter and to observe Safety rules at building of the underground constructions,
confirmed by the Main public service «Туркменстандартлары», and also Rules and norms on
safe conduction of shaft-sinking and tunneling, confirmed in established order by the
ministries and departments.
Measures to prevention and liquidation of breakdown shall be specified for construction of
each underground facility and the workers shall be trained to rules of conduct during possible
breakdown.
Prior to beginning of underground works measures for provision of safety of existing
underground and over ground communications, buildings and installations.
Heads underground works prior to performance shall be familiarized with geological and
hydrological conditions of the site. In change of conditions causing possibility of occurrence
of accidents, works shall be stopped until acceptance of corresponding measures. Each site
shall be provided with the stock of instruments, materials and fire exhausting and other means
required in liquidation of breakdown and their usage instructions.
Temporary fixation of underground output shall be carried out in accordance with the
planning sheet (fixation passport). During change of geological and hydro geological
conditions the planning sheet shall be reviewed.
Control over fixation of output and concordance of geological and hydro geological
conditions of the site to working conditions specified in the project shall be established for the
whole period of underground works.
During sinking of trunk in the bottom, workers shall be protected by safety covering from
falling of items for above.
In tunnel driving by shields:
Mounted shield its mechanisms and accessories are allowed to put into operation only after
their acceptance under the document;
Soil shall be developed only within the limits of shield screens;
It is not allowed to move the shield to the distance exceeding the width of lining ring;
In unstable, loose soil the stall front shall be fixed with temporary fixing and in granular soil
shall be used the shields with horizontal platforms the number of which are subject to be
considered proceeding from conditions of providing stability of slope of the soil on the
platforms;
To move the shield is allowed only in presence and under the supervision of shift boss or
works supervisor, not allowing presence of people near the stall except for observing the
fixation.
18.9 All the electrical equipment used in underground outputs in the presence of explosive
conditions shall be in explosion-proof execution.
18.10 Feeding of the working and emergency electrical lightning of shaft, stulm and tunnels
shall be carried out from various sources.
18.11 Output or areas of the tunnel where electro technical equipment is installed, shall be
fixed with fixing from fireproof materials.
18.12 In the process of using tilting wagon they shall be equipped with fasteners against
accidental dumping. Do not load the wagon above the edges and do not leave in the process of
movement without support till the full stop.
18.13 It is not allowed using of manual and mechanized haulage of wagons in the same
output. In the process of the manual haulage to the front wall of the wagons light signal shall
be installed.
18.14 Ventilation with local air vent from the area of welding and other works connected with
discharge of hazardous substances shall be provided in the process of shaft and tunnels
sinking.
18.15 During horizontal pipe pushing presence of workers in them is allowed at the pipe
diameters not less than 1200 mm and length not longer than 40m.
Duration of presence of the worker inside of the pipe shall not exceed 11 hour and the
intervals between working cycles are not less than 30min.
Pipeline with the length of 10 m and more shall be provided with forced fresh air giving
ventilation in the amount not less than 110 m3/h.
Horizontal pipe pushing with manual elaboration of the soil inside is permitted only under
conditions excluding breakdown in bottom of gas, water or content of the catchpit. Two-way
communication shall be provided with the workers working inside of pipes.
It is not allowed to develop the soil by hand beyond the limits of the knife of pipeline.

Attachment 1
Recommended
Model regulations about functional obligations of heads, specialists, foremen and
workers on labor safety in construction organizations

The present regulation is applied to enterprises (organizations) and private entrepreneurs


regardless of the form of ownership and organizational legal form carrying out construction
and civil works and which are in their activity follow Law of Turkmenistan “On enterprises”
and “On entrepreneurial activity”.
The head (chief, manager) of the subdivision is responsible for General management of the
works of all structural subdivisions on provision of labor safety requirements and safety
instructions. Direct supervision is entrusted to the chief engineer.
The manager (chief) is responsible for:
а) definition according to Model regulations of rights and obligations on labor safety of
structural subdivisions and separate officers of the enterprise and control over their
activities;
b) Acceptance of measures in provision of the enterprise with qualified personnel, better
use of their knowledge and experience in creation of safe labor conditions for the workers at;
c) provision of elaboration and execution of collective agreement, complex labor
protection conditions as well as sanitary health improving measures improvement plans;
provision with financing, materials resources and equipment for execution of planned
measures;
d) Provision of fulfillment conditions of functions on labor safety, specified in job
descriptions, by engineering and technical personnel.
The chief engineer is responsible for:
а) organization of control over observance of technological discipline, execution of
construction norms and standards, labor safety standards requirements ;
b) regular increase of level of engineering training for safe execution of construction and
civil works;
c) organization of works on preparation and introduction of labor safety standards and
other equated legislative documents including evaluation of work places and technological
process for compliance to labor safety requirements;
d) design management approval of works performance project or job cards for production
of specific kinds of civil and erection works;
e) conclusion of agreements for elaboration of measures on labor safety in construction
and control over execution of those agreements with scientific and research and designing
agencies;
f) organization of elaboration of rules and instructions on safety measures as well as
training and testing of workers for labor safety.
The head of department, chief specialists on labor safety and safety regulations included in
the structure of other structural subdivisions are responsible for:
a) controlling creation of safe and harmless labor conditions in construction organization,
conduction of measures in this sphere, observance of functioning legislation, rules and norms
on safety regulations, production sanitary, for provision of specified privileges and
compensations on labor safety to the workers;
b) taking part in elaboration and introduction of up to date structures of protective
technique and other collective protection means, safe traffic routes of transport and pedestrian
on the site and other measures on creation of safe and harmless labor conditions;
c) taking part in elaboration of perspective and annual yearly plans for improvement of
labour conditions in construction organization, control drawing up of budget for execution of
specified measures and consumption of appropriations for labor safety measures;
d) taking part in investigation and analysis of reasons of industrial accident and
industrial diseases, as well as in measures on their prevention and elimination;
e) controlling the state and use of individual and collective protection means,
technological and erection tooling, provision of industrial areas with posters and safety signs,
programs on training of workers;
f) controlling completeness and quality of works performance project planning sheet,
instructions on labor safety;
g) organization of lectures, film shown and excursions, equipment of premises and stands
on labor safety (safety rules);
h) conduction of introductory training of workers on safety rules;
i) taking part in the work of the committee on testing by engineering and technical
personnel rules and norms of safety measures and industrial sanitary as well as committees on
labor safety created by trade union committees;
j) execution of communication with medical establishments, scientific and research
institutions and other agencies on issues of labor safety and acceptance of measures on
introduction of their recommendations;
k) coordination the activity of structural subdivisions on labor safety issues and
provision draw up of record on labor safety.
The head of industrial engineering department is responsible for:
а) provision of industrial subdivisions with works performance projects and planning
sheet, legislative documents, labor safety instructions as well as single forms of logs,
certifications, acts and other initial industrial documentation on labor safety;
b) organization of introduction of progressive technological and organizational decisions
(improvement suggestions, elaborations and recommendations of design, structural and
scientific and research agencies) as well as positive experience of allied industries of
construction, providing safety of industrial process and improvement of labor conditions;
c) Taking part in drawing up of complex plan of improvement of conditions, labour
safety and sanitary-health improving measures;
d) Control over execution of decisions on labour protection in the works performance
project;
e) Control conclusion and execution of agreements on development of measures on labor
protection.
The head of department of organization of labor and salary is responsible for:
а) organization of works on material stimulation of measures on labor protection;
b) development of suggestions on improvement of labour conditions of workers
including on organization of safe working places, definition of efficient work and rest
schedule in established order depending on natural climatic and organizational industrial
conditions;
c) Taking part in the work on assessment of work places;
d) Organization of professional training of workers taking into consideration issues on
labour safety methods in collaboration with human resources.
The master mechanic and power engineering specialist are responsible:
а) to take part in collaboration with other services in assessment of working places for
their compliance with safe labour conditions, introduction of labour safety standards,
development of sections of complex improvement plan of conditions, labour protection, and
sanitary and health improvement measures in mechanization and electrification;
b) control technical condition and conduction of prophylactic testing of construction
vehicles, pipelines, boilers and vessels, working under the pressure, safety devices,
supervisory equipment and power supply means and communication;
c) organization of training to safe labour methods and assessment of workers, servicing
construction vehicles and electrical technological equipment;
d) take part in investigation and emergency situations in production, connected with
operation of construction vehicles, power equipment and installations.
The head of supply department (logistical support) is responsible for:
а) on time provision of subdivisions with individual protective means, sanitary-
household devices, equipment and inventory;
b) organization and conduction of timely repair, laundering, cleaning and drying of the
uniform and protective footwear, planned-prophylactic treatment of means of individual
protection.
The chief accountant is in charge for organization of accounting of cash assets in the
established order spent for holding measures on labor protection.
Heads of sites and senior executors of works (within the limits of supervised by them sites)
are in charge for:
а) general supervision on organization of labor protection on the sites;
b) Control observance of duties on labor protection by workers;
c) filing of an application for uniform, protective footwear, and other individual
protection means, collective protection means and accessories required for provision of safe
execution of works at sites;
d) take part in assessment of working places on the site, organization use of technological
accessories, security equipment and sanitary household premises, as well as construction
vehicles, electrical installations, transport means in accordance with safety rules;
e) Timely direction of workers for training and testing on labour safety measures;
f) Organization of timely execution of instructions of controlling agencies on labour
protection;
j) timely information of authorized agencies about accidents in production, their
investigation in established order, take part in elaboration of measures on prevention of
production injury and control its timely execution;
h) Control labour protection state on the site;
i) Provision of facilities with pictorial agitation means on labour protection.
The manufacturers of works and masters (masters-foremen) within the sites are charged for:
а) Organization of works according to works performance projects or planning sheet
approved in established order, and acquaintance of workers with provided in them labour
safety measures;
b) Protective accessories, fastenings of walls of foundation ditches and tranches,
kneebrace, conductors and other devices), construction vehicles, power installations, transport
means and protection means of workers;
c) Instructing of workers directly on a workplace about safe methods and works
performance methods with corresponding record about it in the special log-book of training of
workers;
d) Organization of provision of cleanliness and order on workplaces, in passes and
driveways, and also sufficient light exposure of workplaces, correct maintenance and
operation of crane tracks with regular (daily) check of working conditions of workers and
acceptance of measures to elimination of the revealed lacks;
e) Control the observance of weights carrying norms, provision of workplaces with
safety signs, waning inscriptions, posters;
f) Exception of possible presence of outsides in the territory of the site, industrial
premises and workplaces;
j) Regular conduction of conversations with workers on analysis of cases of violation of
safety rules and industrial sanitary and the control over observance of labor safety instructions
by the workers.
The mechanical engineer- power engineering specialist of the site is responsible for:
а) Provide performance of safety precautions regulations during installation, dismantle,
operation and repair of construction vehicles at their disposal, mechanisms, lifting accessories
and electric equipment, gas-welding and electrical welding devices, vessels, operating under
the pressure; provision of their technically serviceable condition, and also regular Checkup for
a timely direction to;
b) Control over serviceable technical condition of construction vehicles and technological
equipments, including organization of execution of tests of cars, mechanisms, equipment,
suspended cradles and other means;
c) Instructing and training of workers engaged in service of construction vehicles and
mechanisms, to safe methods and acceptance of works, as well as provision of workplaces
with warning inscriptions, posters and labor safety instructions.
d) take part in investigation of accidents reasons, connected with operation of vehicles and
mechanisms, and in elaboration of their preventive measures.
The crew chief (section, appointed by order of head of the enterprise) within the limits of
entrusted them sites are charged for:
а) to control observance of technological processes and organizational -technical actions
for safety of the work, provided in the works performance project, planning sheet, instruction
on labor protection by members of the brigade;
b) check condition of workplaces before beginning of works, organization the
elimination of revealed infringements by members of brigades or informing about them
manager of the works, masters;
c) provision observance of labor discipline and internal scheduling order related to labor
safety by members of the brigade;
d) in separate cases (by order of the head of enterprise and agreement with trade union
committee) fulfillment of duties of the person charged for safe handling of cargoes by cranes.
The workers within the limits of entrusted to them sites are charged for;
а) execution of internal scheduling order;
b) execution of requirements of instructions on labor safety used in entrusted task;
c) use of collective and individual protection means, provided in works performance
project, planning sheet, instructions on labor protection.
Attachment 2

THE ACT – ALLOWANCE FORM FOR CIVIL AND ERECTION WORKS IN THE
TERRITORY OF THE CURRENT ENTERPRISE
THE ACT – ALLOWANCE

for civil and erection works in the territory of the current enterprise (department, area)

City___________________________«_____»_______________________20______ year.
___________________________________________________________________________
______________________
[enterprise (department, area) name]
We, the undersigned, the head of the department (area)
_________________________________________________________________________
(last name, first name, middle name)
and the representative of the prime contractor responsible for the work production:
___________________________________________________________________________
(last name, first name, middle name, title)
drew up this act on the following. The enterprise allocates the area with limited coordinates
__________________________________________________for the production of
(name of the axis, # of notes and drawings)
in it,
(work items)

under the leadership of the technical personnel-representative of the prime contractor for the
following period of time:
start date « » end date « »
Prior to the commencement of works, it is necessary to complete the following activities that
ensure the safety of execution of works.

№ Description of the activity Period of execution Executor

The head of the department (area)


(signature)
Responsible representative of the prime contractor,
(signature)
Note: In case the execution of works after the expiration of the current act-allowance is
needed, it is necessary to draw up a new act-allowance for the new period of time.

THE ACT- JOB ORDER FORM FOR THE EXECUTION OF WORKS


OF HIGH DANGER

_______________________________________________________________________
(name of the enterprise, organization)

Approved:
Chief engineer____________

ACT-JOB ORDER
for the execution of works of high danger
from 20 y.
I. JOB ORDER
1. To the responsible executor of works_________________________________________
with the team consisting of people to conduct the following works:

__________________________________________________________________________
(description of work, work site)

2. Necessary for the execution of works:


materials
tools
safety devices
During the preparation and execution of works ensure the following safety measures:
_________________________________________________________________________
(major activities and means on the job safety provisions are outlined)

Special terms
Work starts at hour min ____________________________20 _____ y.
Work ends at hour min 20 y.
Mode of operation
(one-, two-, three-shift)
6. Assigned responsible manager for works is_______________________________________

___________________________________________________________________________
(title, last name, first name, middle name)
Act-Job order was given by
(title, last name, first name, middle name, signature)
Act-Job order was accepted by:
responsible manager for works
(title, last name, first name, middle name, signature)
activities on the job safety provisions and procedures on execution of works were agreed
by:_________________________________________________________________________

person in charge of the current enterprise (department, area*)__________________________


___________________________________________________________________________
(title, last name, first name, middle name, signature)

II. ADMISSION
10. Guidance on safety measures at the work place in accordance with instructions_________
______________________________________________________________________
(guidance title or guidance summary)

was done by:


responsible manager for works__________________________________________________
(date, signature)

person in charge of the current enterprise (department, area*)


___________________________________________________________________________
(date, signature)
12. Work place and work conditions were checked. Safety measures, outlined in the act-job
11. Team members who were briefed on guidance
order, ensured

Allow to begin the works


(title, last name, first name, middle name of the person allowing the representative of the
current enterprise to work, date and signature *)
Responsible manager for works
(date, signature)

Responsible executor of works


(date, signature)

13. Works commenced at_____ hour__________ min______________________20


____ y.

Responsible manager for works


(date, signature)

14. Works finished, worksites checked (materials, tools, appliances and so forth stored),
people taken out.

Job order was closed at hour min 20 y.

Responsible executor of works


(date, signature)

Person in charge of the current enterprise*


Note: Act-Job order is drawn up in two copies (1st stays with the person who gave the job
order, 2nd – with the responsible manager for works), during the works in the territory of
the current enterprise act-job order is drawn up in three copies (3 rd copy is given to the
person in charge of the current enterprise).SAMPLE LIST OF WORKS FOR
EXECUTION OF WHICH ACT-JOB ORDER IS NECESSARY TO BE GIVEN
OUT
Construction and installation works using the construction machinery in restricted areas
of overhead power transmission lines, gas pipelines, as well as inflammable and
combustible liquid and combustible and condensed gas storages.
Construction and installation works, conducted in wells, open test pits or closed
reservoirs.
Earth-moving works at sites with pathogenic contamination of soil (disposal dumps,
burial grounds for animal refuse and so forth)
Construction and installation works conducted in the territory of the current enterprise
where there is or may be production danger caused by the current enterprise.
Construction and installation works conducted in buildings or facilities being in an
emergency state.
Construction and installation works conducted within the limits of zones with permanent
dangerous production factors.

Attachment 5

DOCUMENTATION FORMS ON THE KNOWLEDGE TEST OF


RULES AND REGULATIONS OF LABOR SAFETY IN CONSTRUCTION

Personnel knowledge test book form


Cover
TURKMENISTAN

Ministry
________________________________________________________________________
Personnel knowledge test book

Front page
MINISTRY __________________________________________________________
Association (department) __________________________________________________
Enterprise, organisation ____________________________________________________

Personnel knowledge test book


________________________________________________________________________
(name of the department, area, service)

________________________________________________________________________

Commenced on ____ ________________, 20 y.


Book pages

MINUTES #
of the committee meeting on knowledge test

issued on ____________________« », 20 y.
Committee includes:
Chairman _______________________________________________________________
Members:
1. _________________________________________________________
(last name, initials, title)
2. _________________________________________________________

3. _________________________________________________________

Knowledge test was conducted according to the program (questionnaire) approved by ____

_________________________________________________________________________
(whom, when)
_________________________________________________________________________

Last name, initials of the Title (profession) Last test date Grade, Signature of the
person being tested conclusion person tested

Signatures:

Chairman:___________________________________________________________

Members: 1. ___________________________________________________

2. ___________________________________________________

3. ___________________________________________________
People who received the positive grade will be admitted to independent work and carrying out
appropriate work.

GUIDANCE ON KEEPING
THE PERSONNEL KNOWLEDGE TEST BOOK
Personnel knowledge test book of this or that subdivision (department, area, party, laboratory) is
kept at the subdivision manager – knowledge test committee chairman.
Enterprise employee knowledge test book is kept with the labor safety service.
In the front page of the book the ministry, association, enterprise (organization) or relevant
subdivision (department, area) name is shown in full, as well as the commencement date of the
records in the book.
All kinds of (initial, periodic and extra) personnel knowledge tests are recorded in the book.
In the column «Grade, conclusion» it should reflect:
Knowledge of the employees with grades «good», «satisfactory», «unsatisfactory»;
For electro technical personnel other than general grades show give the qualifying group;
When needed, reflect the general conclusion of the committee on the possibility of access of the
worker to independent work.
Records in the book are approved by the signatures of the committee chairman and members (with
the indication of their titles) immediately after each test.

SAMPLE CERTIFICATE OF KNOWLEDGE TEST


Cover and front page
TURKMENISTAN
CERTIFICATE
of knowledge test on labor safety
1st page
________________________________________________________________________________
name of the enterprise, organization

Certificate
Comrade ________________________________________________________________________
last name, first name, middle name

passed the knowledge and instruction test on safe mode of operation and is allowed to independent
work by profession (position)
in _____________________________________________________________________________
department, area, plant, team

Committee chairman _______________________________________________________


signature, first name, last name
State inspector MSS «Turkmenstandartlary»
Stamp Date of issue ___________ ______ 20 y.
place
2nd and 3rd pages
Information on transfer
Department manager’s
Date Transferred where Profession (job title)
signature

4th page
1. Knowledge test of rules and regulations on safe execution of works by major profession
Committee chairman’s
Date Minutes number Grade, conclusion
signature

5th page
2. Knowledge test of device regulations, safe operation of vessels functioning under
pressure

Committee chairman’s
Date Minutes number Grade, conclusion
signature

6th page
3. Knowledge test of safety rules in gas supply facility

Committee chairman’s
Date Minutes number Grade, conclusion
signature

7th page
4. Knowledge test of device regulations, safe operation of steam and hot-water boilers

Committee chairman’s
Date Minutes number Grade, conclusion
signature

8th page
5. Knowledge test of device regulations, safe operation of hoisting cranes

Committee chairman’s
Date Minutes number Grade, conclusion
signature

9th page
6. Knowledge test of customer electrical installation and customer electrical installation
operation
Committee chairman’s
Date Minutes number Grade, conclusion
signature

10th and 11th pages


Course training
Signature of the responsible
Date Course title Number of hours
person for technical training

Last page
Worker, being at the workplace, is responsible to have an ID on him/her.
The knowledge test on labor safety rules of workers and foremen is conducted annually, and the
managers and employees of an enterprise – once in 3 years.
Special knowledge test is conducted:
With the change of engineering procedure;
With the adoption of new types of equipment, as well as implementation of new rules and
regulations on safe operation;
In case the rule is broken by the worker;
At the requirement of the state inspectorate organ representatives;
At the transfer to another job or break in work for more than a year.
Without the committee chairman’s signature as well as with the expired date of regular test, the
ID is considered invalid.
SAMPLE LIST OF PROFESSIONS OF WORKERS AND KINDS OF CIVIL AND
ERECTION WORKS CONCERNING WHICH ADDITIONAL SAFETY TECHNIQUE
REQUIREMENTS ARE MADE

Asphalt concrete workers (asphalt workers, boilers).


Explosives experts.
Vulcanizers.
Gas welders.
Hydro monitors.
Lime-slakers.
Acidlayers, working with wini plaster, gummed and fiolated materials.
Koprovshik.
House painters, engaged in painting of structures by nitro dye and other materials with toxic
features.
Drivers of construction vehicles.
Fireproofers.
Pipeline layers.
Plumber on lead.
Mortar sand layers.
Circuit installer (mercury-arc rectifier).
Верхолазные работы.
Steeplejacking.
Works using pyrotechnical instruments.
Handling operations using transport and lifting vehicles. Works with use of radioactive materials.
Works with use of ethylated petrol. Works on impregnation of the wood with antiseptic and
flame retardant. Works on operation and repair of electrical installations. Works connected with
use of glass wool, slag wool, asbestos, hot-applied mastic on bitumen basis, perchlorovinyl and
Bakelite materials. Development and fixation of soil in 2 m deep pits. Electrical welding works.
Attachment7

STRUCTURE AND CONTENT OF BASIC DECISIONS ON SAFETY MEASURES IN


WORKS PERFORMANCE PROJECT (WPP)
Works performance projects shall contain technical decisions and basic organizational measures
on provision of safety performance of works and sanitary-and-hygienic service of the workers.
Initial materials in decision of issues concerning provision of safety of work and sanitary-and-
hygienic service of the workers shall be:
Requirements of legislative documents and standards on safety measures and production
sanitary;
Recommendations about prevention of the reasons of the industrial traumatism, elaborated on the
basis of experience of construction of analogue facilities;
Typical decisions on provision of labor safety and catalogue of protection means of the workers.
In case of change in the process of construction conditions affecting safety of work,
corresponding additions or specifications shall be made in the works performance project.
In the works performance project shall be reflected following requirements:
Provision of assembly technological structures and equipment;
Decrease volumes and labor input of the works carried out under conditions of industrial danger;
Safe placing of vehicles and mechanisms
Organization of workplaces using safety means.
Moreover, Shall be specified:
The nomenclature of devices, accessories and individual and collective protection means of
workers and demand in them defined;
Site illumination means, workplaces and passes, and also alarm system and communication
means;
Requirements on sanitary - consumer services of workers
For the prevention of danger of falling of workers from the height it is necessary to provide in
WPP:
Reduction of volumes of steeple jacking first of all at the expense of introduction of conveyor or
fixation assemblages, large-block or without crane installation methods;
Preliminary prime device of constant protecting structures (walls, panels, protections of
balconies and apertures);
Temporary protecting devices meeting safety requirements;
Places and methods of fastening of safety ropes and safety belts. Besides, shall be specified:
Scaffold, intended for performance of the given kind of works or the given operation;
Ways and means of lifting of workers to workplaces;
load gripping mechanism, allowing to carry out remote removal of slings of building cargoes.
With a view to prevent danger of falling of structures, items or materials from the height during
moving by crane or at loss of stability in the course of installation or warehousing in the project
shall be specified:
Means of containerization and vessel for moving of piece and loose materials, and also concrete
and solution taking into account character of moved cargo and their delivery convenience to the
place of works;
load gripping mechanism (cargo slings, traverses and gripping devices) taking into account the
weight and dimensions of moved cargo, conditions and slinging and installation;
Ways of slinging, providing delivery of elements at warehousing and installation in the position
corresponding or close to designed;
Accessories (pyramids, cartridges) for steady storage of elements of structures;
Order and ways of warehousing of items, materials, the equipment;
Ways of definitive fixation of structures;
methods of temporary fixation of dismantled elements at performance of dismantle of structures
of buildings and constructions;
methods of waste disposal of building materials and dust;
Necessity of protective overlapping device (floorings) or peaks during performance of civil and
erection works on one vertical
In projects of performance of civil and erection works using vehicles (mechanisms) it is
necessary to provide:
Choice of types of vehicles, installation places and operating mode according to the parameters
provided by technology and conditions of building;
Measures excluding effect of harmful and dangerous factors to the machinist and working near
personnel;
Use of technical means on restriction of way of movement or turning angle of the vehicles and
communication facility of the machinist with workers (sound alarm system, radio - and
telecommunication) during performance of works by vehicles in the conditions of the limited
space and review of working zone;
Special conditions of installation of the vehicle in the zone of prism of collapse on the bulk
ground or special structures.
To prevent dangerous influence of an electric current on workers it is necessary to provide:
Instructions on installation of temporary electrical installations, choice of lines and definition of
pressure of temporary power and lighting electric systems, way of protection of current carrying
parts and arrangement of lead-in distribution systems and devices;
Grounding of metal parts of the electric equipment and execution of earthing contours according
to requirements of the Instruction on installation grounding networks and grounding in electrical
installations;
Additional protective measures during performance of works in premises with raised danger and
especially dangerous, and also at performance of works in similar conditions out of premises.
Warehousing of items, materials, equipment by means of load-lifting cranes outside of a security
zone of overhead power transmission lines
To prevent influence of harmful production factors (noise, vibration, harmful substances in the
air of a working zone) on the workers it is necessary:
To define sites on which there can be the harmful production factors caused by accepted
technology of performance of works;
To define protection means of the workers against influence of harmful production factors;
To provide if necessary special measures on clearing from harmful substances of technological
drains and emissions
Organizational measures on provision of safe performance of works shall include:
Definition of the works which are carried out in accordance with order-admission;
Joint actions of the general contractor and the customer on performance of works in the territory
of the operating enterprises or close to operating constructions, communications and
installations;
Joint actions of the general contractor and subcontractors on safety performance at combination
of works
At drawing up of the planned schedule of works performance it is necessary to consider the
additional works conditioned by safety requirements (provision of stability of slopes of deep
dredging, temporary fixation of structures in the course of installation, installation of temporary
protective floorings and protections, etc.), and time necessary for their performance.
At performance of works by several building organizations the calendar plan shall be formed up
taking into account conditions of simultaneous performance of works at various levels on one
vertical or in the same premise
At drawing up construction general plan it is necessary to define operative ranges lifting cranes,
overhead power transmission lines, intensive movement of transport means, storage of explosive
and combustible materials, and also harmful substances and other dangerous zones, working
conditions in which demand attention to provide safety of the workers
Sanitary-everyday premises and platforms for rest of workers, and also automobile and
walkways (without special protective actions) shall be placed beyond the dangerous zones
In planning sheets, except for technology and organization of performance of civil and erection
works, nomenclatures of technological tooling and protection means, it is necessary to specify
dangerous and harmful production factors which can arise during performance of specific works,
and provide actions for prevention of their influence on workers
At a binding to planning sheets of flowsheet of operational sequence it is necessary to provide
the most safe methods of performance of works, including on the organization of workplace,
sequence of performance of separate operations and distribution of duties among workers
In case of need of operation of inhabited, public, industrial buildings, transport highways,
walkways and other places of possible presence of people close to places of moving of cargoes
cranes or near the building under construction (reconstructed) it is necessary to carry out along
with others the following safety requirements excluding possibility of occurrence of dangerous
zones in the locations of people, including
Near the places of cargo moving by the crane:
for using are allowed tower cranes with saddle jib, equipped with means of automatic restriction
of movements of the crane, jibs, gripping case and support made under the working
documentation, developed in established order and coordinated with manufacturer;
The crane shall be equipped with radio intercoms for communication among the crane operators,
slingers and the person responsible for safe performance of works related to moving of cargoes
by cranes;
height of crane boom or crane installation area shall be made so that the crane boom will not
approach located nearby buildings at the distance less than 2 m
The electric equipment of drives of operation movements of the crane shall be equipped with
phases control relay;
restrictions of zone of operation movements of crane providing by means of automatic restriction
devices preventing occurrence of dangerous zones in the locations of people shall be specified in
construction general plan;
Speed of moving of cargoes at their approach to border of a working zone to the distance less
than 7 m and the further transportation shall be lowered to the minimum. Approach zones shall
be designated construction general plan;
The serviceable technical condition of the crane shall be confirmed by the person responsible for
its serviceable condition, not less than every 10 days
The serviceable condition of load gripping devices and container shall by confirmed every day
by the person responsible for safe moving of cargoes by the crane. Results of visual or other
more effective way of check shall be recorded in works log;
Moving of ferro-concrete items shall be carried out with application load gripping device
equipped with the adaptation for test of durability of assembly loops, or the safety accessories
excluding possibility of their falling
б) Near the buildings under construction (repaired, reconstructed) in the building perimeter
it is necessary to establish catching devices or protective screen, made in accordance with
working documentation developed in established order, excluding falling of subjects to the zone
of people;
Operation movements of Crane shall be limited so that the cargo moved by them will not come
out the contours of the building and could not rise above minimum admissible size over the
structures of the building established in design position.
MAXIMUM PERMISSIBLE CONCENTRATION OF SOME HAZARDOUS
SUBSTANCES IN THE AIR OF WORKING AREA

permissible
Sample of areas (zone), where existence of

concentrati Maximum
hazardous substances during execution of civil
and erection works is possible

Acetylene (phosphorous hydrogen) 0,1 0,5 1 In the areas of execution of anticorrosive,


Dibutil ether 50 50 painting, spackling works and welding of

on
Chlorine 200 metallic, polymeric materials and structures
Toluene
Xylene
Acetone
Hydrogen sulphide Ammonia 10 In the areas of execution of earth works
Methane (at recalculation to carbon) 20 300 (underground in swampy areas) as well as
sewerage wells and in the areas of execution of
works using phenolics
Nitrogen oxide (in recalculation to 5 In the areas of execution of anticorrosive,
N02) sulfur dioxide carbon 10 20 isolation and welding works as well as in the
monoxide 300 places of partially fuel burning
Hydrocarbon oils: kerosene, white
spirit, benzine, fuel ТС-1, ТС-2 ((in
recalculation to carbon)
DEVICES USED FOR SANITARY AND HYGIENIC EVALUATION OF HARMFUL
FACTOR OF PRODUCTION

Harmful factors of Unit of Devices


production measure
Name Measuring span

Air temperature К(°С) Aspiration psychrometer From 238 till 323 (from-35
Heat-loss anemometer ЭА-2М till 50) from 283 till 333
(from 10 till 60)
Relative air % Aspiration psychrometer From 10 till 100
humidity
Air traverse speed m/s Electro anemometer From 0 till 5 from 0,003 till
Heat-loss anemometer ЭА-2М 5 from 1 till 10 from 1 till
Propeller anemometer 30
Cup anemometer
Illumination of lux Objective Ю-16 From 25 till 500
workplace
Vibration Hz, dB low-frequency vibration- from 1,4 till 350 from 70 till
measuring apparatus НВА-1 130
Noise Hz, dB Spectral noise analyzer АШ- from 63 till10000 from 40
2М, ПФ-1,0-34 Шумомер: Ш- till 10000 from 30 till140
63 (ИРПА), Ш-ЗМ, ИШВ
Dust mg/m3 Cassettes and allonge for From 0,5 till 1000 from 0,5
sampling of filters for clothes till 30
ФПП modification АФА
pollution measuring devices
ИЗВ-1
Gasses mg/m3 Gas analyzer АУХ-2 with —
inspection pipes
Note
1. Allowed use of other analogue devices, measurement range and ambiguity of which are
of same as of above.
2. Devices used for evaluation of harmful factors of production shall be checked or
certified in established order.
LIST OF QUESTIONS WHICH SHALL BE SPECIFIED IN THE LABOUR SAFETY
TRAINING PROGRAMS OF THE WORKERS

General questions

The major labor safety goals. The legislation on labor safety (working hours, time of rest,
holiday, labor safety of women and youth, labor and industrial discipline), labor safety orders.
Role of the state supervision, technical inspections, as well as interdepartmental and public
control.
Duties and the rights of engineering - technical personnel, foremen, workers, public inspectors
and the commissions on labor safety.
Basic dangerous and harmful production factors: work at the height, dangerous action of an
electric current, transport incidents, moving parts of vehicles, noise, vibration, lowered
temperature of the air, wind, insufficient illumination, firm and liquid aerosols in the air. The
reasons of incurring of dangerous and harmful production factors.
Work experience of advanced brigades, working highly-effective without traumas and failures.
Major measures on prevention the influences of dangerous and harmful production factors on
workers, including: organizations of works taking into account dangerous zones and workplaces
(their arrangement, equipment with necessary protection means), rules of safe operation of the
equipment, rule of transportation of people by various types of transport, fire-prevention actions,
sanitary-consumer services, training and instructing order.

Questions for specific construction professions

Dangerous and harmful production factors, as well as information about industrial traumatism,
characteristic for the given kind of works or profession.
Measures required for organization of safe performance of works. Main features indicating about
malfunction of industrial equipment, equipment, devices, accessories and tool, used in
performance of the given kind of works.
Individual and collective protection means, devices and safety controls. Organization of
workplaces taking into account application of means of safety.
Methods of safe performance of works, safe operation rules of vehicles and equipment.
Performance of works in the conditions of raised danger and especially dangerous conditions.
LIST of normative document to which there are references in the current rules and
regulations


Document Who and when approved
п/п
1 The law of Turkmenistan «On labor safety» Approved by President of
Turkmenistan № 868-XII issued on
01.10.1993.
2 The law of Turkmenistan «On certification of Approved by President of
product and service» Turkmenistan № 897-XII issued on
08.10.1993.
3 The law of Turkmenistan «On enterprises» Approved by President of
Turkmenistan issued on 01.10.1993.
№ 860-XII
4 The law of Turkmenistan «On entrepreneurship» Approved by President of
Turkmenistan issued on 01.10.1993.
№ 863-XII
5 The uniform control system of labor safety in the Approved by the decree of main state
national economy of Turkmenistan inspection office of Turkmenistan №
20 issued on September 15, 1995.
6 The regulations on interrelation of organizations – By State Construction of USSR and
prime contractors with subcontractor organizations State Planning Committee of USSR
issued on 03.07.87. № 132/109
7 Guidelines on provision procedure to workers and Approved by the order of Ministry of
employees with working clothes, shoes and other construction and construction
personal protective gear and standard materials industry of Turkmenistan №
specifications on free delivery of working clothes, МВ-140 issued on September 23,
shoes and other personal protective gear in the 2005.
system of Ministry of construction and
construction materials industry of Turkmenistan
9 On conducting the mandatory at the job entrance By the order of Ministry of Health of
preliminary and periodic medical examination of USSR issued on 29.09.89. № 555
workers exposed to adverse labor conditions
10 Sanitary requirements towards the device and By Deputy chief medical officer of
equipment of sanitary personal service room for USSR issued on 18.06.67.
the workers of construction and construction and
mounting organizations
11 Safety rules at the construction of buried structures Approved by the deputy head of the
Main government service
«Turkmenstandartlary» issued on
23.01.2004.
12 The state licensing regulations of potentially Approved by the decree of President
dangerous productions, works and other types of of Turkmenistan issued on January 13,
related activities in the national economy 1999. № 4039
13 Guidelines on technical investigation and Approved by the decree of the Main
registration of accidents at work government service
«Turkmenstandartlary» № 20 issued
on September 15, 1995.
14 Guidelines on investigation and registration of Approved by the decree of President
industrial accident of Turkmenistan issued on January 13,
1999. № 4039
15 Guidelines on compensation for severe injury Approved by the decree of President
inflicted on a worker, occupational disease or of Turkmenistan issued on January 13,
other health hazard associated with their labor 1999. № 4039
duty
16 The list of professions and works with heavy-load Approved by the decree of main state
and adverse labor conditions to which inspection office of Turkmenistan №
employment of individuals younger than 18 is 46 issued on 24.12.1997.
forbidden
17 The list of professions and works with heavy-load Approved by the decree of main state
and adverse labor conditions to which inspection office of Turkmenistan №
employment of women is forbidden 46 issued on 24.12.1997.
18 The list of polymeric materials and structures By Deputy chief medical officer of
permitted to use in construction by the Ministry of USSR issued on 07.04.85. № 3859-85
health of USSR
№ п/п Document Who and when approved
19 Railway standard code of Turkmenistan Ministry of railway of Turkmenistan
issued on 02.12.2003. №SBR/001
20 Preventive fire-fighting regulations at construction GUPO Ministry of Internal Affairs of
and assembling operations USSR issued on 26.02.86.
21 Unified safety regulations at blasting operations State engineering supervision of
Turkmenistan issued on 25.05.95. №27
22 Device operating instructions and safe operation State engineering supervision of USSR
of hoisting cranes issued on 30.12.92 . № 41
23 Road traffic regulations of Turkmenistan Approved by the decree of President of
Turkmenistan issued on March 31, 2003.
№ 6185
24 Instructions on large-size and heavily-loaded Ministry of Internal Affairs of USSR
cargo transportation with vehicles issued on 24.02.77. № 53
25 Sanitary rules and regulations for operating the Ministry of Health of USSR issued on
tools, gears and equipment that make the local 13.06.84. №3041-84
vibration which passes on to workers’ arms
26 Navigation regulations through inland waterways Ministry of river craft of Russian Soviet
of Russian Soviet Federative Socialist Republic Federative Socialist Republic issued on
28.08.84. №100
27 Sanitary rules when welding, overlaying welding By Ministry of Health of USSR issued on
and metal cutting 05.03.73. № 1009-73
28 Device operating instructions and safe operation State engineering supervision of USSR
of pressure-operated vessels issued on 18.04.95. № 20
29 Major sanitary operating regulations with By chief medical officer of USSR issued
radioactive substances and other sources of on 26.08.87. № 4422-87
ionizing radiation (ОСП № 72-87)
30 Technical maintenance regulations of customer Approved by the head of the main state
electrical installations energy supervision 10.01.1989.
31 Safety procedure regulations when operating the Approved by the head of the main state
customer electrical installations energy supervision 10.01.1989.
32 Safety procedures and industrial sanitation during MPS of USSR issued on 26.12.74.
cargo-handling on railway transport
33 Sanitary regulations during paint works using By chief medical officer of USSR №
manual sprayers 991-72
34 СНпП 3.05.06-85. Electrical equipment By State Construction of USSR issued on
11.12.85. № 215
35 СНиП 3.01.01-85. Organization on construction By State Construction of USSR issued on
production 02.09.85. № 140
36 Guidelines development regulations on labor Approved by the decree of main state
safety inspection office of Turkmenistan № 25
issued on 04.11.1994.
37 TDS-12.4.026-76 ССБТ Signal colors and safety Put into operation by the decree of main
signs state inspection office of
«Turkmenstandartlary» № 50 issued on
01.01.2000 .
38 TDS-12.1.004-91 ССБТ Fire safety. General Put into operation by the decree of main
requirements state inspection office of
«Turkmenstandartlary» № 50 issued on
01.01.2000.
STATE STANDARDS CONTAINING LABOUR SAFETY REQUIREMENTS IN
CONSTRUCTION, WHICH HAVE REFERENCES IN THE PRESENT NORMS
AND RULES
TDS-12.0.004-90
UKD 658.382.3:658.386:006.354 MKS 13.100 Group T 58
INTERSTATE STANDARD

Occupational safety standards system ORGANIZATION OF TRAINING FOR


LABOUR SAFETY General rules

The present standard establishes the order and forms of training and examination on labor
safety and other forms of activity of the workers, personnel, heads and experts of the
national economy, as well as pupils and covers all enterprises, associations, concerns and
the national economy organizations, collective farms, co-operative societies, rent
collectives (further - the enterprises), educational institutions, teaching and educational
establishments (further - educational institutions).
The standard is basic in the complex of the state standards supervising and methodical
documents on training of workers and studying of disciplines on labor safety and other
forms of activity.
The standard does not cancel special requirements to the order of conduction of training,
instructing and examination of the personnel, serving facilities, under control of state
supervision bodies, established by corresponding rules.
1. BASIC PROVISIONS
Training and instructing on labor safety has continuous multilevel character and held at the
enterprises of the industry, transport, communication, building, in secondary educational
and professional institutions, in out-of-school establishments, as well as at perfection of
knowledge in the course of labor activity.
Pupils of school and preschool establishments are acquainted with the rules of safe
behavior in the course of teaching and educational employment.
The persons, who are engaged in individual work or a part of complex brigades, and also
combining the professions, are trained and instructed in labor safety in full under their
basic and combined trade (work).
Responsibility for the organization of temporary and qualitative training and examination
as a whole on the enterprise and an educational institution are assigned to the head, and in
divisions (shop, laboratory, and workshop) – to the head of the division.
Timeliness of training on labor safety of workers of the enterprise and educational
institution supervises the department (a bureau, the engineer) on labor safeties or the
technical officer who are assigned these duties under the order of the director (educational
institution), decision of board (chairman) of collective farm, co-operative society, rent
collective.
Workers of joint ventures, co-operative societies both rent collectives undergo training and
examination in order established for the state enterprises and the organizations of
corresponding branches of the national economy.
p. 60 SNT 3.01.03-06
TDS-12.0.004-90
1.6 Managers of enterprises and educational institutions provide the staffing of labor
protection services with relevant specialists and systematic improvement of their skills at
least once in 5 years.
1.7 Persons, having a certificate of qualification of an engineer for labor protection or work
experience in this post (specialty) not less than one year can fill the position of an engineer
for labor protection. Persons, who are first appointed to the position of engineer for labor
protection and have no relevant qualifications or experience should be trained in labor
safety on special programs in the courses at the institutes and faculties of professional
development or other agencies prior to the performance of functions.

2. STUDY OF THE FOUNDATIONS AND TRAINING IN LABOR SAFETY


REQUIREMENTS AND OTHER ACTIVITIES IN EDUCATIONAL
INSTITUTIONS

2.1 Examination of issues of labor safety and other activities is organized


and conducted at all stages of education in educational institutions and educational
establishments of the country with a view of formation of deliberate and responsible
attitude of the younger generation to the matters of personal security and safety of others.
2.2 At the preschool institutions, the children in the course of lessons and
other types of children’s activity are familiarized with the basics of safe behavior at home,
outdoor and in the institution while organization of various arrangements. Children have
classes on traffic regulations, fire safety, electrical safety, and etc. Classes are conducted by
educators, personnel of traffic police, fire prevention, health workers and others. Control of
knowledge is carried out by oral test of children and practical lessons with them.
2.3 In comprehensive schools of all types and names, the pupils are
inculcated in basic knowledge and skills on matters of labor safety and other activities in
the process of study of academic disciplines. Training of pupils (in the form of
instructions) in safety regulations is conducted before the start of all activities: while
technical and professional preparation, organization of socially useful and productive
work, as well as during excursions, hikes, sports, classes and other out-of-school and
extracurricular activities.
While passing the labor and professional training in inter-school shops, training and
production plants, the pupils learn the issues of labor safety during theoretical classes and
learn the specific rules of industrial safety prior to their access to practical work.
2.4 Training of children and teenagers in regulations of safe behavior and safety measures
during their stay in the classroom or organization of various events in all out-of-school
institutions is conducted in the form of instructions and special classes, if their practical
activity requires special knowledge and skills on labor safety .
2.5 Vocational schools develop in the future workers a deliberate,
responsible and qualified approach to the issues of labor safety maintenance on the
workplace in the process of study of pupils of the course or sections on labor safety in the
subjects of special professional training, taking into account various specific categories of
professions, paying particular attention to specialties connected with work in dangerous
and unfavorable conditions of labor.
2.6 The matters of labor safety and other kinds of activity taught without fail
to all students and pupils of higher and secondary specialized educational institutions in
accordance with approved the curriculum and programs.
Pupils of specialized educational establishments have a training course "Protection of
Labor" or separate section on labor safety during special disciplines.
Students of technical, construction, agricultural, economic, and pedagogical higher
educational institutions learn the issues of labor safety maintenance while having discipline
"Safety of vital activity", which includes the course "Protection of Labor", as well as
special disciplines that contain relevant sections. In other higher educational
establishments, where the course "Protection of Labor" are not learnt, the training of
students is carried out within the framework of learning of educational disciplines.
p. 61 SNT 3.01.03-06

ТDS-12.0.004-90

Graduation projects and coursework of students of the technical, agricultural,


construction higher educational establishments and secondary specialized educational
institutions include the matters of labor safety.
Examination is a form of knowledge control upon completion of training course on
labor safety.
2.7 Sample programs, amount of independent courses, sections and study time
allotted for learning the issues of labor safety and other activities at all stages of education
depend on specific character of the educational institution, specialty and approved by the
fixed procedure by State Education of USSR .
2.8 While organization of any kind of collective type of labor activity, the students
after classes (student teams, camps of labor and rest, crude production teams and other
school labor associations, agricultural, construction and other works) have classes with
students and pupils, who study in educational establishments on the basics of labor law,
norms and regulations of labor safety. Basic training of students and pupils in issues of
labor safety is carried out on the places of work production of the enterprises,
organizations, institutions.
2.9 Heads of educational institutions and educational establishments are responsible
for implementation of sample programs, execution of full amount of allotted training time
and quality of knowledge on issues of labor safety and other kinds of activity.

3. TRAINING IN LABOR SAFETY WHILE PREPARATION OF WORKERS,


RETRAINING AND TRAINING IN SECOND OCCUPATION

3.1 Training in labor safety training while preparation of workers, retraining, getting
a second profession, professional development directly at the enterprises are organized by
employees of department of staff training or technical training (training engineer) with
assistance of necessary specialists of departments and services of the enterprise and other
organizations.
3.2 Training programs on labor safety should include theoretical and industrial
training.
Theoretical training is carried out within the framework of a special educational
subject "Protection of Labor or relevant section on special technology in the volume of not
less than 10 hours. The subject "Protection of Labor" should be taught while training of
workers on occupations, which demand additional (higher) labor safety requirements, as
well as on professions and operations connected with the servicing the facilities, which
under the control of bodies of state supervision in the industry, construction, agriculture,
agro-industrial complex, transport and other sectors at least 60 hours for a vocational
school and at least 20 hours – while training at the enterprise.
Types of such professions and works are determined by the State Education of USSR in
consultation with the agencies of state supervision and technical labor inspection.
3.3 The issues of labor safety should be included into other disciplines connected with
technology, design of equipment, etc.
3.4 Industrial training on safe methods and techniques of labor is carried out in teaching
laboratories, workshops, divisions, shops, training ground, workplaces specially created at
the enterprises and educational institutions under the guidance of teacher, master
(instructor) of industrial training or highly-qualified worker. While absence of necessary
educational basis, it is exceptionally allowed to conduct the training on existing workplaces
of the enterprise.
3.5 Training in labor safety should be conducted on training programs made
on the basis of the standard programs worked out in accordance with model provision on
uninterrupted professional and economic training of personnel for the national economy
and agreed with the sectoral trade unions, and for works that demand additional (higher)
labor safety requirements - with relevant bodies of state supervision as well.
3.6 Training in labor safety while preparation of workers on professions that
demand additional (higher) labor safety requirements is completed with an examination on
labor safety. In preparation of workers of other professions, the labor protection issues are
included in examination papers on special technology and written works on qualifying
exams.
p. 62 SNT 3.01.03-06
TDS-12.0.004-90

4. SPECIAL EDUCATION AND KNOWLEDGE TESTING OF WORKERS

4.1 In some sectors connected with works, which demand additional (higher) labor safety
requirements, it is held additional special training in labor safety, taking into account these
requirements.
4.2 List of activities and professions on which a training is provide, as well as order, form,
frequency and duration of the training is set, taking into account sectoral normative and
technical documentation, by enterprise managers with the concurrence of the trade union
committee, proceeding from the nature of the profession, type of work, specifics of
production and labor conditions.
4.3 Training is realized according to programs worked out taking into account sectoral
standard programs and approved by the manager (chief engineer) of the enterprise in
agreement with the department (bureau, engineer) of labor protection and trade union
committee.
4.4 After training, examining board tests the theoretical knowledge and practical
skills.
Test results of knowledge is drawn by the record (Appendix 1) and fixed in the
personal card of training, if it is applied (Appendix 2).
Worker, who has successfully passed the test of knowledge, receives a certificate of
right for independent work.
4.5 Workers connected with the performance of works or service of facilities (installations,
equipment) of increased risk, as well as objects, which are under control of agencies of state
supervision, should be periodically tested for labor safety in the terms set by relevant
regulations.
The list of workers’ professions, which demand to test their knowledge, and staff of
examining board approve the manager (chief engineer) of the enterprise of educational
institution by agreement with the trade union committee.
Holding of examination of knowledge of workers on labor safety is drawn by the record.
4.6 While taking of unsatisfactory mark by the worker, the repeated test of knowledge is
appointed not later than a month. Before repeated test, he could not be accessed to
independent work.
4.7 Before regular test of knowledge at the enterprises, it is organized the classes, lectures,
seminars, consultations on issues of labor safety.
4.8 All workers, who have a break in the work on this type of activity, position,
profession more than three years, and in work with high risk - more than one year, should
undergo training on labor safety prior to independent work.

5. TRAINING AND TESTING OF KNOWLEDGE


OF MANAGERS AND SPECIALISTS

5.1 Managers and specialists of the national economy, who newly got a job at the
enterprise (cooperative), have to undergo introductory instruction.
5.2 Managers and specialists, who newly got a job, should be familiarized with
common superior except introductory instruction:
with state of labor conditions and industrial situation at the facility, division he was
entrusted with;
with state of protection means of workers from effect of hazardous and harmful
industrial factors;
with industrial injuries and diseases;
with necessary measures on improvement of conditions and labor protection, as well
as with management materials and administrative duties on labor protection.
No later than a month since assumption to the post, they undergo the test of
knowledge. Test results are drawn by the record.
5.3 Managers and specialists of enterprises, educational institutions associated with
the organization and execution of the work directly on the industrial sites as well as
realizing control and technical supervision undergo periodic test of knowledge on labor
safety at least once in three years, if these terms do not contradict the established special
regulations.
p. 63 SNT 3.01.03-06
ТDS-12.0.004-90

The managers of enterprises, educational institutions (directors, chief engineers and their
deputies), senior specialists as well as employees of department (bureau, engineer) of labor
protection undergo periodic test of knowledge in the order prescribed by the superior
organization.
Test of knowledge among managers and specialists of cooperatives, rental groups, small
and other independent companies is held in commissions, being organized by the provincial
(municipal) committees of sectoral trade unions.
5.4 Before regular test of knowledge of managers and specialists, it is organized the
seminars, lectures, talks, consultations on issues of labor safety in accordance with
programs worked out at the enterprise, educational institution and its approved manager
(chief engineer).
5.5 To test knowledge of managers and specialists by the order over enterprise,
educational institution by agreement with the trade union committee, it is established
permanently functioning examining board.
5.6 The board includes the employees of departments (bureau, engineer) of labor
protection, senior specialists (mechanical engineer, power engineering specialist,
technologist), and representatives of the trade union committee. For participation in the
work of commissions, it is invited in some necessary cases the representatives of state
supervision agencies, technical inspection of labor.
Concrete composition, procedure and form of work of examining boards are
determined by the heads of enterprises, educational institutions.
5.7 Persons, who underwent the test of knowledge, take part in the work of
commission.
5.8 Test results of knowledge of managers and specialists are drawn by the
record (Appendix 1).
5.9 Employees, who took unsatisfactory mark, have to undergo repeated test of knowledge
in the commission not later than a month.
5.10 Extraordinary test of knowledge of managers and specialists is conducted:
1) while introduction of new or recycled normative documents on labor protection;
2) while commissioning of new equipment or introduction of new technological
processes;
3) while transferring an employee to another job or appointment him to another
position that requires additional knowledge on labor protection;
4) according to the request of agencies of state supervision, technical inspection of
labor, trade unions, superior economic bodies.

6. TEACHING IN LABOR SAFETY FOR


PROFESSIONAL DEVELOPMENT

6.1 Improvement of knowledge of workers, managers and specialists of the national


economy on labor safety in all forms of their professional development on specialty
(profession) at the enterprise, institutes and faculties of professional development (IPD and
FPD) envisaged by the model provision on uninterrupted professional and economic
training of personnel for national economy approved by resolution of State Labor
Committee of USSR, State Education of USSR and VSPS.
Educational and thematic plans and programs of courses for professional development on
specialty should include the issues of labor safety in the volume not less than 10% of total
extent of training course.
6.2 Special courses on labor safety in IPD and FPD, short-term courses and seminars on
labor safety at the enterprises are also organized for managers and specialists of the
national economy.
6.3 Types, frequency, terms and order of training as well as form of knowledge test on
labor safety in the system of professional development of workers, managers and
specialists of national economy are set in accordance with the existing procedure
determined by model provision on uninterrupted professional and economic training of
personnel for national economy.
p. 64 SNT 3.01.03-06

ТDS-12.0.004-90

7. INSTRUCTION ON LABOR SAFETY

According to nature and time of holding, the instructions are divided:


1) introductory *;
2) primary in the workplace;
3) repeated;
4) unscheduled;
5) target.
7.1 Introductory instruction
7.1.1 Introductory instruction on labor safety is conducted with all newly accepted persons
to the job regardless of their education, work experience on a given profession or
occupation, with temporary workers, on business, pupils and students, who came for
industrial training or practice as well as with students of educational institutions before the
start of laboratory and practical works in teaching laboratories, workshops, divisions,
training grounds.
7.1.2 Introductory instruction at the enterprise is carried out by engineer for labor
protection or a person, who is entrusted with these obligations by order of the enterprise or
decision of the board (chairman) of collective farm, cooperative, and with students of
educational establishments – by teacher or master of industrial training.
At large enterprises, relevant specialists could be involved in conduction of individual
sections of introductory instruction.
7.1.3 Introductory instruction is held in the room of labor protection or a specially
equipped room with use of modern technical means of training and visual aids (posters,
full-scale exhibits, mockups, models, films, slides, video films and etc.).
7.1.4 Introductory instruction is conducted according to the program worked out by
the department (bureau, engineer) of labor protection taking into account the requirements
of standards of he SSBT, rules, norms and regulations on labor protection as well as all
features of production approved by the manager (chief engineer) of the enterprise,
educational institution by agreement with the trade union committee. The duration of
instruction is determined in accordance with the approved program.
Exemplary list of questions for preparation of introductory instruction program is
given in Appendix 3.
7.1.5 Concerning conduction of introductory instruction, it should be made a record in the
registration book of introductory instruction (Appendix 4) with the mandatory signature of
the person, who is instructed and instructing, as well as in the document for employment
(Form T-1). Along with the book, it can be used the personal card of training (Appendix 2).
Holding of introductory instruction with students is registered in a log book of training
activities, with students, who are trained in out-of-school institutions - in the workbook of
manager of group, section, etc.
7.2 Primary instruction in the workplace
7.2.1 The primary instruction in the workplace before start of the industrial activity is
conducted:
with all newly-adopted workers at the enterprise (collective farm, cooperative, leasing
collective), being transferred from one unit to another;
with workers, who execute the new work for them, who are on a business trip, temporary
workers;
with builders, performing construction and repair works on the territory of the existing
enterprise;
__________________
* In certain sectors of the national economy instead of introductory instruction it can be
conducted the training in the procedure established in the sector.
p. 65 SNT 3.01.03-06

ТDS-12.0.004-90

With students, who came for the industrial training or practice before
performing new kinds of works as well as before study of every new topic while
conduction of practical classes in training laboratories, classrooms, shops, divisions, during
conduction of out-of-school classes in circles, sections.
Note. Persons, who are not related to maintenance, testing, adjustment and repair
of equipment, using of tools, storage and application of raw materials, do not have primary
instruction in the workplace.
The list of professions and occupations of employees, who are free of the primary
instruction in the workplace, is improved by the manager of the enterprise (organization) by
agreement with the trade union committee and department (bureau, engineer) of labor
safety.
7.2.2 Primary instruction in the workplace is conducted according to the programs worked
out and approved by the heads of production and structural subdivisions of the enterprise,
educational institution for certain professions or types of work, taking into account the
requirements of SSBT standards, relevant rules, norms and regulations on labor protection,
industrial regulations and other technical documentation. Programs are coordinated with
the department (bureau, engineer) of labor protection and trade union committee of
subdivision, enterprise.
Exemplary list of major issues of primary instruction in the workplace is given in the
Appendix 5.
7.2.3 Primary instruction in the workplace is conducted with each employee or students
individually with a practical demonstration of safe ways and methods of labor. Primary
instruction is possible with a group of persons, who maintain the same type equipment and
within common workplace.
7.2.4 All workers, including graduates of vocational schools, training and production
(course) plants, after the primary instruction at the workplace have to undergo training
course under the guidance of persons appointed by the order (regulation, decision) over the
shop (site, cooperative and etc) within the first 2-14 shifts (depending on nature of work,
qualification of the employee).
Note. The leadership of the shop, site, cooperative and etc. by agreement with the
department (bureau, engineer) of labor protection and trade union committee can free from
training course the worker, who has a work experience at least 3 years, transferring from
one shop to another, if the nature of his work and type of equipment he worked with before
does not change.
7.2.5 The workers are allowed to work independently after training course, testing of
theoretical knowledge and skills of safe methods of work.
7.3 Repeated instruction
7.3.1 Repeated instruction is underwent by all workers except those persons indicated in
the note to item 7.2.1 regardless of qualification of education, experience, work type at
least once in six months.
Enterprises, organizations by agreement with the trade union committees and relevant local
agencies of state supervision for certain categories of workers can install more longer (up to
1 year) term of repeated instruction.
7.3.2 Repeated instruction is conducted individually or with a group of workers, serving the
same type equipment and within common workplace according to program of primary
instruction in the workplace in full scale.
7.4 Unplanned instruction
7.4.1 Unplanned instruction is conducted:
1) while introduction of new or reworked standards, rules and regulations on labor
protection, as well as amendments thereto;
2) while change of the technological process, replacing or modernization of equipment,
appliances and tools, raw materials, materials and other factors, affecting on labor safety;
3) while violation by workers and students of labor safety requirements, which may cause
or lead to injury, accident, explosion or fire, poisoning;
4) to the request of oversight agencies;
p. 66 SNT 3.01.03-06
ТDS-12.0.004-90
5) while intervals in the work - for work, which demands additional (higher) labor safety
requirements by more than 30 calendar days, and for other works - 60 days.
7.4.2 Unplanned instruction is conducted individually or with a group of workers of one
profession. The scope and content of instruction is determined in each concrete case
depending on the causes and circumstances, provoking the necessity of its holding.
7.5 Special-purpose instruction
7.5.1 Special-purpose instruction is conducted while realization of one-shot
activities disconnected with direct responsibilities on specialty (loading and unloading,
cleaning of the territory, occasional work outside the enterprise, shop, etc.); liquidation of
accident consequences, disasters and catastrophes; production work for which the order is
made - access, permission and other documents; performance of excursions to the
enterprises, organizations of mass events with students (excursions, trips, sport
competitions, etc.).
7.6 Primary instruction in the workplace, repeated, unplanned and special-purpose are
conducted by supervisor of work (master, instructor of industrial training, teacher).
7.7 Instructions in the workplace are completed with testing of knowledge by oral
examination or by means of technical training means as well as testing the acquired skills of
safe methods of work. Knowledge is tested by worker, who held instruction.
7.8 Those students, who showed unsatisfactory knowledge, are not allowed to work
independently or attend the practical courses and have to undergo again the instruction.
7.9 Concerning primary instruction on the workplace, repeated, unplanned, study
course and access to the work, the employee, who conducted the instruction, makes records in
the book of registration of on-site instruction (Appendix 6) and (or) in the personal card
(Appendix 2) with mandatory signature of persons, who are instructed and instructing. While
registration of unplanned instruction, it is necessary to indicate the reason for its conduct.
Special-purpose instruction with employees, who carry out work on order – access,
permission and etc., is recorded in the order-admission or other documentation, allowing the
production of works.
p. 67 SNT 3.01.03-06
ТDS-12.0.004-90
Appendix 1
Recommended
FORM OF REPORT OF THE MEETING OF COMMISSION ON LABOR SAFETY
KNOWLEDGE TESTING

_________________________________________________________________________
__________
enterprise, organization

Report No_______________

of the meeting of commission on labor safety knowledge testing

“_______”_______________200___

Commission includes:

Chairman,________________________________________________________________
_
specialty, surname, initials

and members of
commission_______________________________________________________________
specialty, surname, initials
_________________________________________________________________________

on the basis of Order No________________dated


from”_____”______________________________200

examines_________________________________________________________________
_
type of training or knowledge test

and determined:
_________________________________________________________________________

Surname, Specialty, Shop, Test mark

Note
Name, patronymic profession division knowledge (passed, not
passed)

Chairman of Commission ___________________________(Surname, initials)


signature

Members of Commission ___________________________(Surname, initials)


signature

___________________________(Surname, initials)
signature
___________________________(Surname, initials)
signature
p. 68 SNT 3.01.03-06
ТDS-12.0.004-90
Appendix 2
Recommended

Form of personal card of training

__________________________________________________________________________
___
enterprise, organization, educational establishment

Personal card of training


Surname, name, patronymic_________________________________________________
Date of birth_____________________________________________________________
Profession, specialty_______________________________________________________
Shop_________________________section (division)______________________________
Department (laboratory)____________________ Clock number_____________________
Date of entering the shop (division)____________________________________________
Introductory instruction was held by___________________________________________
surname, initials, specialty
____________________________________________________________________________
________________________
signature, date
________
__________________________
signature of person, who is
instructed
8. Notes on training:
Date of instruction

Profession, specialty of person, who is

Surname, initials, specialty of person, who is


Shop (division)

Type of instruction: primary, on-site,

Reason of holding the unplanned instruction

Signature On-site instruction


person, who is instructing

Instruction was passed (signature of

Knowledge was tested, access to work


person, who is instructed

Quantity of shifts (from…to…)


repeated, unplanned

was made (signature, date)


instructed

employee), ,
instructing

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

p. 69 SNT 3.01.03-06
ТDS-12.0.004-90
Subsequent pages
9. Information about having a labor protection training
Had a training on
specialty or type of
work
1

10.
Infor
matio
n
about
period
ic
knowl
edge
test
Date In the volume of which № of record of board Signature
instructions or sections of of examiners, date Person, who Chairman of
labor safety regulations tests board of
1 2 3 4 5
p. 70 SNT 3.01.03-06

ТDS-12.0.004-90
Appendix 3
Recommended
Exemplary list of major issues of
introductory instruction

1. General information about the enterprise, organization, characteristics of production.


2. The main provisions of the legislation on labor protection
2.1. The labor contract, labor hours and rest period, labor protection of women and
persons younger than 18 years old. Benefits and compensations.
2.2. Regulations of internal of labor routine of enterprises, organizations, responsibility
for violation of rules.
2.3. Organization of work on labor protection in the enterprise. Departmental,
governmental oversight and social control over situation of labor protection.
3. General maxims of employees on the territory of the enterprise, in production and
auxiliary facilities. Location of main shops, services, auxiliary rooms.
4. Key dangerous and harmful industrial factors specific to this production. Methods
and means of preventing accidents and occupational diseases: a means of collective
protection, posters, safety signs, alarm system. Basic requirements on prevention of electrical
injury.
5. Main requirements of industrial sanitation and personal hygiene.
6. Means of individual protection. Order and standards of delivery of SIZ, terms of
wearing.
7. The circumstances and causes of separate characteristic accidents, breakages, fires
occurred at the enterprise and other similar productions because of violations of safety
requirements.
8. The order of investigation and registration of accidents and occupational diseases.
9. Fire safety. Ways and means of preventing fires, explosions, accidents. Personnel
actions while their emergence.
10. First aid to victims. The actions of employees while emergence of an accident on
the site, in the shop.

p. 71 SNT 3.01.03-06

ТDS-12.0.004-90

Appendix 4
Recommended
Form of registration book of introductory
Instruction

Cover

_________________________________________
enterprise, organization, educational establishment

BOOK OF
Registration of introductory instruction
Started____________________200____

Completed___________________200____

Subsequent pages

Date Surname, Date of Profession, Name of industrial Surname, Signature


patronymic birth specialty subdivision the initials of person, person,
of person, of person, person, who is person, who who is who is
who is who is instructed, is is instructin instructe
instructed instructed directed to instructing g d
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
p. 72 SNT 3.01.03-06
ТDS-12.0.004-90
Appendix 5
Recommended

Exemplary list of major issues of primary


on-site instruction

1. General information about the technological process and equipment at this workplace,
production site, in the shop. Key dangerous and harmful production factors, arising during
this process.
2. Safe adjustment and maintenance of the workplace.
3. Dangerous zones of machines, mechanisms, apparatus. Safety means of equipment
(preventive, braking devices and fencing, interlocking and alarm systems, safety signs).
Requirements for electrical injury prevention.
4. The procedure of preparation for the work (checking of proper operation of
equipment, start-up instruments, tools and appliances, interlocks, grounding and other
means of protection).
5. Safe ways and methods of work; actions in dangerous situation.
6. Means of personal protection at this workplace and rules of their use.
7. Scheme of safe movement of employees on the territory of the shop, section.
8. Intrashop transport and loading equipment and mechanisms. Safety requirements
in handling operations and cargo transportation.
9. Typical causes of accidents, explosions, fires, cases of occupational injuries.
10. Measures of prevention of accidents, explosions and fires. Duty and actions
during the accident, explosion, fire. Ways of use the available on site fire-extinguishing
means fire protection, anti-damage protection and alarm system, their locations.
p. 73 SNT 3.01.03-06
TDS-12.0.004-90

Appendix 6
Recommended

Form of registration book of on-the-spot


Instruction

Cover

_________________________________________
enterprise, organization, educational establishment

BOOK OF
Registration of on-the-spot instruction

________________________________
shop, division, brigade, service, laboratory

Started__________________200___
Completed_________________200___
p. 75 SNT 3.01.03-06

TDS-12.1.013-78

UDK 693:658.382.3:006.354 MKS 13.260 Group J


07

Interstate standard

Standard system of labor security


CONSTRUCTION. ELECTRICAL SAFETY
General requirements

Present standard is spread up to construction-assembly works and sets general requirements


of electrical safety at preparation and production of construction-assembly activities.
Standard is not covered for construction-assembly activities, done on running electrical
installations with more than 100 V as well as construction – assembly works, done in mines
and pits.
Standard is fully corresponded with CME on PS standardization 1170-67 as well as PS
1526-68 in part, concerning earthing.

General requirements

1.1 For ensuring protection of people from dangerous and harmful effect of electric current,
electric arc, electromagnetic field and static electricity should be fulfilled in accordance with
requirements of standards and normative-technical documentation, undertaken in required
appendix 1 of the present standard.
1.2 People, allowing to work in servicing electric installations and management with
construction machines and equipment with electric drive must be followed the requirements
given in appendix 2.
1.3 People, engaged in construction-assembly operations must be trained for safety ways of
prevention functioning of electric current on man and rendering first aid at trauma. (see
reference appendix 3).
1.4 In construction-assembly organization must be appointed engineer, having qualification
group on electric safety not lower than 4- category, responsible for safety exploitation of
organization’s electric stuff.
1.5 Responsibility for safety production of concrete construction- assembly works with
employment of electric installations is fallen on engineers, heading production of these
activities.

2. General requirements of electric safety

2.1 At setting electric nets at construction site it is necessary to foresee possibility of


switching off all electric devices in the range of separate sites and fields.
2.2 Activities, connected with joining (detachment) of wires, repairing, setting, prophylactics
and testing of electric equipment, must be fulfilled by technical personnel, having relevant
qualification group on safety measures.
Joining to electric net of movable electric devices, manual electric machines and
movable electric lamps by means of plug connections, satisfying requirements of electric
safety it is allowed to be fulfilled by personnel, allowed to work with it.

p. 76 SNT 3.01.03-06
TDS-12.1.013-78

Setting of safety devices as well as electric lamps must be fulfilled by electrician,


using individual protection means.
2.3 Assembly and repairing works on electric nets and electric installations must be done just
after reliving voltage and fulfillment of works on ensuring safety.
2.4 At keeping, checking, giving for exploitation manual electric machines, reducing
transformers, frequency converter and movable electric lamps safety rules must be kept at
exploitation of electric installations of consumers, approved by state energy inspection.
2.5 At conduction of works out of room in all cases – in conditions of extreme danger to be
shocked by current (see required appendix 4) it is necessary to use manual electric machines
of 2 and 3 class by TDS -12.2.007.0-75. At working with electric machines of 2 -class it is
required to use individual protection means.
At occurring of dangerous conditions for being shocked by electric current (see required
appendix 4) it should be used only electric machines of 3-class by TDS-12.2.007.0-75 with
application of dielectric gloves, rugs and boots.
2.6 Movable receiver of electric energy of 1 class by TDS-12.2.007.0-75 for joining to
feeding source must have cable with grounded strand and plug connector with grounded
contacts, providing forestalling shorting of grounding contact at switching and more later
breaking at switching off.
2.7 Metal construction scaffolding, rail track of electric load lifting cranes and other metal
parts of construction machines and equipment with electric drive must have protective
grounding (earthing).
In electric installations with up to 1000V with dead-earthed neutral or dead-earthed exit of
1-phased current source, earthing of receivers’ body of electric energy (electric technical
items) without grounding is not allowed.
2.8 Switchers, knife switch and other commutation electric apparatuses applied at
construction site or installed at production construction equipment and machines must be
protected.
2.9 Current-carrying parts of electric installations must be isolated, fenced or placed in not
accessible spots.
2.10 Outer electric wires of temporary electric supply must be preformed with isolated wire,
placed on supports at height above the ground level, floor, covering not less than, m
2,5-above working places
3,5-above passageways
6,0-above drive
2.12-Assembly and exploitation of electric wires and electric items must exclude possibility
of thermal development of electric current which could lead to burning of isolation or nearby
combustibles.
2.12 Protection of electric system and electric installations from current of inter-phased short
circuit and circuit on frame must be ensured by means of safety device setting with calibrated
fuse-links or automated switch.
2.13 Lamps of general lighting, joined to feeding source (electric net) with 127 and 220V
must be installed at the height not less than 2,5 m from ground level, floor, covering. At
height of bracket less than 2,5 m lamps must be joined to net with not lower than 42V.
p. 77 SNT 3.01.03-06
TDS-12.1.013-78

2.14 At work in especially dangerous conditions (see required appendix 4) must be applied
portable lamps with not lower than 12V.
As feeding source with up to 42V must be used reducing transformers, machine converters,
generators, accumulator batteries. It is not admitted to use auto transformers for these goals.
2.15 Electric welding installations must be complied with requirements TDS-12.2.003-74 and
TDS-12.2.007.8-75.
2.16 Electric welding works must be carried out in compliance with TDS-12.3.003-75, fire
safety rules at conduction of welding and other fire works at sites of national economy and
fire safety rules at holding of construction-assembly works, approved by the main fire
prevention management at the ministry of interior affairs of the USSR.
2.17 Electric holders, used at manual arc electric welding with metal electrodes must be
complied with TDS-14651-78.
2.18 Electric welding installation (converter, welding transformer and others) must be joined
to feeding source through knife switch and safety device or automated switch.
2.19 Manual arc welding with metal electrodes must be done with employment of 2 wires,
one of which must be joined to electric holder and other to welding item (foundation). At this
clamp of second winding of welding transformer to which another return wire is joined must
be grounded.
2.20 As return line joined to welding item, it is not allowed to use nets of grounding, pipes of
sanitary-technical system (pipe system, gas pipeline and so on), metal construction of
premises technological equipment.
2.21 Electric devices for electric heating of ground and concrete must have protection from
current of short circuit. In the period of its exploitation it is necessary to use protection from
currents of short circuit. In the period of its exploitation it is required to use sound or lamp
signaling.
2.22 Voltage of feeding source of electric curing chains must be not more than:
-380V –at electrode curing of ground, electric curing of concrete and outer electric curing of
reinforced and non-reinforced concrete;
-220V-at electrode curing of reinforced and non-reinforced concrete;
2.23 Within the whole exploitation period of electric devices at construction sites must be
implemented safety signs by TDS-12.4.026-76.
2.24 Construction-assembly works in fenced-off area of running power transmission air line
must be under direct supervision of engineering personnel responsible for safety production
of works, at existence of written permission of organization-owner of line and right of access,
providing safe conditions of work and given in accordance with rules of chief of safety
engineering in construction.
Right of access to production of construction-assembly works in fenced-off area of running
power transmission air line must be signed by chief engineer of construction-assembly
organization and person, responsible for safe condition of electricity in organization,
responsible for fulfillment of requires measures mentioned in p.1.4 of present standard.
2.25 Before starting running of construction machinery in fenced-off area of power
transmission air line (see required appendix 5) must be ensured stress relieving from power
transmission air line and requirements must be kept envisaged in p.2.24 of present standard.
At occurrence of valid impossibility to relive stress from power transmission air line running
of construction machinery in fenced-off area of power transmission air line it is allowed to
make at keeping requirements, foreseen in p.2.24 and pp. 2.25.1-2.25.4 of present standard.
2.25.1 Distance from lifting and moving part of construction machine in any position up to
vertical plane formed by projection on ground from the nearest wire being under stress of
power transmission air line must be not less that is pointed out in table.

p. 78 SNT 3.01.03-06
TDS-12.1.013-78

Stress of air line, KV The least distance, m


Up to 1 1,5
From 1 up to 20 2.0
From 35 up to 110 4,0
From 150 up to 220 5,0
330 6,0
From 500 up to 750 9,0
800 (direct current) 9,0

2.25.2 It is allowed running of construction machines directly under wires of power


transmission air line being under 110 KV and higher at terms that distance from lifting or
moving part of machines as well as movable load in any position up to the nearest wire must
be not less than in table for relevant stress.
2.25.3 Operator of load-lifting machine must have not lower than II qualification group on
safety measures.
2.25.4 Body of load-lifting machines excluding track-typed machines must be grounded by
means of movable grounding.

3. Requirements for protection facilities application

3.1 People, servicing electric installations, must apply individual protective means envisaged
by typed norms of free of charge uniform, shoes and preventive accessories approved by state
committee on labor of the USSR.
3.2 Security facilities applied in electric devices must be tested periodically. Frequency of
testing and conditions for keeping protective facilities must be corresponded with rules,
approved by bodies for state inspection.
Security facilities must be protected from humidity, dust, mechanical damages, influence of
factors and substances that make their dielectric features worse.

4. Control for fulfillment of electric safety requirements

4.1 Periodic control for isolation resistance of electric circuit of installations must be
conducted by means of relevant devices. Before joining devices must be ensured stress
relieving from controlled electric circuits.
4.2 Control methods of electric field stress of industrial voltage 400 KV and higher must be
corresponded with methods envisaged by TDS-12.1.002-75.
p. 79 SNT 3.01.03-06
TDS-12.1.013-78
Appendix 1
Required

List

Of normative-technical documentation, establishing requirements to


people’s protection from dangerous and harmful effect of
electric current, electric arc, magnetic field and static electricity.

TDS-12.1.002-75, TDS-12.2.007.0-75, TDS-12.2.007.14-75, TDS-12.2.013-75 and TDS


-12.2.020-76.
Rules of electric installation, approved by ministry of energy and electrification of the USSR.
Rules of technical exploitation of electric devices and rules of safety measures at exploitation
of devices, approved by state energy inspection.
Protection rules from static electricity in production of chemical, oil and chemistry and oil
refining industry, approved by ministry of chemical industry and ministry of oil processing
and oil and chemical industry of the USSR.

Appendix 2
Required

Requirements to persons, who work with electric installations and machine


management and equipment with electric circuit.

Persons, who are allowed to service electric installations, must reach 18 years old.
Persons, who are allowed to service electric installations must undergo medical inspection
held in terms established by ministry of healthcare. (Appendix 1 to order of ministry of
healthcare USSR from May, 30 1969 #400).
Persons, who are allowed to service electric installations as well as machine management and
equipment with electric circuit must have relevant qualification in accordance with reference
book of jobs and professions engaged in construction and repairing works, relevant
qualification group on safety measures, undergo checking of knowledge on safety electric
measures in accordance with rules.
Persons, who are allowed to service electric installations as well as machine management and
equipment with electric circuit must have II qualification group on safety measures.
Approving of qualification group should be held annually, making notes in journal.
Persons, who are allowed to service electric installations, must have 1 qualification group on
safety measures. Approving of qualification group should be held annually, making notes in
journal. These persons must undergo instruction advice not less than 1 time per quarter.
p. 76 SNT 3.01.03-06
TDS-12.1.013-78
Appendix 3
Reference

Defining of electrical injury


1. Occurrence of electrical injury in the result of affect of electric current or electric arc could
be tied with :
With 1-phased (unipolar) touch of non-isolated from ground man to non-isolated current-
carrying parts of electric installations being under stress;
With simultaneous touch of a man to 2 current-carrying parts (phases, polars) of electric
installations being under stress;
With approaching of a man for dangerous distance to non-isolated current-carrying parts of
electric installations being under stress;
With approaching of a man for dangerous distance to non-isolated current-carrying parts of
metal bodies of electric installations being under stress;
With involving of a man, being in area of current shorting сon ground, on step stress;
with effect of atmosphere electricity at lightning discharge;
with effect of electric arc;
with liberation of a man, being under voltage.
Hardness of electrical injury running through person’s body, frequency of current ,
physiological condition of organism, duration of current influence, ways of current in
organism and production conditions.
Outer manifestations of electrical injury could be burns, electric signs on skin, metallization
of person’s skin.
Appendix 4
Required
Classification of conditions of works by electrical safety level
1. Conditions with top risk for people, injured with electrical current:
а) humidity (steam or condensed wet in the form of tiny drops and relevant humidity of air
exceeds 75%);
б) dust existence (technological or other dust, falling on wires and inside machines make worse
cooling conditions and isolation but not causing fire or explosion);
в) existence of conducting foundations (metal, ground, ferroconcrete, brick)
c) existence of high temperature (independently from season and various thermal radiation temperature
exceeds 35 °С, short timed 40 °С);
д) existence of simultaneous touch of a man to joining with ground of metal construction
premises, technological devices, mechanisms from one hand and metal body of electrical
equipment from other side.
2. Especially dangerously injured people with electrical current:
а) existence of dampness (rain, snow, often watering and covering of ceiling, floor, walls, with
wet, being inside the room );
б)existence of chemically active environment (constantly or for a long period aggressive gasses, liquid is
kept, damaging isolation and current carrying parts of electrical equipment);
в) existence of simultaneously 2 or more conditions of danger.
3. Conditions without dangerous injury for people with electrical current: absence of
conditions, creating top danger.
p. 81 SNT 3.01.03-06
TDS-12.1.013-78

Appendix 5
Required

Defining of fenced-off area

Fenced-off area along air lines of power transmission is the field and space, surrounded between
vertical plane passing through parallel straight lines, coming from wires for distance, m:

For stress lines:

Up to 1KV……………………………………………………………………………………… 2
From 1 up to 20 KV inclusively ………………………………………………………………. 10
35 KV ………………………………………………………………………………………….. 15
110 KV ……………………………………………………………………………………… .. 20
150KV ………………………………………………………………………………………… 25
220KV
330KV ………………………………………………………………………………………… 30
400KV
500KV
750KV ………………………………………………………………………………………. . 40
800 KV ………………………………………………………………………………………… 30
(Direct current)
p. 82 SNT 3.01.03-06
TDS-12.1.040-83*
UDK 658.382.3:621.375.826:006.354 МКS 13.280
group Т 58
Interstate standard

Occupational safety standards system


LASER SAFETY
General

Present standard ascertains:


Classification of dangerous and harmful factors, occurring at exploitation of lasers (laser
installations) subjected to danger level of generated radiation;
Requirements and norms by kinds of dangerous and harmful productive factors and admitted
values of parameters;
Control methods of normalized parameters of dangerous and harmful productive factors;
Requirements to building and account of standards on laser security;
General requirements to facilities of collective protection (further – security facilities) from
dangerous and harmful productive factors;
Standard is extended for individual protection facilities from laser radiation.
Terms and explanations, implemented in present standard, given in reference appendix 1;
Present standard is complied with recommendations of International electro technical
commission and World healthcare organization

1.General requirements
Laser security at laser exploitation (laser installations) is regulated by present standard, norms
and rules, fixed by standard system on laser security, normative documents, established in set
order.
Security requirements at work with lasers (laser installations) include other exploitation
documentation.
For lasers (laser installations) in each concrete case must be fixed dangerous and harmful
productive factors , occurring at their exploitation.
In each concrete case manufacturer must define class of laser by the level of danger for
generated radiation.
At enterprises, productive activity which activity is tied with laser’s exploitation in concrete
case must be:
Elaborated instructions (requirements) of security and protection measures at work with
lasers;
Established requirements for personnel, allowed to work with lasers by TDS-12.3.002-75;
Elaborated control regulation for dangerous and harmful productive factors.
Standards, establishing requirements of laser security must be elaborated in compliance with
TDS-12.0.001-82 and present standard.
SNT 3.01.03-06 page 83
TDS – 12.1.040-83*
1.6 Standards for requirements of laser security must take into consideration:
specifics of laser security;
Rules of laser security in connection with specifics of laser employment;
Concrete ways for prevention of laser radiation affect;
Qualitative and quantitative indexes of technical aids’ effectiveness preventing influence from
laser radiation;
Technical requirements to constructive performance of technical aids’ prevention from laser
radiation effect;
Organizational-technical arrangements on prevention from laser radiation effect;
Security requirements at emergency;
Curative-prophylactic protection methods at working with lasers
(Changed reduction, Changed № 1).

2. Classification of dangerous and harmful


productive factors

2.1 Subjected to technical parameters of laser construction and exploitation conditions the
following groups of dangerous and harmful productive factors could influence on servicing
personnel.
Group of dangerous and harmful productive factors: laser radiation (direct, diffuse, mirror,
diffusively reflected) increased value of stress with the purpose to control sources of laser
electric feeding;
Raised dust level and pollution with gases of working area with output of laser radiation with
target and radiolysis of air (ozone, nitrogen and others );
Raised level of ultraviolet radiation from impulse pumping lamps or quartz gas discharging
pipes in working area;
Raised brightness of light from impulse pumping lamps and influence area of laser radiation
with target material;
Raised noise level and vibration at working place, occurring at laser running;
Increased level of ionized radiations in working area:
Raised level of electromagnetic radiations of ВЧ - and СВЧ- diapason in the working area;
increased level of infrared radiation in working area; raised temperature of equipment
surface, explosion hazard in system of laser pumping.
Group of chemical dangerous and harmful productive factors by TDS-12.0.003-
74.
At employment of lasers in technological, experimental, medicinal and other installations
they are classified by the level of laser radiation in comparison with allowed level, calculated
method, or measuring in working area.
By danger level of generated radiation lasers are divided into 4 classes.
Exit radiation is not harmful for eyes and skin - lasers of 1 class
Exit radiation is dangerous at radiation of eyes by direct and mirror reflection of radiation-
lasers of 2 class.
Exit radiation is dangerous at radiation of eyes at direct, mirror, reflection as well as
diffusive-reflected radiation for 10 cm distance from diffusively reflected surface or at skin
radiation by direct and mirror reflected radiation-lasers of 3 class.
SNT 3.01.03-06 page 84
TDS – 12.1.040-83*

Exit radiation is dangerous at skin radiation with diffusively reflected radiation at 10 cm


distance from diffusive reflected surface –lasers of 4 class.
2.4 Dangerous and harmful productive factors which could occur at exploitation of lasers of 1
– 4 classes are given in reference appendix 2.

3. Requirements and norms by kinds of dangerous and harmful productive factors and
admitted values of their parameters
Maximum level of laser radiation, brightness of color of impulsive pumping lamps and gas-
discharging pipes is established in compliance with requirements of “Sanitary norms and
rules for installation and exploitation of lasers” № 2392-81 by ministry of healthcare of the
USSR.
Requirements to control circuit and sources of electric feeding must be complied with TDS-
12.2.007.0-75 and fix in standards and technical terms for lasers.
Admitted level of noise in productive rooms and requirements for noise protection by TDS-
12.1.003-83.
3.4 Hygiene characteristics and norms of vibration at working areas by
TDS-12.1.012-78.
Maximum level for stress value and density of energy stream of magnetic field and security
requirements by TDS-12.1.006-84.
Allowed levels for ionized radiation and requirements of security in compliance with
«Norms of radiation security (НРБ-76/80)», approved by ministry of healthcare of the USSR
and «Main sanitary rules with radioactive substances and other ionized radiations (ОСП-72)»,
approved by ministry of healthcare of the USSR.
(Changed version , Changed. № 1)
Requirements of fire safety by TDS-12.1.004-76.
Requirements of explosion safety by TDS-12.1.010-76.
Maximum concentration of harmful chemical substances in air of working area by TDS-
12.1.007-76.

4.Control methods of normalized parameters of dangerous and harmful productive


factors

4.1 The level control of dangerous and harmful productive factors is carried out by facilities
that undergone state inspection. Accuracy of level measurement for laser radiation at working
areas must not exceed ±30% by TDS-12.1.031 -81.
4.2 Control methods of circuits and sources of electrical feeding are fixed in standards and
technical terms for lasers.
4.3 Control for noise level is carried out by TDS-20445-75.
4.4 Control for vibration norms is conducted by TDS-13731-68 and TDS-12.4.012-83.
4.5 Control for keeping maximum values of electromagnetic field by TDS-12.1.006-84 and
«Sanitary norms at working with sources of electromagnetic fields” approved by ministry of
healthcare of the USSR.
4.6 Control for keeping harmful chemical substances in air at working area is carried out by
TDS-12.1.005-76.
SNT 3.01.03-06 page. 85
ТDS-12.1.040-83*
5. General requirements of security facilities of dangerous and harmful production factors
Security facilities must be complied with requirements 1Ю8-12.4.011-75.
Security facilities must be made in compliance with requirements of present standard on
normative-technical documentation, approved in established order for concrete security
facilities.
Security facilities must prevent from influence of harmful and dangerous productive factors
up to accepted value.
Security facilities must be envisaged at projecting stage, mounting of lasers (laser
installations), at selection of working regime and organization of working places.
5.5 Security facilities must not be limited by technological abilities of lasers and
decrease working ability of a man.
Ergonomic requirements to security facilities by Т08-12.2.049-80.
Installation of automated control and signaling, blocked and remote control by ТОЗ-
12.4.125-83.
Symbols of control units by ТОЗ-12.4.040-78.
Signaling colors and security signs by ТЭ8-12.4.026-76.
5.10 Security facilities from laser radiation – fencing devices -divided ;
By usage way — for stationary and movable;
By construction - for dumping, collapsible, detachable;
By making way – for solid, with sight glass, with holes of variable diameter;
By structural feature –for simple, combined ;
By kind of applied material – for non-organic, organic, combined ;
By remission principle - for absorbing, reflecting, combined ;
By remission level - for non-transparent, partially transparent;
By constructive execution – for blends, diaphragm, plug, lock, casing, cover, cameras,
cabins, target, obdurate, bridge, light guide, inspection hole, blind, shield, shutter, panel,
screen. .
5.11 security facilities from laser radiation besides fixed by ТБЗ-12.4.011-75, related to :
Safety devices;
Devices of automated control and signaling ;
Device of remote control;
Symbols of control units.
5.11.1 Security facilities from laser radiation - Safety devices are divided by constructive
execution for:
Optic devices for visual observation and embed lighting filters;
Encoded lasers;
Telemetric and TV observation systems;
Indicated devices.
Security facilities from noise (sound) by Т08-12.1.029-80.
Security facilities from vibration by ТО8-12.4.046-78.
Security facilities form ionized radiation by Т08-12.4.120-83.
5.15 Security facilities from infrared rays by ТЛ58-12.4.123-83.
Part 5. (introduced additionally, changed № 1).
SNT 3.01.03-06 page 86
TDS – 12.1.040-83*

Appendix 1
Reference
Terms and explanations, used in standard

Term Explanation
1. Diffusive reflected laser radiation Laser radiation, reflected from surface, commensurated with wave
length by all possible directions in the limit of semi sphere.
2. Mirror reflection of laser radiation Laser radiation, reflected at angle equaled to sight radiation
3. Laser security Unity of technical sanitary-hygiene and organizational
arrangements providing safe labor conditions for personnel at
employment of lasers.
4.Laser dangerous area. Part of space in which level of laser radiation exceeds maximum
level
5.Dangerous productive factor by TDS-12.0.002-80
6. Harmful productive factor by TDS-12.0.002-80
7. Personnel People who constantly or temporarily work with lasers or could
have laser radiation
8. Diffuse radiation Laser radiation, diffused from substance being in environment
composition through which radiation passes.
9.Working area Space with 2m height above floor or site level.

Appendix 2
Reference
Dangerous and harmful productive factors

Dangerous and harmful productive factors Laser class

1 2 3 4

Laser radiation:
Direct, mirror reflected + +
Diffusively reflected - - + +
Raised voltage of electric field -(+) + + +
Raised dust level and pollution with gases of working - - -(+) +
area
Raised level of ultraviolet radiation - - -(+) т
Raised brightness of light - - -(+) +
Raised level of noise and vibration - - -(+) +
Raised level of ionized radiation - - - +
Raised level of electromagnetic radiations ВЧ- and СВЧ - - - -(+)
– diapasons
Raised level of infrared radiation - - -(+) +
Raised temperature of equipment surface - - -(+) +
Chemical dangerous and harmful productive factors At work with toxic substances
+ always exist;
absent
(+) existence depends on concrete technical characteristics, laser and conditions of its
exploitation.
SNT 3.01.03-06 page 87
TDS – 12.1.046-85

УДК 624.05:628.93:006.354 МКС 91.160.01 group J 07


Interstate standard

Occupational safety standards system. Building


LIGHTING OF BUILDING SITES

Standard sets norms of lightning, methods of control and protection, spreading for projecting
and exploitation of lightning installations for all kinds of technological processes on
construction sites as well as production places for construction and mounting works inside
premises.

1. General regulations
Artificial lightning of construction sites and production places for construction and mounting
works inside premises must be complied with requirements of present standard as well as
requirements of СНиП II-4-79, СНиП Ш-4-80, TDS-12.1.013-78, rules for electrical
installations, approved by ministry of energy of the USSR as well as rules of fire safety at
production of construction-assembly works, approved by ГУПО MIA of USSR.
For electrical lighting of construction sites must be used standard stationary and movable
inventory lightning installations. .
Movable inventory lightning installations must be placed on construction site in production
places, in area of transport ways and so on.
Construction machines must be equipped with lighting installations.
In cases when construction vehicles are not delivered together with lightning equipment, at
projecting it must be taken into account installations of street lighting mounted on machines’
body.
Electrical lighting at construction sites is divided to working, emergency and protected.
Working lighting must be envisaged for all construction sites and fields, where works are
carried out at night time.
1.4 General even lightning must be used if size of lighting is normalized and does not exceed
2 LK. In other cases it is envisaged general lighting or local one.
1.5 For lighting production places of exterior construction and mounting works must be
employed light sources:
Incandescent lamps of general destination –
LН byTDS19190-84;
incandescent lamps projecting by TDS-19190-84;
incandescent lamps halogen by TDS-19190-84;
mercurial lamps of gas-discharging pressure DPL by TDS-23583-79, TDS-23198-78;
mercurial lamps of gas-discharging of high pressure DPL by TDS-20401-75;
xenon lamps DКсТ by TDS-20401-75;
sodium lamp of high pressure НЛВД by TDS-24169-80.

SNT 3.01.03-06 page 88


TDS – 12.1.046-85

General lighting is carried out by lighting devices by TDS-6047-75, TDS-8045-82.


For general even lighting of construction sites must be employed lighting devices:
Lamps with LН at 20 м width of construction site;
Lamps of type DРЛ and НЛВД – at site width from 20 up to 150 м;
Projectors with LН and lamps DРI – at width of sites from 150 up to 300 м;
Lamps and projectors with lamps ДКсТ, having powerful coefficient of light not less than 10
– at site’s width more than 300 м.
For lighting production places of construction and mounting works inside edifice filament
lamps must be used.
For general localized lighting at location of lamps at 15 m distance from production spots
must be used lamps DРL and НЛВД, as well as projectors with lamps of type ЛН and ДРЛ.
Lamps of general localized lighting are set on premises, constructions of general even
lighting. Installation of lamps of burning coverings of edifices is prohibited.
Emergency lighting must be foreseen in production spaces on concreting responsible
constructions in cases when break in concrete laying is not allowed.
Emergency lighting on the concreting fields must be provided with 3 лк, on massif concreting
- 1 лк at the level of laid concrete mixture. .
Evacuation lighting must be envisaged in places of evacuation as well as passage plaçes
where traumatism is possible. Evaçuation lighting must be provided inside çonstruçting
premise with 0,5 лк, outside -0,2 лк.
Protective lighting is envisaged in dark time when guiding of construction sites is needed.
For fulfillment of protective lighting should be allotted part of lamps. Protective lighting
must be installed at construction sites on ground level or vertically on fencing.

2. Norms of lightning
For construction sites it is envisaged general even lighting. Lighting must be not less than 2
лк independently from employed light sources not considering highways, which lighting must
be not less than pointed out in table 1.
For fields with more than 2 лк, in addition to general even lighting must be envisaged general
localized lighting.
For areas with people, level of lighting must be decreased up to 0,5 лк.
Lightning, created by lamps at construction sites and inside premises must be not less that in
table 1 independently from applied light sources.

SNT 3.01.03-06 page 89


TDS – 12.1.046-85
Table 1
Surface on which Level of surface on
Fields of construction sites and The least lightning is which lightning is
works lightning , лк normalized normalized
Highways at construction sites 2 Horizontal On the level of roadway
Railways at construction sites 0,5 Horizontal On the surface of rail
head
Driving to bridges and railroads 10 Horizontal The same

Road works : 10 Horizontal On ground level


Laying of foundation under road 30 Horizontal The same
covering at road covering;
Shipping, installation, lifting of 10 Horizontal At areas of reception of
equipment, constructions, 10 Vertical equipment, constructions
materials with load lifting cranes and materials.
Non-mechanized shipping and 2 Horizontal At areas of reception of
loading of constructions and loads
fringing
Mounting of construction and 50 Horizontal On all height of mounting
load-lifting mechanisms: various On all height of mounting
30 Horizontal
kinds of regulations, movable On all levels with
30 Vertical
parts assembly works
Works inside technological 30* Vertical On all levels of work
equipment, capacities, production
reservoirs, bunkers, apparatuses.
Testing of technological 50 Vertical At working places
equipment
Earthing works, produced by dry 10 Vertical On all height of loading
method with various 5 Horizontal
mechanisms.
Installation of trenches for 10 Horizontal AT the level of trench
foundations, communications 10 Vertical bottom
Along the height of
trench
Development of ground with 10 Horizontal On the level of working
bulldozers, rollers. areas

SNT 3.01.03-06 page 90


TDS – 12.1.046-85

Continuation of table 1
№ Areas of construction sites and The least Surface on which Level of surface on
works lightning, lightning is which lightning is
13 Earth works, produced by in lux
10 0,5 normalized
Horizontal normalized
wash way: The same At ground level and
Setting of trestle works, laying 3 » top of trestlework. At
and mounting of sludge line of the level of trestle
ground (at exploitation in 30 top. For night
construction period) 2 Vertical inspection, repairing
2 Horizontal sludge line should be
Floating sludge line (at 10 The same used movable or
exploitation of suction dredge Vertical lighting facilities. On
cutter (at inspection ) the way of servicing
Bridge of suction personnel. At the
dredge on washing map level of cutter. At the
outlet basin level of bridge, pool.

14 Drilling works, sinking of pile 10 Vertical Along the height of


mining, pile
15 Mounting of constructions of 30 30 Horizontal Vertical Along the height of
steel, ferroconcrete, and mounting
wooden (structure of Тоже
16 premises,
Place bridges,
of shipping, farms,
loading and 2 Horizontal At ground level.
storing of armature at 2 Lighting is normalized
conduction of concrete and vertical without considering
ferroconcrete works lighting facilities, set
at cranes and
machines. along the
17 Stationary welding 50 Horizontal height
At theof level
stockpiled
of
apparatuses. Mechanical working surfaces
18 scissors,
Mountingmachines for storing 30 30
of armature Horizontal Vertical At the level of ground
or working surface.
Along the height of
19 Casing, fencing 30 Horizontal production
At all levelsworks
of casing
, fencing. The same
30
20 Concreting of columns, slabs, 30 10 Horizontal On surface. the same
bridge constructions, damps
and so on The same The same

21 Belt conveyors, passing 10 10 Horizontal On conveyor surface


concrete Наклонная The same
SNT 3.01.03-06 page 91
TDS – 12.1.046-85

# Surface on which Level of surface on


Areas of construction sites and The least lightning is which lightning is
works lightning, lux normalized normalized
22 Concrete truck trestle bridge 3 Vertical On the ways of crane
(without considering
lightning devices)
23 Rubble concrete laying 10 Horizontal On the level of laying
5 vertical In plain of wall
24 Laying from large concrete 10 Horizontal At the level of laying In
blocks, natural stones, brick 10 Vertical plain of wall
laying, mounting of
foundations
25 Passages to working places 5 Horizontal On casing, areas and
(stairs, scaffold ) passages
26 Mounting and matching of 50 Horizontal On working surface
ready finishes Vertical Along the height of
50 accomplished works
27 powersaw benchs, rocking- 50 Horizontal On the level of working
type saw , wood-working surface
machines
28 Works of making floors: Horizontal On the level of floor in
installation of sandy, crushed 30 working area
stone, clay-concrete, concrete
and under layers; 50
Installation of earth, crushed The same The same
stone, gravel, wattle and daub
coverings , parquet flooring,
slabs
29 Roofing works 30 Horizontal In roofing plain
30 inclined The same
30 Works on hydro isolation and
heat insulation: On the level of working
At construction areas of 30 Horizontal area
various branches separate 30 vertical The same
details constructions, pipelines. 50 horizontal The same
31 Plaster works: in spaces 50 Horizontal On all levels of working
Under open sky Vertical surface
50 The same Тthe same
30 On all levels of working
surface
30 Horizontal The same
32 Facing of spaces with dry 100 Vertical »
plaster; coating works (with
ceramic slabs and mounting
details ); papering of walls

Page 92
Surface on which Level of surface on
№ Areas of construction sites and The least lightning is which lightning is
works lightning, lux normalized normalized
34 Glazing 75 Vertical On all levels of working
surface

35 Mounting of pipeline and 30 Vertical The same


distribution of nets to devices and
equipment; installation of
sanitary-technical devices ,
ventilators, air conditioners.
36 Installation of control-measuring 50 Vertical On devices
devices
37 Mounting of sanitary-technical 50 Horizontal On working surface
equipment and cabins for water 50 The same
supply system, heating system, Vertical
sewerage, gas pipeline.
38 Preparation to mounting and 30 Vertical On all levels of fulfilled
assembly of electric circuit works
39 Assembly of low and high voltage 100 Horizontal The same
cables, mounting of funnels and 100 vertical At mounting of electric
muff, mounting of high-voltage equipment on open
equipment and schemes of the spaces lightning must
second communication be decreased up to 50
lux
40 Installation of electric equipment, 50 Vertical Along the height of
lighting armature in premises installed equipment
under open sky 30 The same The same
41 Mounting of technological 50 Horizontal On all levels of works
equipment: 30 The same fulfillment. It is
Conveyors, bridge cranes, required extra movable
machines, bulky equipment lighting facilities.

42 Mounting of energy equipment 50 Horizontal On all levels of works


fulfillment

43 Works on shutting riverbed: 30 Horizontal On bridge closing and


bridge closing at the 50 m 10 Horizontal on surface of water
distance from highway 5 under bridge
10 The same On ground surface
vertical The same
In plain, parallel to road
axe from the side of car

SNT 3.01.03-06 page 93 ТDS-12.1.046-85


Continuation of table 1
№ Fields of construction sites and The least Surface on which Level of surface on
fields т lightning, lightning is which lightning is
44 Works of erection of tunnels, lux
30 normalized
Vertical normalized
On the level of tunnel
discharge of holes, mounting 10 100 30 Horizontal laying
of explosive net, inspection of 2 Horizontal On the surface of
mine after explosion, field of lateral walls of
ready runnel Vertical tunnel. At the level
of rail head.

Horizontal

45 Working area of pit ; drilling 2 10 10 Horizontal At the level of


works 5 vertical working area and
The same along the area
Horizontal height of bottom

46 Open storehouses: non- 2 Horizontal At ground level. At


metallic materials of shipping lighting
constructions and equipment 5 The same must be increased in
accordance with p. 5
of present table
47 Yards or scaffolding stores 55 Horizontal At ground level
Вертикальная штабелей
48 Rooms for keeping cement, 5 Horizontal At floor level
alabaster and bulky objects
49 Spaces for keeping small 10 Horizontal At floor level
technological equipment and
mounting
*provide materials
the increased level of lighting at works in afternoon up to 100 lux.
**It should be considered possibility to use movable lamps.
2.3 At projecting lighting facilities should consider reserve coefficient by table 2 at cleaning
lamps 2 times per year.
SNT 3.01.03-06 page 94 ТDS-12.1.046-85
Table 2
Lighting facilities Reserve coefficient at
Filament lamps Gas-discharging light sources of
Projectors and other lighting 1,5 накаливания
1,3 lightlight
1.7
facilities with boosting force of 1.5
lightParameters
2.4 by 5 times.ofLamps
lighting facilities of general even lighting and schemes of lighting devices’
replacement must be chosen in compliance with recommended appendix 1, required appendix and
reference appendix 3.
3. Control of illuminance level
At construction sites and places for construction and assembly works inside premise must be provided
with lightning control.

3.2Lightning measures are made in compliance with TDS-24940-81 on production fields, on


which illuminance level is defining for security conditions or quality of works. These fields
are defined at elaboration of projects for production works and checklist.
3.3At control of lightning at construction sites control points for illuminance measurement
must be marked under lighting devices and between them.
Distance between control points outside the edifice must be not more than 20 м. Selection of
devices, measurement and analyzing of results is complied with TDS-24940-81.
Lighting installation satisfies norms’ requirements, if factual lighting is normalized.
Illuminance measurement in compliance with p. 3.2 is carried out before starting works at this
field and further at changing conditions of works’ fulfillment.
Responsibility for keeping present standard falls on administration of construction
organization.

4. Protection methods
For servicing lighting facilities must be considered access to lamps compiled with
requirements of safety measures by TDS-12.2.012-75.
For lighting construction areas it is not allowed to use open gas-discharging and filament
lamps with clear bulb.
With the purpose to exclude blinding of personnel, minimal height of searchlight facilities
must be complied with required appendix 4, and direction of axe force must be shifted from
the center of working area.
Ratio of maximal lighting to horizontal plain and its minimal values on roadways must not
exceed 25:1.
Electrical lighting of construction areas must be fed from net of alternating current with 50
HZ frequency and direct current;
a)For lighting devices of general lighting with not more 220V it is admitted to use
special lighting devices of 220V.
б) for lamps of stationary local lighting, installed for occasional touches at height is 42 V;
в) for manual movable lamps – 12V.
4.6 Feeding Stress of lamps, installed in tunnels at the time of construction must be not
higher than:
а) 42V (in damp spaces -12 V) – on ready fields with concrete and ferroconcrete dressing with
diameter up to 2,5 м; 127B and 22V-on ready fields with concrete and ferroconcrete dressing
with 2,5 м diameter and more;
SNT 3.01.03-06 PAGE. 95
ТDS-12.1.046-85

б) 12 In the areas where activities on concrete and ferroconcrete finishing are carried out. .
Masts for installation of lighting devices must be provided by lightning protection earth in compliance
with approved instruction on projecting.
Search lighting masts with more than 50 m height must have light protecting facilities, performed by
not less than 2 lightning, running simultaneously. Lamps must have caps of red color.
Fire hydrants and water reservoirs, placed on the territory of construction areas must have lighting
indicators.
Not. In В dry spaces with non-current carrying floors for feeding manual movable lamps it is admitted to
apply 42V.
appendix 1
1
page 96
Parameters of lightning devices of general even lightning at normalized illuminance Е „ = 2 lux
Width of Height of Distance Installed searchlight on mast Parameters of searchlight
type number Capacity of height Inclinatio Angle
lamps, watt Н,м n of between
searchlig optic axes
ht in in of
degree,. searchlight
in degrees

Searchlights with filament lamps


100 15 70 ПЗС-35 6 500 15 15 15
150 20 100 10 20
150 300 10 12
9 18
200 275 ПЗСМ5 10 1000 30 12 20
9 18
250 30 290 13 10 15 20
17
300 250 9 13 9 10 17 15 20

Page 97
Width of Height of Distance Installed searchlight on mast Parameters of 75 searchlight
lighting area, searchlight between installation 100
а,м mast masts Ь,м type number Capacit Height Inclinatio 150
Н,м y of Н,м n of200
lamps searchlig 150
watt ht in200
degrees 250
100
150
Searchlights with DBC lamps 200
75 15 160 ПЗС-45 3 700 15 20 250
100 160 or ПСМ- 4 300
150 20 150 50 7 20 15 200
200 30 180 10 30 250
250 200 16 300
300 140 16 350
250 350
Page 98 300 200
Width of Height of Distance Installed searchlight on mast Parameters of350searchlight
250
lighting area, searchligh between installation 300
а,м t mast masts Ь,м Type number Capacit Height Inclinati200 350
Н,м y of Н,м on of 400
lamps search lig200 Not
watt . ht in250 e
degrees 300 .Pre
sent
Searchlights with lamps of type 350 tabl
150 20 240 ПСЗ-35 7 700 20 12 200 e 1
200 200 250 are
300
given for square location of lighting devices. At chessboard placement of lighting devices Н О1
for areas with up to 200m width between supports of the same row it is admitted to reduce о» ОС
by 10 %. о 1Л

Table 2 в
Page 99 Parameters of lighting devices of general even lighting at normalize
„=0,5 lux
Width of Height of Distance Installed searchlight on mast Parameters of searchlight installation
lighting searchlight between
area, а,м mast masts Ь,м Type number Capacity of Height Inclination
Н,м lamps Н,м of
watt . searchlight
in degrees

Searchlights with filament lamps


150 20 400 ПЗС-45 18 1000 20 12
200 350 or ПСМ-
250 300 50
150 30 450 30
200 410
250 390
300 330
350 300
Searchlights with halogen lamps of КГtype
100 20 450 ИСУ- 2 2000 20 14
150 400 01x2000 /
200 30 450 К-63-01 4 30 10
250 400
300 450 6
200 30 480 ИСУ- 2 5000 30 12
250 460 02x5000
300 440 /К-03-02
350 400
page 100
continuation of table 2
Width of Height of Distance Installed searchlight on mast Parameters of searchlight installation Coefficient Specific
lighting searchlight between of capacity
area, а,м mast masts Ь,м Type number Capacity of Height Inclination of Angle unevenness watt/ м2
Н,м lamps Н,м searchlight in between
watt . degrees . optic axes
of
searchlight
in degrees
Searchlights with lamps of DBC type
150 20 280 ПЗС-45 7 700 20 12 15 0,30 0,17
200 240 or ПСМ- 0,14
250 30 400 40 30 0,35 0,13
300 360 0,30 0,13
350 310 0,40 0,11
Searchlights with lamps of LHB type
150 20 375 ПЗС-45 7 700 20 12 15 0,30 0,17
200 350 or 0,14
250 300 ПСМ-40 0,35 0,13
300 250 0,30 0,13
350 30 25 30 0,40 0,11
Lamps with xenon lamps
200 30 840 ОУКсН 2 20000 30 12 0,30 0,48
250 750 10 90 0,43
300 680 0,40 0,39
350 620 0,37
200 50 1200 50 12 0,65 0,33
250 1150 10 60 0,60 0,26
300 1100 0,23
350 1050 0,21
page 101
continuation of table 2
Width of Height of Distance Installed searchlight on mast Parameters of searchlight installation Coefficient Specific
lighting searchlight between of capacity
area, а,м mast masts Ь,м Type number Capacity of Height Inclination of Angle unevenness watt/ м2
Н,м lamps Н,м searchlight in between optic
watt . degrees axes of
searchlight in
200 30 750 "Arevik" 2 10000 30 25 degrees 0,30 053
250 600 orККУ 0,54
300 400 0,25 0,66
200 50 900 50 0,60 0.45
250 800 0,48
300 650 0,42
350 550 0,41
150 30 630 СКсН 16 60 0,40 0,46
200 600 14 0,45 0,35
250 450 0,38
150 50 800 16 50 0,50 0,50
200 700 0,37
250 675 14 0,55 0,30
300 600 0,27
350 550 0,24
100 15 160 СПКс-2- 1 15 8 0,55 1,2
150 180 10000 14 0,83
200 150 2 8 0,8
250 200 0,79
300 190 0,67
PAGE 102

Width of Height of Distançe Installed searchlight on mast Parameters of searchlight installation Coefficient of Specific
lighting area searçlight bteween masts unevenness capacity
a.m masts H.m
watt/ м2

watt/ м2

Type number Capacity of Specific Inclination of Angle between


lamps capacity searchlight in 9 optic axes of
searchlight in
watt . watt/ м2 degrees degrees
Specific
capacity

200 190 1 20 8 0,45 0.7


250 20 180 10 0,55 0.5
300 170 2 8 50 0,50 0,4
350 220 10 0,50 0,5
400 20 250 3 20 8 30 0,55 0,6
450 300 4 50 0,6
500 310 0 0,65
200 320 СПКс-2- 10000 0,63
250 300 10000 2 60 0,5
300 280 30 8 0,45
350 30 270 0,40 0,43
400 260 0,38
450 220 0 0,4
500 270 0,44

Page 103
Square replacement of masts
Chessboard replacement of masts

а - spanning angle, hail.; т – angle between optic axes, а-width of lighting area, м;
Ь – distance between masts, м.
page. 104 СНТ 3.01.03-06
ТШ-12.1.046-85
Appendix 3
Reference
Methods of searchlight calculation
Calculation of searchlight is added up to definition:
Number of searchlights, needful for creation of fixed lightning ;
Installation places of searchlight masts and searchlights;
Height of searchlight installation above lightning surface;
Inclination angle of searchlights in vertical and horizontal plane.
Calculation is made on the basis of normalized lighting in horizontal plane
Approximate number of searchlights п, required to installed for creation on 5 th area lightning Ер =
КБ,, (К – reserve coefficient Ен –normalized lightning ):
тЕ pS п - — ,
Р л-
where m – coefficient, considering light return of light sources, efficiency of searchlights and coefficient of
light stream application is given in table;
Рл- capacity of lamps.
More exact defining of number of required searchlights is carried out by means of arranging of patterns
for isolux curve on the plan of lighting area or applied scheme of lighting from searchlight groups.
Approximate values of m coefficient

Type of searchlight or Width of lighting area, Value of m at calculated


Source of light lamps m lighting, lux
0,5-1,5 2,0-30,0
ЛН ПЗС.ПСМ 75-150 0,90 0,30
175-300 0,50 0,25
Halogen lamps ПКН, ИСУ 75-125 0,35 0,20
150-350 0,20 0,15
Lamps of DBC type ПЗС, ПЗМ 75-250 0,25 0,13
275-350 0,30 0,15
Lamps of ДРИ ПЗС, ПЗМ 75-150 0,30 0,10
175-350 0,16 0,06
Xenon lamp ДКсТ- ОУКсH(Н=30m) 150-175 0,75 0,50
20000 200-350 0,50 0,40
"Arevik (Н=30м) 150-175 0,90 0,70
200-250 0,70 0,50
Xenon lamp ДКсТ- СКсН (Н=20-30м) 100-150 0,55 0,45
10000 175-250 0,40 0,35
More exact defining of number of required searchlights is carried out by means of arranging of patterns
for isolux curve on the plan of lighting area or applied scheme of lighting from searchlight groups.
СНТ 3.01.03-06 page 105 ТР8-12.1.046-85
Appendix 4
Required
Minimal height of searchlight installation and searchlight lamps
Type of projector Type of lamps Minimal height of installation м, at
normalized lightning , l
0,5 1 2 3 5 10 30 50
ПСМ-50-1 Г220-1000 120 35 28 22 20 17 13 7 6
ПСМ-50-1 ДРЛ-700 52 23 19 14 13 11 8 5 4
ПСМ-50-1 ДРЛ-400 19,5 14 11 9 8 7 5 3 3
ПСМ-50-2 ПЖ220-1000 640 60 50 40 35 30 25 17 13
ПСМ-40-1 Г220-500 70 25 21 17 15 13 10 5 4
ПСМ-40-2 ПЖ220-500 280 35 35 30 25 20 15 11 9
ПСМ-30-1 Г220-200 33 18 15 11 10 9 7 4 3
ПЗР-400 ДРЛ-400 19 14 11 8 8 7 5 3 3
ПЗР-250 ДРЛ-250 11 10 8 6 6 5 4 3 3
ПЗС-45 Г220-1000 130 35 29 22 20 18 13 7 6
ПЗС-45 ДРЛ-700 30 17 14 11 10 8 6 4 3
ПЗС-45 ДРЛ-400 14 12 10 7 7 5 4 3 3
ПЗС-45 ДРИ-700 600 - 65 50 45 40 30 16 13
ПЗС-35 Г220-500 50 22 18 14 13 11 8 5 4
ПЗС-25 Г220-200 16 13 10 8 7 6 5 3 3
ПЗМ-35 Г220-500 40 20 16 12 11 10 7 4 4
ПЗМ-25 Г220-200 10 10 8 6 6 5 4 3 3
ПКН-1500-1 КГ220-1500 90 23 20 18 15 13 11 6 5
ПКН-1500-2 КГ220-1500 45 18 15 13 12 10 8 5 4
ПКН-1000-1 КГ220-1000-5 52 20 17 14 13 11 8 5 4
ПКН-1000-2 КГ220-1000-5 30 17 14 11 10 8 6 4 3
ИСУ02Х5000/К-03-02 КГ220-5000-1 200 35 30 25 22 20 17 10 8
ИСУ01х2000/К-бЗ-01 КГ220-2000-4 71 20 19 15 12 10 9 6 5
ОУКсН-50000 ДКсТ-50000 1300 70 50 45 40 35 30 30 30
ОУКсН-20000 ДКсТ-20000 650 50 42 38 33 30 20 15 10
СКсН-10000 ДКсТ-10000 165 35 30 25 22 20 15 15 15
ККУ1Х20000/Н00-01 ДКсТ-20000 120 35 28 21 25 25 25 25 25
ККУ1Х10000/Н00-01 ДКсТ-10000 105 27 23 17 15 12 8 6 6
page 106 СНТ 3.01.03-06
ТР8-12.3.002-75* (СТ СЭВ 1728-79)
УДК 389.6:658.382.3:006.354 МКС 13.100 group Т 58

Occupational safety standards system


Manufacturing processes
General safety requirements

Present standard sets general requirements to safety of production processes, as well as


construction and content of standards for group of production processes.
Standard is complied with СТ СЭВ 1728-79 in part of general regulations and safety
requirements (see reference appendix).
(changed version, chang. №1).
1. General regulations
1.1 Safety of production processes in the time of their running must be provided:
Selection of applied technological processes, as well as techniques, working regime, and
servicing order for productive equipment;
Selection of productive spaces;
Selection of productive areas (for processes, performed out of productive spaces );
Selection of materials, storing and half-finished products;
Selection of productive equipment;
Replacement of productive equipment and organization of working places;
Distribution of functions between man and equipment with the purpose to limit hardness of
job;
Selection of keeping ways and transportation of materials, storing and half-finished
products and production wastes;
Professional selection and training of people;
Application of protection facilities for working people;
Including of safety requirements into normative-technical and technological
documentation;
Selection of safety requirements and control methods;
(changed version, chang. №1).
Productive processes must be fire and explosion safe.
Productive processes must not pollute environment (air, soil, reservoirs) with harmful
emissions.
СНТ 3.01.03-06 page 107 ТР5-12.3.002-75*
2. General safety requirements
2.1 Requirements to technological processes
2.1.1 Projecting, organization and holding of technological processes must envisage:
Elimination of direct contact of working people with materials, half-finished products, ready produce,
production wastes, having harmful effect;
Change of technological processes and operations, tied with occurring of dangerous and harmful
productive factors, processes and operations at which pointed factors are absent or have less intensity;
Complex mechanization, autoimmunization, application of remote control for technological processes
and operations at occurrence of dangerous and harmful factors;
Closure of equipment;
Application of protection facilities for working people ;
Rational organization of labor and rest with the purpose to prophylactic routine work and hardness of
job;
Timely getting of information about occurrence of dangerous and harmful factors on some
technological operations;
Control system and management with technological process, providing protection of working people
and emergency switch off productive equipment;
Timely removal and neutralization of production wastes being source for dangerous and harmful
productive factors.
(changed version , chang. №1).
2.1.2 Safety requirements to technological process must be given in technological
documentation.
2.2 Requirements to productive spaces
Productive spaces must be complied with acting norms and rules, established by state building of
USSR.
Levels of dangerous and harmful productive factors in productive spaces and working places must
not exceed sizes, envisaged by norms, established in fixed order.
2.3 Requirements to productive areas
2.3.1 Productive (working, mounting) areas at which works are fulfilled out of productive spaces
must be complied with acting construction norms and rules, approved by state building and state
inspection bodies.
2.4 Requirements to source materials
2.4.1 Source materials, storing, half-finished products must not have harmful effect on working
people. At working relevant protective facilities must be used.
2.5 Requirements to productive equipment
2.5.1 Productive equipment must be complied with requirements ТБ8-12.2.003-74.
2.6 Requirements to replacement of productive equipment and organization of working
places
2.6.1 Replacement of productive equipment, communication, source materials, half-
finished products, ready produce and production wastes in productive spaces must not
create dangerous and harmful factors.
(changed version, chang. №1).
2.6.2 replacement of productive equipment and communications, being source for
dangerous and harmful factors, distance between equipment, and walls of premises and rooms
must be complied with acting norms of technological projecting, construction norms and rules,
established in fixed order.
page 108 СНТ 3.01.03-06
ТР5-12.3.002-75*
Working places should have levels and indicator of lightning established by acting norms and rules,
approved by state building of the USSR.
Organization of working places must be complied with security requirements taking into
consideration ergonomic demands, set in state standards at concrete production processes, production
equipment and working places.
(Introduced additionally , changed. №1).
2.7 Requirements for keeping and transportation of source materials, ready produce and
production wastes
2.7.1 Keeping of source materials, storing, half-finished products and production wastes
must envisage:
Application of keeping ways, excluding occurrence of dangerous and harmful productive factors ;
Application of safe devices for keeping, mechanization and automation of shipping activities.
2.7.2 At transportation of source materials, storing, half-finished products and production
wastes must envisage:
Employment of safety transport communications;
Application of transportation means, excluding occurrence of dangerous and harmful productive
factors;
Mechanization and automation of transportation.
2.8 Requirements to professional selection and knowledge checking of personnel
People, allowed to take part in productive process, must be physiologically, psycho physiologically,
psychologically prepared to this work.
Checking of health condition of personnel must be done at their admitting for work and periodically. It
is approved by ministry of healthcare of the USSR.
People, allowed to production process must have professional training, including labor safety. .
Knowledge checking of personnel must be held at their admitting to work and periodically.
2.9 Requirements to application of protection means of personnel
2.9.1 Application of protection means of personnel must provide:
Removal of dangerous and harmful factors from working area ;
Decreasing the level of harmful factors, set by sanitary norms, approved in fixed order ;
Protection of personnel from effect of dangerous and harmful factors accompanied with technology
and conditions of work;
Protection of personnel from effect of dangerous and harmful factors occurred at breaking
technological process.
3. peculiarities forconstruction standards and requirements of safety to groups of productive processes
Peculiarities for construction standards ССБТ and safety requirements to groups of productive
processes must be complied with Т05-12.0.001-74 and present standard
standards and safety requirements to groups of productive processes must have introductory part and
following chapters:
general regulations;
requirements to technological processes;
requirements to productive spaces (for processes, carried out of spaces-requirements to productive
areas );
requirements to source materials, storing and half-finished products;
СНТ 3.01.03-06 page 109
ТР8-12.3.002-75*
Requirements to replacement of productive equipment and organization of working places;
Requirements to keeping, transportation of source materials, storing, half-finished products, ready
items and production wastes;
Requirements to personnel allowed to take part in production process;
Requirements to application of protection means for personnel ;
Control methods for fulfillment of safety measures .
Standard could contain not some other chapters including abovementioned parts if they do not
reflect safety requirements of production processes of examined group .
3.3 Chapter «General regulations» must include :
List of harmful and dangerous productive factors, peculiar for processes of present group ;
Levels, admitted by sanitary norms, concentration and other parameters., peculiar to production
process of present group;
Safety measures, fixed in organizations of productive process
3.4 In chapter «Requirements to technological processes» must be given the following
requirements:
To projecting of organization and conduction of technological processes, working regime, order for
equipment service in usual exploitation conditions and emergency cases;
To control systems and technological processes .
Chapter must point out sources of dangerous and harmful factors.
In chapter “Requirements to productive spaces» must be given requirements to equipment and
keeping of productive spaces and areas, peculiar for productive processes in present group.
In chapter «Requirement to source materials, storing, and half-finished products must be considered:
Peculiarities of source materials, storing, and half-finished products which must be considered at their
employment for ensuring labor safety for personnel;
Rules for using source materials, storing, and half-finished products having harmful and dangerous
features and their application
3.7 In chapter «Requirements to replacement’ of productive equipment and organization of
working places must be considered:
Requirements to replacement of equipment, peculiar for productive processes of present group;
Instruction on communication location;
Instruction on replacement and isolation of dangerous equipment;
Instruction on replacement and procurement of working places.
3.8 In chapter «Requirements to keeping and transportation of source materials, storing, half-
finished products must consider the following requirements:
For keeping, providing labor safety of personnel;
Ways of keeping dangerous materials;
Ways of conduction of shipping activities;
Movement of vehicles in venture boundaries;
Keeping of transport means and communications.
3.9In chapter «requirements to personnel, admitted to work at production process” must contain
conditions for admitting people for participation in production processes of present group.
3.10 In chapter «requirements to application of protection facilities by personnel» must be
considered
List of required protection means;
Order and ways for employment of collective and individual protection means.
Стр. 110 ПО СНТ 3.01.03-06
ТР5-12.3.002-75*
3.11 In chapter «Control Methods for fulfillment of security measures» must be used methods for control for
dangerous and harmful factors, peculiar for productive processes in present group.
Appendix
Reference
Information data in compliance with ТО8-12.3.002-75 and СТ СЭВ 1728-79
P.P. 1,1,1.2, ТО5-12.3.002-75 complied with p..1 СТ СЭВ 1728-79
p. 2 complied with p.2.1
p. 2.4 complied with p. 2.3
p. 2.6.1 complied with p 2.5.1
p. 2.6.4 complied with p 2.5.2
p. 2.7 complied with p. 2.6
p. 2.9.1 complied with p. 2.7.2
(Introduced additionally, changed №1).

p. 111 SNT 3.01.03-06


ТDS-12.3.003-86

UDC 621.791.7:658.382.3:006.354 ISS 25.160 Group Т 58

INTERGOVERNMENTAL STANDARD

Occupational safety standards system


ELECTRIC WELDING WORKS
Safety requirements

This standard extends to electric welding operations (hereinafter - welding) in all sectors of the
national economy and establishes safety requirements while manual and mechanized arc welding of
metals, including under flux and shielding gases, electroslag and contact welding.
Standard does not extend to electric welding works performed under water, in mines, space,
vacuum, burst and laser, welding of nonmetallic materials as well as on gas and thermal arc cutting
and plasma processing of metals in plants, generating a low-temperature plasma.

1. GENERAL PROVISIONS

1.1 Welding should be carried out in accordance with the requirements of this standard, TDS-
12.1.004-85, TDS-12.1.010-76, TDS-12.3.002-75, sanitary regulations for welding, surfacing and
cutting of metals, approved by the Ministry of Health of USSR, rules of fire safety during welding
and other fire works at the facilities of the national economy, approved by the Ministry of Internal
Affairs of the USSR.
1.2 List of dangerous and harmful industrial factors, arising during welding, is given in the
reference application in accordance with TDS-12.0.003-74.
1.3 Concentrations of harmful substances in the air of working zone while performance of various
types of welding should not exceed the maximum permissible concentration (MPC) regulated by
TDS-12.1.005-88 and MPC lists approved by the Ministry of Health of USSR.
Parameters of microclimate at workplaces should comply with the requirements of sanitary norms
of microclimate of industrial premises, approved by the Ministry of Health of USSR.
(Revised version, Amendment № 1).
1.4 Levels of dangerous and harmful industrial factors in the working zone should not exceed the
set values: the noise level – according to TDS-12.1.003-83 and sanitary standards adopted by the
USSR Ministry of Health; levels of local and general vibration – according to TDS-12.1.012- 78
and sanitary standards adopted by the USSR Ministry of Health.
1.5 Electric fields of industrial frequency currents should correspond with TDS-
12.1.002-84; magnetic fields - the maximum permissible levels of magnetic fields with frequency of
50 Hz, approved by the USSR Ministry of Health; the maximum permissible levels of voltages and
currents – according to TDS-12.1.038-82; protective grounding and nulling – according to TDS-
12.1.030-81; electromagnetic radio frequency fields – according to TDS 8-12.1.006-84; levels of
ionizing radiation should not exceed the norms of radiation safety approved by the Ministry of
Health of USSR.
Signaling colors and safety signs – according to TDS-12.4.026-76.
p. 112 SNT 3.01.03-06
ТDS-12.3.003-86

2. Requirements for technological processes

2.1 Arrangement of technological processes of welding should conform to the rules of equipment of
electrical installations (REE) and provide the maximum permissible mechanization, automation,
distance control of the welding processes or its separate elements as well as should be taken the
measures on localization of dangerous and harmful production factors.
2.2 In normative and technical documentation for specific types of welding, the safety requirements
have to be fixed in accordance with this standard and reflected in the technical documentation
according to TDS-3.1120-83.
(Revised version, Amendment № 1).
2.3 Equipment, being used for welding should correspond with the requirements of TDS-12.2.003-
74, TDS-12.2.049-80; safety requirements for electrical devices in accordance with the
requirements of TDS-12.2.007.8-75, rules for equipment of electrical installations (REE), the rules
of technical maintenance of electric installations by consumers (RTM) and regulations of safety
engineering while maintenance of electric installations by consumers (RSE).
2.4 While mechanized welding, it is necessary to use stationary, portable or built-in welding
equipment the local air inlets.
(Revised version, Amendment № 1).
2.5 Welding of products of medium and small sizes in stationary conditions should be executed in
specially equipped booths, booths have to be open-top and made of noncombustible materials. A
gap should be left between the wall and floor of booths. Its height is determined by the type of
welding. The area of cab should be large enough to accommodation of the welding equipment,
table, and device of local exhaust ventilation, welded article, and tool. Free space in the cabin for
one welding station should be at least 3 m2.
2.6 While welding of products on the combined production and auto-mechanized systems, it should
be envisaged the local exhaust devices embedded in outfits of systems. It is possible to use the
welding equipment with built-in local air inlets.
2.7 It is not allowed to conduct the welding with idle local exhaust ventilation.
2.8 Welding in closed and hard-to-reach spaces should be executed according to order-allowance for
particularly hazardous work while performance of following conditions:
installation of checkpoints while observation over the electric welders;
presence of hatch (hatches) for laying of communications and evacuation of employees;
uninterrupted operation of local exhaust ventilation systems and tools, preventing the accumulation
of harmful substances in the air above the maximum permissible concentrations and oxygen content
less than 19% (by volume);
presence in welding equipment of a protective gas outage unit while turning off the voltage in the
welding circuit;
availability of voltage limiting device for manual arc welding with alternating current. Limiter in
the form of attachment should be grounded by separate conductor.
(Revised version, Amendment № 1).
2.9 Before welding of vessels, which kept in the presence of flammable liquids and harmful
substances, it should be carried out their cleaning, washing, drying, ventilation and inspection of the
absence of dangerous concentration of harmful substances in accordance with RTM and PSE
approved “Glavgosnadzor”.

___________________
* Closed spaces (rooms) are considered the spaces bounded by surfaces with hatches (manholes),
with dimensions that prevent free and fast passage through them of workers and impeding the
natural air interchange; inaccessible spaces (premises) should be considered those, where in view of
small sizes it is difficult to execute works, and natural ventilation is insufficient.
p. 113 SNT 3.01.03-06

ТDS-12.3.003-86

2.10 While welding of materials with high reflective capacity (aluminum, aluminum alloys,
titanium based alloys, stainless steel) to protect electric welders and people, working not far from
the reflected optical radiation, it should be shielded arc welding with embedded or portable screens,
and if possible to shield the surface of articles, being welded.
2.11 Safety requirements for manual arc welding
2.11.1 Stationary positions of welding should be equipped with local suctions. Volume of receding
air for standard welding table from one position should be at least 1500 m 3 / h, and the rate of
absorption at the point of welding must be not less than 0.2 m / sec.
While welding in inside of closed and hard-to-reach spaces, it is necessary to exhaust by portable
air inlets from a position not less than 150 m3 / h air,
2.11.2 Placement of position of argon - arc welding should exclude the possibility of leakage and
penetration of the protective gas to adjacent and below premises.
2.11.3 In manual welding with stick electrodes, it should be used the portable compact air inlets
with pneumatic, magnetic, and other holders.
2.11.4 While welding with thoriated electrodes, it is necessary to fulfill requirements of the basic
sanitary rules while working with radioactive substances and other ionizing radiation sources and
sanitary regulations during welding, facing and cutting of metals, approved by Ministry of Health of
USSR.
2.11.5 Admission of protective gas during welding with thoriated electrodes should be withdrawn
only after the cooling of end of the thoriated electrode, 20-30 seconds later upon completion of
welding.
2.12 Safety requirements for mechanized welding in protective gases
2.12.1 While performance of the automatic welding at the installation, which the welding head is
situated at the height of more than 1.6 m above floor level, it should be envisaged a working
platform for operator.
The platform must have nonconductive coating and protection in accordance with the requirements
of TDS-12.4.059-78.
2.12.2 It is necessary to exhaust the air with local air inlets embedded into the welding equipment:
while semiautomatic welding in CO2 for currents 250-500 A - no less than 50 m3 / h;
while welding in inert and mixtures of gases, with automatic welding in C0 2 - not less than 150 m /
h of air.
Suction rate for welding in inert gases and mixtures is not more than 0.3 m / sec, for welding in the
active gases and their mixtures, as well as for welding in the mixtures of reactive gases with inert -
no more than 0.5 m / sec.
2.12.3 Exploitation of the flasks, containers with liquefied gas and ramps should be carried out in
accordance with the rules of design and safe exploitation of vessels, operating under pressure
approved by the State Technical Supervision of the USSR.
2.13 Safety requirements for submerged arc welding
2.13.1 Submerged arc welding at stationary stations should be carried out in the presence of
equipment for mechanized flux filling in the weld pool, flux suction with storage hopper and filter
(while return of air in the room).
2.13.2 While submerged arc welding with semiautomatics, it should be used mobile or portable
devices flux suction apparatuses.
2.13.3 When removing the slag manually, the worker should be provided with appropriate personal
protection equipment.
2.14 Safety requirements for contact welding
2.14.1 While arrangement of the processes of contact welding, the machines should be equipped
with protective devices (screens), which protect employees from splashes of molten metal,
magnetic radiation and other harmful factors.
2.14.2 Location of protective devices (screens) should not limit the technological capabilities of the
machine and its operation.
2.14.3 Protective devices, being moved manually in the process of operation of the machine, should
have a mass not more than 6 kg and attachment, which does not require the use of keys and
screwdrivers.

p. 114 SNT 3.01.03-06

ТDS-12.3.003-86

2.14.4 Displacement of open-type protective devices should be done with a force not more than 40
H (4 kilogram-force).
2.14.5 While contact welding of ferrous metals with clean surfaces (except butt welding fusion), it
is allowed to execute work only with general dilution ventilation of room. The air exchange should
be taken: 5000 m * / h of air for every 75 kW -power of machines while butt welding and 600 m3 /
h of air for every 50 kW while spot and seam welding.
2.14.6 While contact welding (spot, seam, embossed, butt resistance) of non-ferrous metals, special
steels and ferrous metals with cover, it is necessary to carry out the work in the presence of local
exhaust ventilation, removing welding fumes directly from the source of its origin.
2.14.7 Fusion butt welding machines should be equipped with exhaust shelters.
2.14.8 While butt welding with melting, the volume of air, being removed from the exhaust shelter,
should provide suction velocity through the leakage at least 1 m / sec.
2.14.9 Cleaning and replacement of the electrodes in contact machines should be made in the
situation that would prevent accidental compression of the electrodes.
2.15 Safety requirements for electroslag welding
2.15.1 While electroslag welding, the process of flux delivery to the workplace, loading into the
bunkers and its filling in the weld pool should be mechanized.
2.15.2 Zone of weld pool and melting of flux should be equipped with local exhaust devices.
2.15.3 Wile execution of electroslag welding, it is necessary to ensure firm adherence of surface of
water-cooled sliders, pads and other accessories to the welding article.
2.15.4 For protection of workers from harmful factors while electroslag welding, it should be used
screens, sheds, cabins and other protective devices.
2.15.5 Management of electroslag welding installations should be carried out from control board
embedded in the installation.
While availability of more than one command unit with the same parameter from different stations,
it should be excluded the opportunity of the simultaneous implementation of management from
different positions.
2.15.6 While electroslag welding of large-sized articles with heating, the workspaces of operators
should be placed in cabins made of insulating material and equipped with air conditioning and
remote control of process.
2.15.7 Preparatory work (flux melting, pouring molten slag in the weld pool) should be performed
in accordance with the requirements for hand-casting metal with volume 5-6 l, approved in the
prescribed order.

3. REQUIREMENTS FOR SHOPFLOORS

3.1 Shopfloors for execution of electrical works should meet the requirements of building
norms and rules, sanitary standards of designing of industrial enterprises approved by the USSR
State Construction Committee and regulations for arrangement of electrical installations.
3.2 Workplaces of electric welders must be shielded with portable or stationary light-proof
fences (shields, blinds or screens) from incombustible material, which height should provide
reliability of protection.
3.3 Walls and equipment of shops (sites) of electric welding must be painted in gray, yellow
or blue colors with a diffuse (scattered) reflection of light.
3.4 The distance between the equipment, from the equipment to the wall and columns of
premises, as well as the width of aisles and driveways should conform to current building standards
for technological designing of the blank preparation shops and TDS-12.3.002-75.
3.5 The width of aisles on each side of the desktop and rack should be at least 1 m.
3.6 Floors of shopfloors for welding must be fireproof, have low thermal conductivity, a flat
non-slip surface suitable for purification as well as satisfy the sanitary-hygiene requirements in
accordance with applicable construction norms and regulations.
p. 115 SNT 3.01.03-06

ТDS-12.3.003-86

3.7 Shopfloors must be equipped with general exchange plenum-and-exhaust ventilation,


corresponding with construction norms and regulations of heating, ventilation and air conditioning.
Air exchange should be envisaged to dilute harmful substances uncaptured by local exhaust
devices up to the levels of MPC in accordance with TDS-12.1.005-88, lists of MPC, sanitary norms
and regulations adopted by the Ministry of Health and State Construction of USSR.
(Revised version, Amendment № 1).
3.8 Distribution of incoming air should be carried out in the working area or in the direction of the
working area by inclined jets.
It is possible the use of concentrated feed through regulated air distributors.
3.9 In assembly-welding shops, it should be provided the air heating combined with forced
ventilation.
Additionally if necessary, it should be used air-heating units.
3.10 While intensity of heat radiation of workers, exceeding the sanitary standards of microclimate
of shopfloors approved by the USSR Ministry of Health, it should be provided special means of
protection (shielding the source, air quench, personal protection equipment, etc.).
3.11 The natural and artificial light of welding, assembling and welding shops, sites and workplaces
should be arranged in accordance with construction norms and rules of natural and artificial lighting
approved by the USSR State Construction Committee and sectoral documents.
3.12 Lighting while performance of welding inside a closed and hard-to-reach spaces (boilers,
compartments, tanks) should be executed by exterior lighting, lamps of directional effect or local
lighting by portable hand lamps with a voltage not exceeding 12 W.
At that, this illumination of the working area should be not less than 30 lux.

4. REQUIREMENTS FOR DISLOCATION OF PRODUCTION FACILITIES


AND ARRANGEMENT OF WORKPLACES

4.1 Safety requirements for arrangement, equipment and organization of workplaces for
performance of welding operations should conform to TDS-12.2.061-81, rules for arrangement of
electrical installations and this standard.
4.2 While realization of welding works, the workplaces can be permanent and temporary, stationary
and nonstationary. Stationary workplaces are arranged in existing plants in specially equipped
rooms and open areas.
Nonstationary workplaces are arranged in the enterprises under construction or existing enterprises
(objects) for realization of construction, assembly and other temporary operations.
Access to the performance of welding works should be carried out after familiarization the technical
documentation (work execution project) and holding the instruction on the operation of equipment
and labor protection.
Connection and disconnection of the power supply of electrical equipment as well as its repair
should be carried out by electrotechnical personnel.
4.3 While realization of welding works in the same room with other works, it should be taken the
measures, excluding the effects of hazardous and harmful industrial factors on workers.
While performance of welding at different vertical levels, it should be envisaged the protection of
personnel, who work in the lower levels, from accidental fall of objects, stubs of the electrodes,
spatter of metal, etc.
4.4 Zones with the presence of dangerous occupational factor should be enclosed in accordance
with requirements of TDS, 23407-78 and TDS-12.2.062-81.
p. 116 SNT 3.01.03-06

ТDS-12.3.003-86

4.5 Spatial layout of the workplace of welder according to grouping and location of manually
actuatable control (levers, switches, etc.) and means of information display should meet the
ergonomic requirements of TDS-12.2.032-78 and TDS-12.2.033-78.
4.6 Cabin for two or more posts as well as workplaces of welders of manual and mechanized arc
welding on the flow and conveyor lines should be separated by enclosing screens that protect
welders from radiation of the arc, spray of molten metal and provide enough space for each worker.
4.7 While welding of articles with heating, the workplace must be specially equipped with screens,
shelters for the heated products or panels of radiative cooling, reducing the exposure of welder in
accordance with the requirements of sanitary standards of microclimate of shopfloors approved by
the USSR Ministry of Health.
4.8 Operator control of welding processes on combined production thread-mechanized and
conveyor lines should be combined (or place in the immediate vicinity) with control desk of load-
lifting vehicles.
4.9 Workplace on combined production system or conveyor assembly and welding line should be
equipped with a seat according to TDS-21889-76 or a seat with a back made of low-conductivity
material.
4.10 Work in enclosed or confined spaces is carried out by welder under the control of supervisor
with a qualifying group of electrical safety II and high, which should have a safety belt with a rope,
which end is kept by supervisor.
4.11 Workplaces located 1.3 m above the ground level or solid floor should be equipped with
barriers in accordance with TDS-12.4.059-78, a minimum height of 1.1 m, consisting of a handrail,
an intermediate element and the guard board with width not less than 0.15 m.
4.12 While execution of welding operations at a height of more than 5 m, it should be arranged
trestles (sites) from fireproof (nonflammable) materials in accordance with the requirements of
TDS-26887-86, TDS-27321-87 TDS-24258-88.
While absence of trestles (sites), the welders have to use safety belts and fire resistant safety
halyards with carabiners, workers have to use special bags for instruments and collection of stubs of
electrodes.
(Revised version, Amendment № 1).
4.13 Width of aisles between equipment, moving mechanisms and relocatable items as well
as stationary multioperator power sources should be not less than 1.5 m.
4.14 Passages between the stationary single-operator power supply should be 0.8 m wide.
While installation of the single-operator power supply at the wall, the distance from the wall
till source should be at least 0.5 m.
4.15 The width of aisles between contact machines should be: in location of workplaces
against each other for point and suture machines - no less than 3 m, in location of the machines with
back side to each other - no less than 1 m, in location of the machines with front and back sides to
each other - no less than 1.5 m.
4.16 Stationary workplaces while welding the metalware weighing over 15 kg should be equipped
with assembly stands and load-lifting devices in accordance with the sanitary standards approved by
Ministry of Health of USSR.
While welding small and compact (weighing up to 15 kg) products, the stationary workplaces
should be equipped with tables of welders.
4.17 (Excluded, Amendment № 1).
4.18 Stationary wall for welding of products should be equipped with rotary-lifting drafting devices
and displaceable air inlets.
4.19 While performance of electrical welding works in the terms of low temperatures (below minus
20 C), it should be provided the conditions, corresponding with the requirements of construction
norms and regulations approved by the State Construction Committee of the USSR.
p. 117 SNT 3.01.03-06

ТDS-12.3.003-86

5. REQUIREMENTS FOR SOURCE MATERIALS, BLANKS,


THEIR STORAGE AND TRANSPORTATION

5.1 Storage of source welding materials and finished products should be realized in
warehouses equipped and maintained in accordance with the requirements of building, sanitary and
fire-prevention regulations approved in the prescribed order.
5.2 While storing the welded blanks, welding materials and finished products, it should not
be any disturbances for the natural lighting, ventilation, passage, and aisle, use of fire-fighting
equipment and personal protection equipment of the workers.
5.3 Ignition and drying of wire, flux, electrodes should be made by means of equipment
specially designated for this purpose.
5.4 Operations on grinding of thoriated electrodes should be realized at grinding machines
installed in separate rooms and equipped local suction devices. Abrasive dust should be collected in
locked metal containers and moved off in the collection of solid radioactive wastes.
5.5 Degreasing of surfaces of the welded products should be executed with solutions, which
composition is allowable for use by sanitary and fire control.
5.6 While realization of the assembly - welding shops in the cold period of year, blanks and
articles, belonging to welding, should be delivered to the shop beforehand in order that by the
beginning of welding, their temperature will be lower the air temperature in the shop.
5.7 Used materials (stubs of the electrodes, slag crust, technological samples, grease wastes,
etc.) should be collected in metal container and, as a result of the accumulation, they are taken out
from sites to the places allotted on the territory of enterprise for collection and utilization.
5.8 Transportation of raw materials and finished products – according to TDS-12.3.020-80.

6. REQUIREMENTS FOR PERSONNEL, WHO ARE ALLOWED


TO PERFORM WELDING OPERATIONS

6.1 Welding operations can be performed by a person, who underwent training, instruction
and test of knowledge on safety requirements, has qualifying group on electrical safety not lower
than II and appropriate certificates.
6.2 Implementation of electroslag welding can be done by welders and assistants of welders,
who have passed additional training of technology of electroslag welding and test of knowledge on
safety requirements. Assistant of welder is not allowed for independent electroslag welding.
6.3 Workers, who underwent special medical examinations, having the steeplejacking
experience not less than one year and category of welder not lower III, are allowed to perform the
welding works at a height *.
6.4 Women can not to weld according to the list of industries, occupations and jobs with
difficult and dangerous conditions of labor, where it is not prohibited the employment of women,
approved in accordance with established procedures.
(Revised version, Amendment № 1).

7. REQUIREMENTS FOR USE OF PERSONAL


PROTECTION EQUIPMENT OF WORKERS
7.1 Worker of welding jobs must be provided with working cloth and other personal protection
equipment taking into account the conditions of work in accordance with standard sectoral norms in
the prescribed order.
(Revised version, Amendment № 1).

________________________
* At the height more than 5 m from the earth surface, floor or working deck, over which the
works are made directly from the constructions, when the primary means, protecting from a fall
from a height, is a safety belt.
p. 118 SNT 3.01.03-06

ТDS-12.3.003-86

7.2 Prophylactic treatment of personal protection equipment of workers – according to


normative - technical documentation.
(Revised version, Amendment № 1).
7.3 For protection acoustic organs, it should be used for personal protection equipment
according to TDS-12.4.051-78.
7.4 In the case of impossibility to ensure the maximum permissible concentrations of harmful
substances in the air of working area by means of mechanization of the process and local
exhaust ventilation, the workers should be provided with personal protection equipment in
accordance with the classification according to TDS-12.4.034-85.
For protection from dust, it should be used the respirators of ShB-1 “Lepestokl-5”, “Lepestok-
40”, “Lepestok-200” as well as “Astra-2”, “Kama-200”, “Snezhok – K”, “Snezhok – P”,
“Snezhok - GP – B” types.
7.5 For protection of head from the mechanical effects and electric shock, it should be applied
the safety helmets according to TDS-12.4.128-83.
7.6 For hand protection, the workers should be provided with gauntlets according to TDS-
12.4.010-75, while welding in inert gases and contact welding – with gloves of Tr type
according to normative and technical documentation.
7.7 While performance of welding operations in the terms of increased risk of electric shock
(welding in containers, compartments, etc.), the workers should be provided with galoshes –
according to TDS-13385-78, rugs – according to TDS-4997-75, gloves of En and Ev types
according to normative and technical documentation.
7.8 While working with machinery and equipment that create vibration, it is necessary to use
personal protective equipment against vibration by TDS-12.4.002-74.

8. METHODS OF CONTROL OF SECURITY REQUIREMENTS IMPLEMENTATION

8.1 Control of air state in work zone – according to TDS-12.1.005-88.


(Revised version, Amendment № 1).
8.2 Check the state of air environment is carried out by determining the concentration of
harmful substances in the breathing zone (under flap) of worker as well as in the air of
shopfloors.
8.3 Definition of harmful substances is carried out in accordance with the
methodological guidelines for definition of harmful substances in welding aerosol (solid phase
and gas) approved by the Ministry of Health of USSR.
Control of the temperature of working surfaces, microclimatic conditions and level of
infrared radiation should be conducted in accordance with methods approved by the USSR
Ministry of Health.
8.4 Methods of noise measuring in the workplace – according to TDS-12.1.050-86 and TDS-
01.12.2003 5-81.
8.5 Methods of measurement of the local vibration – according to TDS-12.1.042-84. The
method of measuring vibration at workplaces in shopfloors – according to TDS-12.1.043-84
and methodological indications for conduction measurements and hygienic evaluation of
industrial vibrations approved by the Ministry of Health of USSR.
8.6 Dosimetry control while work with thoriated electrodes is carried out in accordance with the
basic sanitary standards of work with radioactive substances and other sources of ionizing
radiations approved by the Ministry of Health of USSR.
(Revised version, Amendment № 1).
8.7 Method of control over electric fields of industrial frequency on the workplace – according
to TDS-12.1.002-84; density of magnetic fields - in accordance with the maximum permissible
levels of magnetic fields approved by Ministry of Health of USSR.
8.8 Control of ventilation systems by aerodynamic tests in welding workshops should be
conducted in accordance with the TDS-12.3.018-79 and rules on sanitary and hygiene control
systems of ventilation of industrial premises approved by the Ministry of Health of USSR.
8.9 Control of lighting in the workplaces should be conducted in accordance with sanitary
norms and rules of natural and artificial lighting approved by the USSR State Construction
Committee, and requirements on realization of preventive and routine sanitary supervision over
artificial lighting in industrial enterprises approved by the USSR Ministry of Health.

p. 119 SNT 3.01.03-06

ТР8-12.3.003-86

Measuring methods of lighting – according to TDS-24940-81.


8.10 Control over the state of electrical equipment and its safe operation is conducted in
accordance with TDS-12.1.019-79 and EMP, RTM and PSE approved by Main State Energy
Supervision of USSR.
8.11 Fire safety control – according to TDS-12.1.004-85, fire safety substances and
materials – according to TDS-12.1.044-84.
Appendix
Reference
List of dangerous and harmful industrial factors

Harmful and Types of welding and surfacing

Electroslag
dangerous industrial Manual Arc under Arc in protective gases Contact welding
factors in the zone arc flux

automatic

butt-seam
without heating

without heating
semiautomatic
automatic

semiautomatic

spot
seam
heating or multi-

with heating

semiautomatic with

projection
of worker’s stay
article or multi-pass

pass automatic with


with heating of

heating

1. Physical factors
1.1 Movable
machines and - - + + + - - + + + + + + + +
mechanisms,
portable articles,
1.2 Increased
dustiness and gas + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
contamination of air
in working zoneHigh
1.3
temperature of 4- + + - + + + + + - + + + + +
surfaces of
equipment,
1.4 materials
High air
temperature of - + - - + + + + + + + - - - -
working zone
1.5 Heightened
noise level on work - - - - - - - - - - - + + + +
place
1.6 Dangerous
voltage level in
electric circuit, + + + - - + + + + - - + + + +
which shorting can
be through human
body
p. 120 SNT 3.01.03-06
ТDS-12.3.003-86

Continuation of the
Types of welding and
Manual Arc under Arc in protective Contact welding
flux

with heating of article

semiautomatic

semiautomatic

spot
seam
without heating

without heating
with heating

projection
heating or multi-pass
automatic

automatic

butt-seam
semiautomatic with

Electroslag
Harmful and
dangerous industrial

automatic with
or multi-pass
factors in the zone of

heating
worker’s stay

1.7 Heightened level


electromagnetic + + + + + + + + + + - + + + +

1.8 Heightened + + - - - + + + + + + - - + -
of light
1.9 Heightened level
ultraviolet radiation + + - - - + + + + + + - - - -

1.10 Heightened level


infrared radiation - + - - + + + + + + + - - + -

2. Chemical factors
(welding aerosols) + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
3 Psychological
. + + . - + + + + . . + + . .
3.1 Physical overload
3.2 Neuropsychic
overload + + + + + + + + + + + - - - -
Legend :
+ presence of factor;
- absence of factor
p. 121 SNT 3.01.03-06

ТР8-12.3.009-76*

UDC 658.382.3:006.354 ISS 13.100 Group Т


58

INTERGOVERNMENTAL STANDARD

Occupational safety standards system


LOADING AND UNLOADING WORKS
Safety requirements

This standard establishes general requirements of safety while realization of loading


and unloading works in all sectors of national economy.
The standard is fully correspond with ST SEV 3518-81.
(Revised version, Amendment № 1).

1. GENERAL PROVISIONS

1.1 Loading and unloading works should be carried out in accordance with the
requirements of TDS-12.3.002-75 of this standard and state standards for certain types of
manufacturing processes that take into account peculiarities of work performance.
(Revised version, Amendment № 1).
1.2 (Excluded, Amendment № 1).
1.3 Loading and unloading works should be carried out using mechanized method by
means of materials-handling equipment and small machines. While lifting and moving the
loads by hand, it is necessary to observe norms established by current legislation.
1.4 Industrial safety of materials-handling equipment should be provided:
with selection of realization methods of operations, material-handling equipment and
production tooling;
with preparation and arrangement of places for work;
with application of workers’ protection;
execution of medical examination of persons, who are allowed to work, and their training.
1.4 (Introduced extra, Edit. № 1).

2. REQUIREMENTS FOR LOADING AND


UNLOADING WORK PROCESSES

2.1 Choice of methods for work should include the prevention or reduction to the level of
acceptable norms of impact on workers of dangerous and harmful production factors by:
mechanization and automation of loading and unloading works;
application of devices and appliances that meet safety requirements;
exploitation of production equipment in accordance with the present, normative and
technical documentation and operational documents;
p. 122 SNT 3.01.03-06

ТDS-12.3.009-76*

use of sign and other types of signaling when you move the cargo handling equipment;
correct deployment and stowage of cargo in the working places and in vehicles;
observation of requirements for protected zones of electricity transmission, units of
engineering communications and power supply.
(Revised version, Amendment № 1).
2.2-2.4. (Excluded, Amendment № 1).
2.5 While materials handling by carrying and lifting equipment, it is not allowed the
presence of workers on load and in the zone of its possible fall.
After completion and during the break between works, the load, handling devices and tools
(shovel, bucket, frame, electromagnet, etc.) should not remain in the raised position.
Handling of materials over the premises and vehicles, where there are people, is not
allowed.
(Revised version, Amendment № 1).
2.6 Goods, being placed near the rail and crane tracks, should be located in accordance
with the requirements of TDS-9238-73 and normative and technical documentation
approved by the State Technical Supervision of the USSR.
2.7 Goods (except ballast discharged for track work) at the height of their placing, starting
from the rail head up to 1.2 m should be on the verge outside of the head of closest to the
cargo of rail of railway or crane runway at a distance of not less than 2.0 m and at higher
height - at least 2.5 m.
(Revised version, Amendment № 1).
2.8 Slinging of loads should be carried out in accordance with “Rules of the device and
safe operation of loading cranes" approved by the State Technical Supervision of the
USSR.
Slinging of bulky goods (steel, reinforced concrete structures, etc.) should be executed for
special devices, slinging units or designated places, depending on the position of center of
gravity and cargo weight.
Slinging places, the center of gravity and cargo weight should be designated by the
manufacturer of products or shipper.
2.9 Before lifting and moving the loads, it should be checked load stability and accuracy of
their slinging.
2.10 Methods of stowage and fastening of cargoes, it should be ensured their stability
during transportation and storage, unloading of vehicles and disassembling of the stacks as
well as possibility of mechanized loading and unloading. Maneuvering of vehicles with
goods after removing the fixing from goods is not allowed.
(Revised version, Amendment № 1).
2.11 Stacks of bulk cargo should have steep slopes, corresponding with angle of friction
slope for goods of this type or should be shielded with strong retaining walls.
2.12 (Excluded, Amendment № 1).
2.13 While realization of the loading and unloading works with use of machines of
uninterrupted transportation:
Stowage of cargo should provide uniform unloading of the working body and sustainable
position of goods;
conveying and removal of cargo from a working unit of the machine should be carried out
by means of special conveying and receiving devices.
2.14 (Excluded, Amendment № 1).
2.15 While performance of works with packaged cargoes, it should be used containers,
packaging means as well as specialized load gripping devices, excluding the fall of cargo.
2.16 Roofs of containers, device for slinging and fastening to the vehicles must be cleared
of extraneous objects, ice and snow.
2.15-2.16. (Revised version, Amendment № 1).
2.17 (Excluded, Amendment № 1).
p. 123 SNT 3.01.03-06

ТDS-12.3.009-76*

2.18 While loading (unloading) of metals by electromagnetic and grab grippers, the zone of
lifting and handling should be fenced.
(Revised version, Amendment № 1).
2.19 (Excluded, Amendment № 1).
2.20 On the places of loading and unloading of timbers, it should be provided attachments,
excluding the falling-out of timbers.
2.21 Load and unloading of bulk cargo should be realized by mechanized method that
excludes the air pollution of work area.
(Revised version, Amendment № 1).
2.22 While unloading of bulk cargoes from the gondola cars, the hatches must be opened
with special devices that allow the workers to be at a safe distance.
While unloading of bulk cargoes from the gondola cars on the elevated tracks, located at
the height of more than 2.5 m, hatches should be opened with special shunts.
2.23 While liquidation of hang-up of bulk cargo in containers, it is not allowed for workers
to be in it.
(Revised version, Amendment № 1).
2.24 (Excluded, Amendment № 1).
2.25 While unloading of bulk cargo from vehicles, trucks, true to the embankments, as well
as filling ditches and trenches with soil, dump trucks should be set in the distance not less
than 1 m from the edge of natural slope.
(Revised version, Amendment № 1).
2.26 Loading and unloading works and movement of hazardous cargo (according to TDS-
19433-81) should be made:
in accordance with the requirements of labor safety; contained in documentation approved
in fixed procedure;
in specially allotted areas with data on grade of risk according to TDS-19433-81 and
instructions of freight forwarder on observance of safety measures.
2.27 It is not allowed to carry out loading and unloading operations with dangerous goods
while disclosure of discrepancy packaging to requirements of normative and technical
documentation approved in prescribed order, defect of packaging as well as while absence
of marking and warning notices on it.
After completion of works with dangerous goods, the place of realized works, conveying
equipment, handling devices and personal protection equipment should be subjected to
sanitary treatment depending on the properties of goods.
2.28 While emergence of dangerous and harmful production factors as a result of impact of
meteorological conditions on the physico-chemical condition of cargo, loading and
unloading works should be stopped or taken the measures on creation of safe working
conditions.
2.27-2.28. (Revised version, Amendment № 1).
2.29 (Excluded, Amendment № 1).
2.30 It is possible to load and unload the animals, raw materials and livestock products only
in the presence of data on type of goods and in accordance with the requirements of TDS-
12.1.008-76. Before start of works, the cargo must be inspected by bodies of veterinary
supervision.
2.31 Loading, unloading and replacement of goods that require quarantine treatment,
should be realized in specially allotted sites, corresponding with sanitary requirements of
the Ministry of Health of the USSR.
2.32 After realization of loading and unloading works with animals, raw materials and
products of animal origin, the places of work, transport vehicles, load-grappling devices,
livestock and personal protection equipment should be subjected to disinfection.
(Revised version, Amendment № 1).
2.33 Before loading and unloading works, it should be installed the order of
exchanging signals between person, who gives signals (slingers) and engineer of handling
machinery.
(Excluded, Amendment № 1).
p. 124 SNT 3.01.03-06

ТDS-12.3.009-76*

3. REQUIREMENTS FOR SITES OF REALIZATION OF LOADING


AND UNLOADING WORKS

3.1 Places of loading and unloading operations’ realization should have a base that
provides stability of materials handling equipment, stored materials and vehicles.
3.2 Selection of sites for loading and unloading works, placement on them of the buildings
(structures) and their separation from the residential development by sanitary protection
zones should comply with requirements of construction norms and regulations approved by
the State Construction Committee of the USSR, sanitary standards approved by the USSR
Ministry of Health, and other normative and technical documentation.
3.3 On the sites for stowage of cargo, it should be marked the boundaries of piles,
gangways and passages between them. It is not allowed to place goods in the aisles and
driveways.
The width of driveways should ensure the safety of vehicles’ traffic and material handling
equipment.
3.4 Places for loading and unloading operations, including aisles and driveways should
have adequate natural and artificial lighting in accordance with construction norms and
rules approved by the USSR State Construction Committee.
Lighting should be uniform, without the glare of lights to workers. Types of lighting
devises should be chosen depending on environmental conditions, properties and nature of
the processed goods.
3.1-3.4. (Revised version, Amendment № 1).
3.5 (Excluded, Amendment № 1).
3.6 Workers, who took part in loading and unloading works, should be provided with
sanitary facilities and safe drinking water.
3.7 Sites for realization of loading and unloading operations have to comply with fire
safety requirements according to TDS-12.1.004-76 as well as construction standards and
rules adopted by the USSR State Construction Committee, and fire safety regulations
approved by or coordinated with the Ministry of Internal Affairs of the USSR.
3.8 Outdoor air temperature and wind force in the climatic area in which should stop the
execution of works in the open air or arrange breaks for heating of the workers, is
established by the administration of the enterprise in accordance with existing legislation.
3.9 Places for loading and unloading operations should be equipped with necessary means
of collective protection and safety signs according to TDS-12.4.026-76.
3.10 Traffic of vehicles in the sites for realization of loading and unloading operations
should be arranged according to transport-technological scheme with the installation of
appropriate road signs according to TDS-10807-78 as well as signs assumed for rail, water
and air transport.
3.11 Temperature, humidity and speed of air flow in the working area of industrial
premises as well as content of harmful substances in the sites for realization of loading and
unloading works – according to TDS-12.1.005-76; level of noise and vibration in the
workplace – according to TDS-12.1.003-76 and TDS-12.1.012-78.
3.12 For crossing by workers of bulk cargo, having greater fluidity and ability of suction, it
is necessary to set traps or decks with railings all the way of moving.
3.13 Truck tables, ramps, overpasses and other structures should be equipped with
permanent or removable fender devices.
3.14 Aisles and workplaces should be leveled and have no holes, ruts. In winter, the
passages should be cleaned of snow, and in case of icing, should be sprinkled with sand,
slag or other anti-skid materials.
3.15 To pass (lift) in the workplace, it should be provided walkways, stairs, bridges,
ladders, corresponding with safety requirements.
3.9-3.15. (Introduced additionally, Edit. № 1).
p. 125 SNT 3.01.03-06

ТР8-12.3.009-76*

4. REQUIREMENTS FOR USE OF HANDLING EQUIPMENT

4.1 Handling equipment, being used during the loading and unloading works should
comply with TDS-12.2.003-74, arrangement rules and safe operation of cranes of State
Technical Supervision of the USSR as well as the safety requirements outlined in standards
and technical conditions for equipment specific type.
(Revised version, Amendment № 1).
4.2 Installation, registration, testing and technical certification of handling equipment and
load-grappling devices should be realized in accordance with the rules of design and safe
operation of cranes approved by the State Technical Supervision of the USSR, and other
normative and technical documents approved in a prescribed order.
4.3 Is not allowed to work on load-lifting machine (crane, crane type loader) with wind
speed that exceeds the value specified in the passport of machines as well as in snowfall,
fog, rain, reducing visibility within the working zone.
It is not allowed to work on load-lifting machine if local air temperature is below the value
specified in the passport of machines.
(Revised version, Amendment № 1).
4.4 Handling equipment, vehicles while implementation of loading and unloading works
should be in a position that prevents their inadvertent movement.
4.5 Removable load-grappling devices (slings, traverses, etc.) before launching for work
should be subjected to full technical inspection.
4.6 Handling equipment should lift the cargo, which weight together with load-grappling
devices does not exceed the allowable load capacity of this equipment.
It is not allowed lifting loads of unknown mass as well as restrained, frozen or hooked.
4.5-4.6. (Introduced additionally, Edit. № 1).

5. REQUIREMENTS FOR PERSONNEL, WHO ARE PERMITTED


TO REALIZE LOADING AND UNLOADING WORKS

5.1 The operation of handling equipment should be realized by persons not younger than 18
years old, who underwent a medical examination in the order prescribed by Ministry of
Health of the USSR, labor safety training in accordance with TDS-12.0.004-79 and have
the right to manage this equipment.
(Revised version, Amendment № 1).
5.2 workers employed in loading and unloading operations should undergo preliminary and
periodic inspections in accordance with the requirements of the Ministry of Health of the
USSR.
Workers employed in loading and unloading of animals and raw materials of animal origin
should be provided with vaccination in accordance with the requirements of the Ministry of
Health of the USSR.
5.3 Engineering and technical personnel, who are responsible for realization of safe loading
and unloading works, should undergo the test of knowledge for technological process,
requirements of labor safety, design and safe operation of materials handling equipment,
fire safety and health regulations in accordance with their duties and in the order prescribed
by state oversight agencies.
5.4 Implementation of loading and unloading operations should be carried out by persons,
who had completed training and underwent the test of knowledge for labor safety in
accordance with TDS-12.0.004-79 as well as rendering first aid.
Workers, who were allowed to realize the loading (unloading) of hazardous and extremely
dangerous cargo, should undergo special training of labor safety with subsequent
certificate.
While realization of loading and unloading works with dangerous goods, the current
instruction should be conducted before starting the work.
p. 126 SNT 3.01.03-06

ТDS-12.3.009-76*

The instruction program should include the information about the properties of dangerous
goods, rules of working with them, measures to render first before-doctor aid.
(Revised version, Amendment № 1).

6. REQUIREMENTS FOR USE OF PERSONAL


PROTECTION EQUIPMENT OF WORKERS

6.1 Working cloth, footwear and other personal protection equipment should correspond
with TDS-12.4.011-75.
(Revised version, Amendment № 1).
6.2 Working cloth depending on the category of processed goods should be subjected to
washing, dry cleaning, decontamination and other forms of sanitization in accordance with
existing norms approved in the prescribed order.
6.3 While receiving working cloth, footwear and other personal protection equipment, the
workers should be instructed on procedure of use of these means and familiarized with
requirements for care for them.
(Revised version, Amendment № 1).
6.4 If there is any danger of falling the subjects from above, the worker should wear
protective helmets of fixed samples in the site of realization of loading and unloading
works.
6.5 (Excluded, Amendment № 1).
6.6 While realization of loading and unloading operations, it should be used personal
protection equipment depending on the type of cargo and the conditions of work.
6.7 personal protection equipment should comply with ST SEV 1086-78 and standards
CMEA for means of specific types.
6.6-6.7. (Introduced extra, Edit. № 1).
p. 127 SNT 3.01.03-06

ТDS-12 3 016-87

UDC 69:658.382.3:006.354 ISS 13.100 Group Т 58

INTERGOVERNMENTAL STANDARD

Occupational safety standards system


ANTICORROSIVE PROTECTIVE WORKS
Safety requirements

This standard applies to anticorrosive works for protection of equipment, building


structures and edifices (hereinafter - the protected sites) at under construction, existing and
reconstructing enterprises in the terms of bases, workshops and on-site production facilities
at all stages of the technological process (surface preparation, training materials and
preparation of compositions, applying anticorrosive coating, storage and transportation of
raw materials).

1. GENERAL PROVISIONS

1.1 Anticorrosive works should be carried out in accordance with the requirements of this
standard TDS-12.3.002-75, SNIP III-4-80, normative documents approved by the Ministry
of Health of the USSR, State Technical Supervision of the USSR, Ministry of Energy of the
USSR, Ministry of Internal Affairs of the USSR and State Committee of the USSR for
hydrometeorology and environmental control.
1.2 Dangerous and harmful industrial factors should be eliminated or reduced to
permissible levels in accordance with current standards:
temperature, humidity, content of harmful substances in the air of working area according
to TDS-12.1.005-76;
noise-according to TDS-12.1 .003-83;
vibration – according to TDS-12.1.012-78;
ultrasound – according to TDS-12.1.001-83;
charges of static electricity – according to TDS- 8-12.1 018-86;
illumination – according to TDS- 12.1.046-85;
harmful substances – according to TDS-12.1.007-76.
1.3 Requirements for fire safety – according to TDS-12.1.004-85, explosion safety –
according to TDS-12.1.010-76.
1.4 While arrangement and realization of anticorrosive works, it should be envisage the
physiologically-based modes of labor and rest in accordance with the requirements of the
construction organization project and work production project.
1.5 Wastes while realization of anticorrosive should not pollute the production premises
and environment.
2. REQUIREMENTS FOR TECHNOLOGICAL PROCESSES
2.1 General requirements
2.1.1 Anticorrosive works should be carried out according to projects of work performance
with maximum use of mechanization.
p. 128 SNT 3.01.03-06

ТDS-12.3.016-87

2.1.2 While any violations of the technological process, shutdown of ventilation or changing of the
way the worker feels, the works should be immediately stopped, and workers have to leave the
working area.
2.1.3 While realization of works in closed volumes (closed devices, closed metal and concrete tanks,
wells, basements, ventilation tunnels) with fire and dangerously explosive fumes and harmful
substances during working shift, it should be provided periodically for employees the breaks with
the exit from the work zone, which duration is determined in the prescribed order.
2.1.4 While performance of anticorrosive works in high-risk working conditions, the employees
should have tolerance order according to SNIP III-4-80.
2.1.5 It is not allowed to work without personal protection equipment installed by TDS-12.4.011-75.
2.2 Requirements while working with fire- and explosion-hazardous materials
2.2.1 While realization of works, it is necessary to fulfill the requirements of "Rules of fire safety in
construction works.
2.2.2 Equipment and accessories for performance anticorrosive works, control and regulating
devices, lighting and ventilation equipment (hereinafter - production equipment), electrical drives
and motor-starting devices should be in explosion-proof performance. Placement and connection of
the equipment should be carried out according to "Regulations for Electrical Installations".
Production equipment, tools and working cloth should be in performance, excluding discharges of
static electricity and spark formation, according to TDS-12.1.018-86.
2.2.3 Concentration of fire - and explosion-hazardous volatile substances should not exceed the
maximum permissible explosive concentrations (MPEC) according to TDS-12.1.004-85 and should
be provided with positive supply and exhaust ventilation.
2.2.4 In the places of work performance and their surrounding areas in a radius of 25 meters all over
the open height, it is not allowed:
to carry out any combined works, causing spark formation, fire, or dust;
to smoke, make a fire;
to carry matches, lighters as well as metal objects that could cause a spark;
to work in shoes with steel nails on the soles;
to heat the shopfloors and protected objects with electrical appliances not in an explosive
performance;
to come persons, who are not directly involved in realization of these works.
Zones should be identified with safety signs according to TDS-12.4.026-76.
Apertures and openings above and under premises, where fire- and explosion-hazardous operations
are carried out as well as channels, openings, pipelines, etc. from adjacent rooms should be closed
hermetically.
2.2.5 While necessity of conduction of combined operations in closed spaces with a diameter or size
of sides more than 25 m, except bulk reservoirs, it should be worked out the arrangements,
excluding the occurrence of fires and explosions. It is necessary to form a tolerance order for
realization of such works.
Combined works should be done no closer than 25 meters from the fence the working zone.
2.2.6 Hourly amount of works with fire- and explosion-hazardous substances should not exceed the
shift need specified in the project of work production.
2.2.7 For inspection of the protected object, the entry of people into the work zone before starting
operation or during breaks between shifts are allowed on the terms of:
not exceeding the maximum permissible concentrations of harmful substances (MPC);
on ventilation systems;
availability of tolerance order.
During breaks in the work in accordance with item 2.1.3, ventilation systems are not allowed to turn
off.
2.3 Requirements while working with toxic and irritating substances
It is not allowed to keep and eat food, store and clean clothes in the places of realization of works
with toxic and irritating substances.
p. 129 SNT 3.01.03-06

ТDS-12.3.016-87

2.4 Requirements for preparation of surface


2.4.1 Abrasive tools should be used according to TDS-12.3.028 82.
2.4.2 Preparation and use of rust modifiers – according to TDS-10678-76.
2.4.3 While carrying out abrasive-jet cleaning, the work zone should be fenced, precluding
spread of dust.
2.4.4 Works on application of rust modifiers should be made according to “Rules and norms
of technical safety, fire safety and industrial hygiene for paint shops" approved by Council
of Trade Unions in 1977.
2.5 Requirements for preparing anticorrosive compositions and preparation of raw
materials
2.5.1 While arrangement of production equipment in the work zone, it should be envisaged
the activities, providing the observation of the requirements of items 2.2 and 2.3.
2.5.2 While preparation hot compositions for filling the boilers, it is allowed no more than
¾ of their volume. Filler loaded into the boiler should have moisture content no higher than
normative.
Preparation of sulfur composition in the boilers should be made on a sand bath.
2.5.3 When pouring the liquid components from the barrels, it should be applied special
devices and appliances (hand pumps, tippers, etc.).
2.6 Requirements for application of anticorrosive coatings
2.6.1 While applying metallic coatings, it should observe the requirement of TDS-12.3.008-
75.
2.6.2 Vulcanization of the rubberized coat in apparatuses should be done only after the
complete removal of solvent steams out of them.
2.6.3 While vulcanization of coats on lead steam pipes, it should be established the
controlling and regulating valves and pressure relief valve.
2.6.4 Pressure relief and removal of air-steam mixture and condensate after vulcanization
completion under pressure should be carried out by means of valves designed for it.
2.6.5 While open vulcanization, it is necessary to envisage the measures that exclude
contact of employees with steam and hot water.
2.6.6 Falsework removal from under the bearing component of anticorrosive protection as
well as transfer of load on them should be done after attainment of strength of materials
envisaged in the working drawings.

3. REQUIREMENTS FOR TEMPORAL PRODUCTION SHOPFLOORS,


PLATFORMS AND PROTECTED OBJECTS

3.1 Protected objects should be provided with emergency lighting in explosion-proof


performance.
3.2 Industrial premises, places (areas), production sites should be equipped with fire-
extinguishing means according to TDS-12.4.009-83.
3.3 While realization of works with use of fire- and explosion-hazardous substances, the
floors of temporary production facilities should be covered with decks from wooden
planks, rubber mats and other materials that prevent spark formation.
3.4 Protected objects should be grounded according to TDS 8-12.1.030-81 and "Rules for
electrical installations" approved by the Ministry of Energy of the USSR.
3.5 Metal apparatuses, belonging vulcanization with closed method, being used as a steam
receivers, should conform to “Rules for design and safe operation of vessels, operating
under pressure" approved by the State Technical Supervision of the USSR.
3.6 While realization of works with use of fire- and explosion-hazardous substances, the
production facilities and protected objects should have openings (doors, hatches, manholes,
caps removed, gas input holes, etc.), which open outward to provide entry and exit of
people.
For transfer of materials, laying of temporary ventilation systems, current distributors, etc.,
it should be used the technological holes, and while their absence or insufficient amount -
the additional openings in accordance with the draft of work realization.
3.7 The minimum linear size of the openings is 0.8 m. The maximum height of lower edge
of one of the openings from the inner surface of floor (bottom) is 0.8 m.
p. 130 SNT 3.01.03-06
ТDS-12.3.016-87

3.8 For supply of openings for safe entry and exit of employees, it should be equipped with
platforms and ladders according to TDS-12.2.012 -75.
3.9 Number of openings and their back-to-back position should be established proceeding
from the dimensions and designs of the protected object.
3.9.1 Protected objects in diameter or size of sides up to 2.0 m and at a height of up to 2.0
m should have a removable cover or overlap.
3.9.2 Protected objects in diameter or size if side from 2.0 up to 6.0 m at a height of 6.0 m
should have a removable lid and a hole in the bottom or not less than two openings in the
absence of a removable lid.
3.9.3 Protected Objects in diameter or side dimensions from 6.0 to 8.0 m at a height of 12.0
m should have openings, which number is determined by one hole to each 4 m height of
the protected object surface.
3.9.4 At the height and diameter or size of sides, more additional number of openings
should be determined by project of work production according to the designs of scaffolds
as well as the number of simultaneously working at one opening for three employees, but
at least two openings in the lower tier or in the top (ceiling) of underground protected
facilities.
Distance between openings, which are on the same spot, should be no less than ¼ part of
the perimeter or length of the circle.
3.10 In the protected facilities without gangway (canals, tunnels), the anticorrosive works
should be done before installation of technological pipelines and installation of the floor
slabs, but after the completion of works on installation of fire automatics system.
Anticorrosive operations in channel pipes with a depth of 1.5 meters should be realized
with ratio of depth to width not more than 1.7.
Apparatuses with diameter up to 1.0 m should have connectors for every 2.0 m in length;
side-bars with welded bottoms should have a length not more than 1.0 m
Gas flues, air ducts, pipes (hereinafter - gas flues) with diameter or size of sides up to 1.0
m should be mounted from prefabricated sections, which length is determined depending
on the type of anticorrosive coat, but not more than 2.0 m.
Gas flues with diameter more than 1.0 m should have openings no smaller than 0.8 m over
every 10-12 m. in length.
Anticorrosive protection of inclined and vertical flues with diameters from 1.0 to 2.0 m
should be performed prior to assembly; each section, being mounted, should have hatch
with diameter not less than 0.8 m (taking into account the thickness of protection), situated
at a distance of 0.6 m from its butt.
3.11 Performing of anticorrosive works in protected facilities that do not meet the stated
requirements should be implemented according to specially designed project of work
production agreed with the agencies of the sanitary-epidemiological service, technical
labor inspection or fire control authorities and other specialized services in the prescribed
order.

4. REQUIREMENTS FOR RAW MATERIALS

4.1 All supplied materials should have analytical passport with indication of the presence
of harmful substances, parameters, characterizing the explosion and fire safety, terms and
conditions of storage, recommended method of application, method and rules of safe
performance of anticorrosive works.
4.2 For all works on preparation of anticorrosive compositions and application should be
technological instructions and instructions on fire safety measures approved in the
prescribed order.
While preparation of anticorrosive compositions, it is not allowed to change the order of
introduction of components, envisaged by the standards and technical conditions for
materials of specific type.
4.3 Use of materials, having no technological instructions, is not allowed.
p. 131 SNT 3.01.03-06

ТDS-12.3.016-87

Application of materials not included in "List of polymer materials and articles permitted
for use in construction" approved by the Ministry of Health of the USSR, is not allowed.

5. REQUIREMENTS FOR PRODUCTION EQUIPMENT

5.1 Production equipment should comply with requirements of TDS-12.2.003-74,


requirements of production categories in accordance with SNIP 2.09.02-85 and class of
explosive risk according to "Rules for Electrical Installations".
5.2 Production equipment, which is regulated by “Rules of design and safe exploitation of
vessels, operating under pressure”, should be operated and maintained in accordance with
the requirements of this document, and lifting machines and mechanisms - in accordance
with the “Rules of design and safe operation of load-lifting cranes and elevators”.
5.3 While use of boilers for preparation of hot compositions, it should be envisaged the
measures to secure their safe installation.
5.4 In design of the nozzle of apparatus for abrasive-jet cleaning, it is necessary to provide
a device for remote on and off the compressed air flow.
While absence of such device, the service of installation should be carried out by two
workers, who have a permanent contact with each other (sound, light, by means of signal
cable, etc.).

6. REQUIREMENTS FOR PLACEMEN OF PRODUCTION EQUIPMENT


AND ARRANGEMENT OF WORKPLACES

6.1 Employed machinery, hand tools, inventory scaffolds, guard device should correspond
with TDS-12.4.059-78 and TDS-12.2.012-75.
6.2 Equipment and arrangement of workplaces – according to TDS-12.2.061-81.
6.3 Operations in closes spaces should be realized with running supply and exhaust
ventilation.
Man on duty should be outside the entrance in closed space. Constant communication
(sound, light, with the signal cable, etc.) should be maintained between employees,
working inside the closed space, and man on duty.
6.4 Driveways, passages to the workplaces – according to SNIP III-4-80.
6.5 Signal colors and safety signs – according to TDS-12.4.026-76.
6.6 Sanitation service should be realized in accordance with CH 276-74 and taking into
account the groups of industrial processes on sanitary characteristics.

7. REQUIREMENTS FOR STORAGE AND TRANSPORTATION OF


RAW MATERIALS

7.1 Storage of materials at the facility should be done in the places envisaged by work
production project.
7.2 In the premises for storage of flammable substances, it should be envisaged the steam
or water heating.
7.3 Highly explosive and harmful substances should be stored and transported in
containers, which exclude the possibility of their strait, spillage, evaporation and dusting.
7.4 While exploitation of industrial containers, it should be observed the requirements of
TDS-12.3.010 82.
7.5 Flammable and highly substances and compositions should be stored in containers that
are labeled according to TDS-14192-77, danger signs – according to TDS-19433-81.
Corks and covers of containers should be opened by instrument made of nonferrous metal.
p. 132 SNT 3.01.03-06
ТDS-12.3.016-87

7.6 Storage of empty container from flammable and highly explosive substances
and preparations as well as their cleaning should be done in specially allotted and fenced
areas agreed with the fire prevention of the construction object.
It is not allowed to leave empty container in the work zone.
7.7 Highly inflammable substances should be stored in the working area in the
minimum necessary quantities, but no more than a replacement rule.
7.8 Transportation of flammable and highly explosive substances should be realized
in accordance with the requirements “Instructions on order of dangerous goods
transportation by motor transport” № 370-1980 approved by the Ministry of Internal
Affairs of the USSR.
Transports should be equipped with fire-extinguishing means according to TDS-
12.4.009-83.
7.9 Loading and unloading works should be carried out by the mechanized method
according to TDS-12.3.009-76.
7.10 While using artificial lighting in the places of loading and unloading, the
lighting fixtures should correspond with “Regulations for Electrical Installations”.
7.11 Cleaning material used in the work should be put in metal boxes with tight-
closing covers and utilized opportunely.

8. REQUIREMENTS FOR PERSONNEL

8.1 Realization of anticorrosive works is permitted to persons, who are not younger
18 years old and underwent:
- preliminary medical examination in accordance with the order of the Ministry of
Health of the USSR dated from July 19, 1984 № 700;
-training of labor safety – according to TDS-12.0.004-79, industrial hygiene, fire
and electrical safety;
-professional training.
8.2 In accordance with SNIP III-4-80, the officials of the construction and erection
organization are responsible for observance of technical safety standards while work
production.
8.3 Leadership of the construction and erection organization, which realizes
anticorrosive works, is charged in advance to notify in written form the general contractor
about beginning of these operations (for development in accordance with “Provision on the
relationship of organizations - general contractors with subcontracted organizations”
arrangements, providing safe working conditions at the object) and prepare the tolerance
order to their production.
8.4 While realization of anticorrosive works at existing enterprises, it is necessary
to work out and approve the measures on labor safety in agreement with the leadership of
these enterprises.

9. REQUIREMENTS FOR USE OF PERSONAL


PROTECTION EQUIPMENT OF WORKERS

9.1 The personal protection equipment (PPE) use by employees:


type of safety goggles – according to TDS-12.4.013-85;
type of protective clothing – according to TDS-12.4.013-83;
type of personal protective means of respiratory organs – according to TDS-
12.4.034-85;
type of dermatological protective equipment – according to TDS-12.4.068-79.
9.2 While abrasive-jet cleaning and application of metallized coating for respiratory
organs’ protection, it should be used PPE with forced air supply.
9.3 While performance of metallized coatings, the protection of the organ of
hearing – according to TDS-12.4.051-78.
9.4 Selection of PPE should be realized taking into account specific production
factors and in accordance with “Assortment of working cloth, footwear and other PPE
recommended for employees and officers, who are engaged in construction, construction
and repair works until 1985-1986 and next years” agreed with the CC of workers' trade
union of construction and building materials industry and “Soyuzglavspetsodezhda” at the
USSR State Procurement.
9.5 Persons, who have no PPE that corresponds with the nature of production
processes, are not allowed to work.
p. 133 SNT 3.01.03-06
ТDS-12.3.016-87

9.6 Working clothes should be subjected to dust removal and washing in accordance with
instructions for use.

10. ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS FOR PRODUCTION


PROCESSES AT EXISTING VENTURES
10.1 Anticorrosive works should be done according to the production work project executed
in accordance with the working drawings of anticorrosive protection as well as technical
conclusion on the state and carrying capacity of the main structures of facilities, being
reconstructed and repaired.
10.2 While full or partial stop of the enterprise, stop of separate workshops and productions
(or without their stop), it should be fulfilled the following conditions:
to ensure complete neutralization of the restored surface;
to disconnect from protected object the nets of water, heat, gas, electricity supplies, sewage
systems, technological pipes;
to use full-time lift-and-carry systems in the case of correspondence of operating conditions
with requirements of the work production project;
to use full-time ventilation system in the case of conformity of its technological parameters
with requirements of the work production project.
While impossibility of use of full-time ventilation system at the time of work production, it
should be turned off and identify with warning signs of safety;
the place air release from the ventilation system should be determined according to the work
production project;
before beginning the works, to make an act of tolerance with indication of activities,
providing safety of works;
to perform works in accordance with the schedule of combined operations, which defines the
sequence and order of execution of anticorrosive works of the department.
10.3 It is necessary to work out the activities and plan of strengthening the fire safety for the
period of realization of works on reconstruction.

11. METHODS OF CONTROL OF SECURITY REQUIREMENTS OBSERVATION

11.1 Control over observation of highly explosive and fire safety in the work area should be
carried out according to TDS-12.1.010-76 and TDS-12.1.004-85.
11.2 Control over the content of harmful substances in the air of work zone should be carried
out according to the danger class according to TDS-12.1.007-76 and TDS-12.1.005-76.
11.3 Control over lighting the working area should be conducted according to TDS-24940-81
and TDS-12.1.046-85.
11.4 Air of work zone and places of maximum accumulation of and harmful substances in the
protected facility should be controlled by automatic means of measurements of uninterrupted
operation.
11.4.1 Concentration of flammable and highly explosive substances should be controlled by
gas detectors. Issuance of a signal "DANGER" must be done while reaching 10% of the value
of the lower explosive limit.
11.4.2 The concentration of harmful substances should be monitored by gas analyzers.
Issuance of a signal "KONTSENTRATION" is made while reaching of harmful substances
the MPC.
While absence of commercial means of measurements, it should be used laboratory methods
for analysis of air quality at the construction site.
11.5 Gas analyzers and gas detectors should undergo the state tests in accordance with the
requirements of TDS-8.001-80 or be certified in accordance with TDS-8.326-78.
Gas analyzers and gas detectors should be subject to state examination according to TDS-
8.002-86.
11.6 Control over state of electrical equipment and its safe operation should be provided by
the administration of the construction and erection organization in accordance with the
requirements of “Rules of safety engineering and electrical installations of consumers” and
“Rules of technical operation of electric installations of consumers” and “Regulations for
electrical installations” approved by the Ministry of Energy of the USSR.
p. 134 SNT 3.01.03-06

ТР8-12.3.016-87

11.7 Controlling the safe operation of equipment registered by agencies of


“Gosgortehnadzor” of the USSR should be realized in accordance with the requirements of
“Rules of installation and safe exploitation of vessels, operating under pressure” approved
by “Gosgortechnadzor” of the USSR.
11.8 It is necessary to establish the procedure for control of quality indicators of personal
protection equipment in accordance with the requirements of relevant standards.
p. 135 SNT 3.01.03-06
ТDS-12.3.032-84*
(ST SEV 4032-83)

UDC 69: 658.382.3:006.354 ISS 13.100 Group Т 58

INTERGOVERNMENTAL STANDARD

Occupational safety standards system


ELECTRIC INSTALLATION WORKS
General safety requirements

This standard applies to electric installation works while assembling of electric


installations.
The standard does not apply to electric installations works, being performed under water, in
pits and mines.
The standard fully corresponds with ST SEV 4032-83.
(Revised version, Amendment № 1).

1. GENERAL PROVISIONS

1.1 Employees should be protected from effect of hazardous and harmful production factors
according to TDS-12.0.003-74, arising while conduction of electric installation works.
1.2 While assembling of electrical installations, it is necessary to observe the requirements
of ST SEV 3230-81, TDS-12.1.004-76, TDS 3-12.1.013-78, TDS-12.1.019-79, TDS-
12.1.030-81, TDS -12.1.038-82, TDS-12.2.012-75, TDS-12.3 ,003-75, TDS-12.3.009-76 as
well as construction norms and rules of production and acceptance of work (safety
engineering in construction) approved by the State Construction of the USSR.
1.1-1.2 (Revised version, Amendment № 1).
1.3 (Excluded, Amendment № 1).
1.4 While electric installation works, it is not permitted to use electrical installations or
their parts not taken into operation in due order.
1.5 To combine electric installation works with other operations, including those carried out
simultaneously with several organizations, is permitted only in presence and observation of
the schedule of combined work realization, providing general measures on safety
engineering.
(Revised version, Amendment № 1).
1.6 Staff, which is carrying out the electric installation works, should not perform works
relating to the exploitation of electric installations.
1.7 In the process of assembling of electrical installations, it is necessary to comply with the
rules of fire safety in construction and erection work production and fire safety regulations
during welding and other fire works at the facilities of the national economy approved by
the Directorate General of Fire Protection of Ministry of Internal Affairs of the USSR.
(Revised version, Amendment № 1).
1.8 Safety requirements while execution of electric installation works should be included in
normative and technological documentation.
(Introduced extra, Edit. № 1).
p. 136 SNT 3.01.03-06

ТDS-12.3.032-84*

2. REQUIREMENTS FOR TECHNOLOGICAL PROCESSES

2.1 General requirements for technological processes of realization of electric installation


works – according to TDS-12.3.002-75.
2.2 Electric installation works should be started only after execution of measures on safety
engineering.
Performance and control of these activities are carried out by authorized representative of
the general contractor or subcontracted organization.
2.3 Electric installation works in existing electrical installations should be performed after
stress relief from all live parts in the zone of work production, from current part of
electrical installation, providing visible breaks of the electric circuit and grounding of
disconnected live parts.
The area, where the electrical installation works are carried out, should be separated from
existing electrical parts in such a way as to prevent the possibility of access of workers to
live parts, which are under pressure.
(Revised version, Amendment № 1).
2.4 (Excluded, Amendment № 1).
2.4a. Before starting the electric installation works at operating enterprise (shop, site), the
responsible representatives of this enterprise (customer) and general contractor with
participation of subcontracted organizations should prepare an act-tolerance.
Act-tolerance determines the allocation of site for realization of electric installation works
as well as and establishes organizational and technical measures, providing the safety of
these works, including passage of electrical installation personnel and mechanisms.
Implementation of technical activities envisaged by act-tolerance is provided by enterprise.
(Introduced extra, Edit. № 1).
2.5 For increase the safety of electric installation works, it should be envisaged:
preliminary installation of electrical equipment by larger blocks and their subsequent
recovery with a view to reduce the volume of work at height;
assembly of facilities with maximum use of comprehensive and large-block factory-made
electrical devices;
primary assembly of harnesses and units at assembly and procurement section;
introduction of technological lines for pre-preparation of materials and electrical
appliances;
mechanization of works;
container kitting of facilities;
reduction of electric operations.
(Revised version, Amendment № 1).
2.6 Sequence of realization of the electric installation works should be observed in the way
that the previous operation was not the source of dangerous and harmful production factors
for execution of next ones.
(Revised version, Amendment № 1).

3. REQUIREMENTS FOR INDUSTRIAL PREMISES,


FACILITIES, PLATFORMS AND PLOTS

3.1 Electric installation works at construction sites should be carried out after acceptance
on act of readiness of premises or their parts of buildings, territories or areas under
assembly of electrical installations.
3.2 Prior to electric installation works, the building woods and scaffolds should be
removed, except ones that provide effective and safe realization of works; territory,
premises, cable channels - cleared of construction debris; manholes, pits, openings,
trenches and cable channels - closed or fenced; open cable channels should have passages
with handrails.
3.3 Dangerous zones, where the electric installation works are carried out, should be
fenced, marked by placards, signs of safety according to TDS-12.4.026-76 and inscriptions
or provided with signaling means. Fences – according to TDS-12.4.059-78 and TDS-
23407-78.

p. 137 SNT 3.01.03-06


ТDS-12.3.032-84* 5.1
Metro
3.4 All workplaces in the dark period of time should be illuminated. logica
3.1 - 3.4 (Revised version, Amendment № 1). l
3.5 During the assembly, it is not allowed to block up the passages with assura
materials, unused machinery and equipment. nce of
(Introduced extra, Edit. № 1) contr
3a. Requirements for personnel ol of
3a.1 Persons, who are permitted to electric installations works, should undergo securi
preliminary and periodic medical examinations in the terms set by Ministry of ty
Health of the USSR. requir
3a.2 Persons, who are permitted to the work on equipment with electric drives, ement
should have qualifying group on electrical safety, rules of technical operation of s –
electric drives approved by Main State Energy Supervision. accor
Confirmation of qualifying group should be held annually with the record in ding
knowledge examination journal on safety engineering. to
3a.3 Persons, who are engaged in electric installation works, must undergo TDS-
training on labor safety in accordance with TDS-12.0.004-79 and re-instruction 12.0.0
at least once every three months. 05-
Item 3a. (Introduced extra, Edit. №1). 84.
Item
4. REQUIREMENTS FOR APPLICATION OF PROTECTION 5.
MEANS OF WORKERS (Intro
duced
4.1 Security facilities, being used to prevent or reduce the effect of dangerous extra,
and harmful of production factors, occurring during electric installation works, Edit.
should correspond with TDS-12.4.011-75 and standards of SSBT for concrete № 1)
safety facilities.
(Revised version, Amendment № 1).
4.2 Personal protection equipment should correspond with type of electric
installation works, conditions of their realization, machinery, mechanism,
instruments, devices and materials
4.3 Persons, who are engaged in electric installation at the plant, should be
provided with personal protection equipment in accordance with sectoral
standards approved in due course.
(Introduced extra, Edit. № 1)

5. MONITORING THE IMPLEMENTATION OF SAFETY


REQUIREMENTS
p. 138 SNT 3.01.03-06

ТDS-12.3.033-84

UDC 69: 69.057.7:658.382:006.354 ISS 13.100 Group Т 58

INTERGOVERNMENTAL STANDARD

Occupational safety standards system


CONSTRUCTING MASHINES
General requirements of safety

The standard establishes general safety requirements while exploitation (use, maintenance,
current repairs, transportation, storage) of construction machinery * (hereinafter - the
machines) in all sectors of national economy.

1. GENERAL PROVISIONS

1.1 While exploitation of the machines, it should be fulfilled the requirements, ensuring the
prevention or reduction of impacts on the following operating dangerous and harmful
production factors:
driving machines, their working bodies and parts as well as products structures and
materials, being moved by machines;
sloughing soils and rocks;
destroying structures of machines;
increased gas pollution, dustiness and humidity of air in the work zone;
heightened value of voltage in an electrical circuit, which shorting may occur through the
human body;
location of workplace at a considerable height relative to the surface of ground (floor);
heightened or reduced air temperature in the workplace;
heightened wind speed in the zone of machine;
heightened level of vibration in the workplace;
heightened level of noise in the work zone;
insufficient visibility of working area from the cab of operator;
physical and neuropsychic overloading of drivers.
1.2 Safety of exploitation process of the machines should be provided with:
use of the machines in accordance with the work production project (cut-maps), which
contains solutions on selection of type of machines and places of their installation and (or)
scheme of movement of machines, taking into account special conditions of the machines’
operation near power lines, cavity, on application of containing signal devices to restrict
the access of workers in a dangerous zone of machines, use of communications equipment
for harmonizing the actions of driver with workers as well as other measures to prevent the
impacts on workers of dangerous and harmful production factors indicated in item 1.1 by
the organization, conducting the work;
_____________________
* List of constructing machines while exploitation of which should be taken into account
the requirements of this standard given in Reference Appendix 1.
p. 139 SNT 3.01.03-06

ТDS-12.3.033-84

maintaining the serviceable condition of machine in accordance with operational and repair
documentation by organization, which is on its balance, and while giving the machines for
temporary use - by organization that defines with contract for drive;
training of workers in labor safety in accordance with the requirements of TDS-12.0.004
-79;
application of personal protection equipment by workers.
1.3 Management, maintenance and repair of machines are allowed to perform to persons,
who underwent the training according to TDS-12.0.004-79 and have a right to perform
works, corresponding with their qualifications.
1.4 While exploitation of machines, it should be guided by TDS-25646-83, TDS-12.1.013-
78, this standard, standards for technological processes with use of machines, safety
regulations in operation of electric installations of consumers and rules of technical
operation of electric installations of consumers approved by Main State Energy Supervision
as well as requirements of operational and repair documentation on prevention of effects of
dangerous and harmful production factors on workers indicated in items 1.1.
1.5 Explanations of terms, being used in this standard, are given in the reference Appendix
2.

2. SAFETY REQUIREMENTS WHILE EMPLOYMENT OF MACHINES

2.1 The machines in serviceable condition are allowed to use. The list of failures and
limiting states, which prohibits the operation of machines, is determined by the operational
documentation.
2.2 While selection of the types of machines for work production, it is necessary that the
technical characteristics of machine with parameters of the technological process and
conditions of work.
2.3 Employment of machines should be carried out if local air temperature, wind speed and
humidity correspond with the values indicated in the operational documentation for
machine.
2.4 Prior to works with employment of machines, it is necessary to determine the work
zone of machine, boundaries of the dangerous zone, and communication facilities of
operator with workers, who maintain machine, with drivers of other vehicles.
2.5 While using the machines, it should be provided the visibility of work zone area from
the workplace of driver. In this case, when the driver, who manages the machine, has no
sufficient review or doesn’t see the worker (specially appointed signalman), who gives him
the signals, it is necessary to establish two-way radio or phone communication between the
operator and worker (signalman).
2.6 Work zone of machine at night should be illuminated. Standards of illumination in
accordance with the rules for designing electric lighting of construction sites approved by
the State Construction Committee of the USSR.
2.7 While employment of machines in the regimes established by the operational
documentation, levels of noise, vibration, dustiness, gas contamination should not exceed
the values established by TDS-12.1.003-83, TDS-12.1.012-78, TDS-12.0.005-76 .
2.8 Employment of machines in the protected zones of electricity transmission in
accordance with TDS-12.1.013-78.
Installation and operation of mobile cranes near power lines should be realized in
accordance with the rules of design and safe exploitation of load-lifting cranes approved by
the State Technical Supervision of the USSR.
2.9 While implementation of blasting, the machines should be removed to a safe place from
explosion area for distance determined by the work production project and safety
requirements while blasting approved by “Gosgortehnadzor” of the USSR.
Workers should be removed from the machines in special shelters.
2.10 While necessity of use of machines in extreme conditions (cut of soil at slope, clearing
of debris), it should be employed machines fitted with protective equipment, preventing the
impact on workers of dangerous production factors that arise in indicated conditions.
p. 140 SNT 3.01.03-06

ТDS-12.3.033-84

3. SAFETY REQUIREMENTS FOR TECHNICAL MAINTENANCE


AND OPERATING REPAIR OF MACHINES
3.1 Safety requirements for technical maintenance and operation repair of construction
machinery - in accordance with item 1.4.
While repair and technical maintenance of basic cars of construction machinery, the safety
requirements according to TDS-12.3.017-79.
3.2 Technical maintenance and operating repair of machines should be conducted in well-
equipped premises or sites. For realization of technical maintenance and repair in the terms
of operation, the machine must be derived off from the work area.
3.3 Acceptable levels of noise in the workplace – according to TDS-12.1.003-83, allowable
vibration levels – according to TDS-12.1.012-78, air of working zone – according to TDS-
12.1.005-76.
3.4 Fire safety in the workplace should be provided in accordance with TDS-12.1.004-76
and fire safety regulations for industrial enterprises approved by the Directorate General
Fire Protection of the Ministry of Interior of the USSR.
Fueling of machines should be made by the closed method in specially designated areas.
Lubricating, paint-and-lacquer and flammable materials should be stored separately from
each other in specially equipped storage rooms or areas.
3.5 Workplaces while technical maintenance and operating repair of machines should be
equipped with a set of serviceable hand tools (instrument), appliances, stock, load-lifting
machines and firefighting equipment.
3.6 Technical maintenance and operating repair of machines should be undertaken only
after stopping machines, turn on engine (drive) in exception of the possibility of accidental
activation of the engine, spontaneous movement of machine and its parts, relief of the
pressure in the hydraulic and pneumatic systems, except the cases, which are permitted by
the operational and repair documentation.
Using with open fire for heating aggregates and units are not allowed.
3.7 Parts of machines, moving under the effect of its own weight while technical
maintenance and repair, should be locked mechanically or dropped on bearing in order to
avoid their spontaneous movement.
3.8 While technical maintenance of machines with electric drive, it should be taken
measures that not allow accidental supply of voltage to equipment under repair. Electric
fuse of safety devices in circuit of supply of current collectors should be removed, starting
devices are locked and posted restrictive signs of safety with an explaining inscription
“don’t turn on- people are working”.

4. SECURITY REQUIREMENTS WHILE TRANSPORTATION


AND STORAGE OF MACHINES

4.1 Transportation of cars by rail, water and air transport should be realized in accordance
with the regulations for the transport of indicated brands.
While moving machines in their own, in tow or vehicles on the roads of general purpose, it
should be observed the highway regulations approved by the Ministry of Internal Affairs of
the USSR.
While transportation of machines through natural obstacles or artificial structures as well as
in conditions not covered by the operational documentation, it should be worked out a
work production project, containing the technical and organizational solutions for the safe
transportation of machine.
4.2 In preparing the machines for transport or extended storage, it is necessary:
to execute the moving assembly units in process of assembling and disassembling of
machinery with the use of load-lifting devices fitted with load-grappling appliances that
ensure the sustainability of the moving goods;
to conduct the cleaning, washing of machines and applying protective coatings with
mandatory use of personal protection equipment, applying flame-proof technical
detergents.
p. 141 SNT 3.01.03-06

ТDS-12.3.033-84

4.3 While storing, the machine should be placed on the pads, used pads (stops), excluding
its spontaneous movement, the riggings should be dropped until stops, as well as it should
be performed other activities envisaged by the operational and repair documentation.
4.4 While storing the machines in inter-shift time, arrangement of short-term (from ten
days up to 2 months) and long-term storage (more than 2 months), it should be envisaged
the measures, providing fire safety of machine

5. REQUIREMENTS FOR APPLICATION OF PROTECTION


EQUIPMENT OF WORKERS

5.1 Employees should be provided with personal protection equipment given them in
accordance with the norms approved in the prescribed order.
Collective protection equipment installed in the machine should meet the design
documentation for the machine.

6. METHODS OF SAFETY REQUIREMENTS CONTROL

6.1 Control over technical condition of construction machinery should be carried out in
accordance with TDS-25646-83.
6.2 Control over training of employees in safety regulations while work production should
be conducted in the order prescribed by TDS-12.0.004-79 and construction standards and
regulations on technical safety in construction.
6.3 Control of vibration characteristics of machines – according to TDS-12.1.012-78.
6.4 Control of noise characteristics of machines – according to TDS-12.1.023-80 or TDS-
12.4.095-80 depending on the type of machine.
6.5 Control of fire safety requirements – according to TDS-12.1.004-76.
6.6 Control of concentration of harmful substances and parameters of air microclimate of
working area – according to TDS-12.1.005-76.
6.7 Control of electrical safety requirements – according to TDS-12.1.013-78.
p. 142 SNT 3.01.03-06

ТDS-12.3.033-84

Appendix 1
Reference

List of construction machines while which exploitation it should be taken into


account the requirements of this standard

Single-bucket excavators
Chain-bucket excavators
Excavator-leveler
Bulldozers
Scrapers
Motor graders
Elevating graders
Set of machines for rapid construction of roads
Crane-boring machines
Horizontal drilling machines
Bucket loaders
Concrete pump s
High-discharge mixers
Autoconcrete pumps
Automobile cranes
Cranes on special motor-type chassis
Rubber-tire cranes
Short-base cranes
Caterpillar cranes
Cranes on tractors
Gantry cranes
Tower cranes
Jib tracker cranes
Freight and freight-passenger elevators
Construction hoists
Pipelaying cranes
Auto- hydraulic rams
Motor towers
Road-building material distributors
Asphalt mixers
Asphalt pavers
Pavement rollers
Equipment for pile works
Rammers

Appendix 2
Reference

Explanation of terms used in this standard

Work zone of machine - the space, where the movement of machine and its operating
element in the work process is carried out.
Dangerous zone of machine - the space within which dangerous and harmful production
factors, arising in the exploitation process of construction machines permanently act or can
potentially act.
p. 143 SNT 3.01.03-06

ТDS-12.3.035-84

UDC 667.64:658.38.2.3:006.354 ISS 13.100 Group Т 58

INTERGOVERNMENTAL STANDARD

System of labor safety standards. Construction


PAINTING
Safety requirements

This standard establishes safety requirements to prevent the impacts of hazardous and
harmful production factors in the process of preparation and performance of painting while
construction, expansion, reconstruction and technical re-equipment of enterprises,
buildings and structures.

1. GENERAL PROVISIONS

1.1 Arrangement and technology of painting should be safe for workers at all stages of
production process: preparation of painting materials, surface preparation for painting,
staining, and comply with the requirements of this standard, TDS-12.1.007-76, TDS-
12.3.002-75 TDS-12.1.010-76 SNIP III-4-80, SNIP III-21-73, Fire Safety Regulations
while realization of building and assembly works approved by Interior Ministry of the
USSR, as well as Sanitary norms and regulations approved by the Ministry of Health of the
USSR.
1.2 While realization of the painting, it should be taken into account the possibility of
origin of the following dangerous and harmful production factors:
increased pollution of air, cutaneous covering, working clothes with chemical compounds,
aerosols and dust;
heightened labor difficulty;
heightened level of noise, vibration;
increased or reduced temperature, humidity and air mobility;
heightened level of static electricity;
fire and explosive risk;
unguarded (unprotected) movable elements of painting equipment;
insufficient lighting in the workplaces.
1.3 Concentration of combustible gases, vapors and (or) suspensions in air of working zone
should not exceed values according to TDS-12.1.004-76.
Content of harmful substances in the air of working zone and microclimate parameters
should not exceed the norms established by TDS-12.1.005-76.
Hygienic and fire and explosive risk characteristics of chemical substances most often used
in painting are given in the reference appendix.
1.4 Levels of noise and vibration in the workplace created by machines and mechanisms
should not exceed the norms established by TDS-12.1.003-83 and TDS-12.1.012-78.
1.5 Lighting of workplaces should correspond with the requirements of CH 81-80.
p. 144 SNT 3.01.03-06

ТDS-12.3.035-84

2. REQUIREMENTS FOR TECHNOLOGICAL PROCESSES

2.1 In technological processes while preparing painting compositions and performance of


painting, it should be applied the means of mechanization, providing energy consumption
of workers within the limits set by TDS-12.1.005-76 for works of medium difficulty.
2.2 While realization of technological operations, it should be excluded the direct contact
of workers with hazardous components of painting compositions.
2.3 It is necessary to prepare painting compositions in specially designed specifically
premises equipped with forced ventilation.
2.4 While mechanized painting of ventilating premises, the content of lead pigments in the
paint composition should not exceed one percent.
2.5 While execution of all works on preparation and application of paint compositions,
including import, it should be observed the requirements of instructions of the
manufacturing enterprise in item of labor safety.
2.6 While realization of painting in dangerous zones, it should be issued admission order
for work production in the procedure prescribed by SNIP III-4-80.

3. Requirements for premises

3.1 Premises, where paining is carried out, should have natural or forced ventilation,
providing the observance of requirements of item 1.3.
3.2 In the places of application of paint compositions, forming explosive vapors, electrical
wiring and electrical equipment should be kept switched off or made in explosion-proof
performance. Work with use of fire in these areas is not allowed.
At the entrance to the premises, it should be posted warning labels and safety signs
according to TDS-12.4.026-76.
3.3 Equipment for heating the premises in drying the surfaces should comply with fire
safety norms whole production of construction works and SNIP III-4-80.
3.4 Dangerous zones, appearing while performance of painting, should be guarded in
accordance with the requirements of TDS-23407-78 and TDS-12.4.059-78 with safety
signs according to TDS-12.4.026-76.
3.5 Openings in the walls and floors should be closed with temporary inventory deck or
have a fence, in accordance with TDS-12.4.059-78.

4. REQUIREMENTS FOR PAINTING COMPOSITIONS

4.1 All batches of delivering initial components and finished paint compositions
formulations, including import, should have analytical passport with indication of the
presence of harmful substances, parameters, characterizing the fire and explosion risk,
terms and conditions of storage, recommended method of application, way and regulation
of safety production of painting, recommendations on collective and individual protection.
4.2 It is not allowed the use benzene, chlorinated hydrocarbons, and methanol in paint
compositions.
4.3 Paint compositions should be delivered to workplaces as ready for consumption.
5. REQUIREMENTS FOR PRODUCTION EQUIPMENT

5.1 Equipment, being used for painting, should comply with TDS-12.2.003-74 and TDS-
12.2.049-80.
5.2 Equipment in the process of exploitation of which the harmful substances must be
equipped with local suction devices.
5.3 Performing paint work must be necessary and serviceable means of mechanization,
tools, inventory stage, as well as the protective device and protective devices in accordance
with the requirements of TDS-12.4.059 78, TDS-12.2.012-75.
p. 145 SNT 3.01.03-06

ТDS-12.3.035-84

5.4 Electrical safety of machines and equipment shall correspond with the requirements of
TDS-12.1.013-78, TDS-12.1.019-79 and TDS-12.2.007.0-75.
5.5 Industrial equipment, which can accumulate static electricity, should be grounded in
accordance with the requirements of TDS-12.1.018-79.

6. REQUIREMENTS FOR STORAGE AND TRANSPORTATION OF


MATERIALS IN THE CONSTRUCTION SITE

6.1 Storage and transportation of paint compositions should correspond with TDS-9980-80
and Rules of fire safety in realization of construction and installation works.
6.2 Paint compositions, sealants and solvents should be kept in closed ventilated fire- and
explosion-safe rooms.
6.3 Container, which has paint compositions, should be shatterproof, faultless and tightly
closed. The container should have the name of material, batch number, date of manufacture,
name of the manufacturing enterprise, method of safe storage, transportation, application
and storage life. Vessels, containing harmful and highly explosive substances should have
warning coloration in accordance with the requirements of TDS-12.4.026-76. Weight
(gross) of vessel, being delivered to the construction site should not exceed 15 kg.
6.4 In premises, where materials, emitting highly explosive and flammable vapors, are
stored, it is not allowed the use of fire as well as actions that cause the spark formation.
Electrical equipment should be of explosion-proof design.
6.5 Openings in metal containers shall be closed by cocks. To take out or unscrew the corks
is allowed by instrument made of a material that does not cause the sparking.
6.6 Empty containers (drums, cans) should be stored in specially designated areas.
6.7 Components of paint compositions, which are mutually reactive with release of harmful
substances, should be transported and stored separately.
6.8 Quantity of paint composition and solvent, being placed at the workplace, should be no
more than for one shift.
6.9 During transportation and storage of paint compositions, it should be observed the
requirements of standards for their concrete types except this item.

7. REQUIREMENTS FOR EMPLOYEES

7.1 Painting is allowed to carry out by workers, who were trained in general and special
labor safety issues and have the appropriate certificate as well as underwent medical
examination.
Periodicity of instruction at workplaces and knowledge test for safety should be observed
according to TDS-12.0.004-79 and SNIP III-4-80, and medical examinations - in the order
prescribed by the Ministry of Health of the USSR.

8. REQUIREMENTS FOR USE OF PERSONAL PROTECTION


EQUIPMENT OF WORKERS

8.1 Employees should be provided with personal protection equipment in accordance with
“Model sectoral standards of free distribution of working cloth, footwear and other personal
protection equipment to workers and employees, who are engaged in construction,
construction and erection, installation and repair works and “Regulations on procedure for
providing the employees and office workers with working clothes, footwear and other
personal protection equipment approved by State Labor Committee of the USSR and
Presidium of VSSPS.
8.2 Personal protection equipment should be applied taking into account the working
conditions in accordance with the instructions of the manufacturing enterprises.
p. 146 SNT 3.01.03-06

ТDS-12.3.035-84

8.3 Workers, who have received the personal protection equipment, should be instructed on
procedure of use and care of them.
8.4 At the construction site, it should be provided the means for rendering the first medical
aid and conditions for execution of the requirements of personal hygiene.
Each team should have a person, who is trained for rendering the first aid and first aid kit
completed with necessary medicaments and bandaging materials.

9. CONTROL OF IMPLEMENTATION OF THE LABOR SAFETY


REQUIREMENTS

9.1 Control of requirements to prevent the impacts of dangerous industrial factors should
be carried out by engineering and technical personnel and specialists of technical safety
services of construction organizations and industrial harmful factors - by sanitary-
epidemiological stations.
9.2 Control of the content of harmful substances in the air of working zone should be
conducted in accordance with the requirements of TDS-12.1.005-76, TDS-12.1.016-79 and
TDS-12.1.007-76.
Content of harmful substances in the air of working area should be determined according
to TDS-12.1.014-79.
Selection of air samples should be done directly in the workplace in industrial conditions.
9.3 Control over safe operation of equipment, which is under pressure and supervision of
Engineering Supervision Service of the USSR, should be conducted in accordance with the
requirements of “Rules of design and safe operation of vessels, functioning under
pressure” approved by Engineering Supervision Service of the USSR.
9.4 Control over state of electrical equipment and its safe operation should be conducted in
accordance with “Rules of technical operation of electric installations of consumers and
rules of technical safety while operating electric installations of consumers”, and
“Regulations for desighn of electrical installation” approved by Engineering Supervision
Service of the Ministry of Energy of the USSR.
9.5 Control of noise and vibration level of machines and mechanisms should be carried out
according to TDS-12.1.023-80, TDS-12.2.030-83, TDS-20445-75, TDS-12.1.012-78 and
TDS-16519 78.
9.6 Check the state of personal protection equipment should be conducted in accordance
with the requirements outlined by the normative and technical documentation for these
means.
p. 147 SNT 3.01.03-06

ТDS-12.3.035-84
Appendix
Reference

Sanitary and flammable, highly explosive characteristics of chemical substances


frequently used in painting

Designation of Maximum permissible Class of danger Temperature, °С


substances concentration , мг/м3 (TDS-12.1.007-76) bursts self-ignition
Aluminum 2 4 - -
Ammonia 20 4 - -
Asbestos 2 4 - -
Asbestos cement 6 4 - -
Acetone 200 4 18 465
Butyl acetate 200 4 29 450
Butyl alcohols 10 3 34 345
Dibutyl phthalate 0.5 2 - -
Limestone б 4 - -
Xylene 50 3 29 590
Lead 0.01 1 - -
Turpentine 300 4 34 300
Solvent 100 4 34 520
Sterol 5 3 - -
Titanium and its 10 4 - -
Toluol 50 3 4 536
White spirit 300 4 - -
Carbon oxide 20 4 - -
Ultramarine 2 - - -
Formaldehyde 0.5 2 - -
Vinyl chloride 30 4 - -
Chromium oxide 1 2 - -
Cyclohexane 80 4 18 260
Zinc oxide 6 3 - -
Ethyl acetate 200 4 2 400
p. 148 SNT 3.01.03-06
ТDS-12.3.036-84

UDC 669.01:621.1:006.354 ISS 13.100 Group Т 58

INTERGOVERNMENTAL STANDARD

Occupational safety standards system


FLAME MACHINING OF METALS
Safety requirements

This standard applies to flame machining of metals in all sectors of national economy and
establishes general requirements for safety in gas welding, flame cutting, gas-flame
welding, gas-flame hardening, cleaning and heating, gas-flame (flame and detonation)
spraying of surfaces (hereinafter - the welding, cutting).

1. GENERAL PROVISIONS

1.1 Flame machining of metals at the sites of the national economy should be carried out in
accordance with the requirements of this standard, TDS-12.1.004-85, TDS-12.1.010-76,
TDS-12.3.002-75, construction norms and regulations on technical safety in construction
approved by State Construction Committee of the USSR, rules of fire safety during
welding and other flame works at the facilities of the national economy approved by
SUPEN of Ministry of Internal Affairs of the USSR, the safety rules in gas facilities
approved by State Technical Supervision of the USSR, sanitary regulations for welding,
surfacing and cutting of metals approved by Ministry of Health of the USSR.
(Revised version, Amendment № 1).
1.2 While flame machining of metals, it is possible the impact on worker of dangerous and
harmful production factors listed in the reference appendix.
1.3 Levels of harmful and dangerous production factors in the workplace should not exceed
the values established by TDS-12.1.003-83 - for noise level, TDS-12.1.005-88 - for
maximum allowable concentration of harmful substances in the air of working zone and for
temperature of outer surfaces of process equipment or its guarding devices.
(Revised version, Amendment № 1).
1.4 Flame machining in closed spaces and areas difficult of access (reservoirs, boilers,
tanks, tunnels, basements, etc.) is performed according to admission order for particularly
dangerous works.

2. PROCESS REQUIREMENTS

2.1 While development of technological processes of flame machining of metals, it should


be envisaged:
mechanization and automation of processes;
measures to prevent the entry into the air of working zone of harmful substances;
arrangements to clean up emissions;
reduction of noise levels;
rational adjustment of workplaces.
p. 149 SNT 3.01.03-06

ТDS-12.3.036-84

2.2 Technological equipment should comply with TDS-12.2.003-74, TDS-12.2.008-75, TDS-


12.2.049-80.
2.3 Flame spraying of coatings and surfacing of powder materials in the premises are allowed in
accordance with agencies of State Sanitary Supervision.
2.4 If flame spraying of coatings and surfacing of powder materials for large-size articles is held
manually in the premises, it should be used portable local suctions, providing concentrations of
harmful substances in air not higher than maximum allowable.
2.5 Operations on filling and cleaning of powders in bunkers of installations for flame spraying
and welding powders should be performed using local suctions or in special chambers and
cubicles equipped with exhaust ventilation.
2.6 For mechanized welding and cutting associated with an increased release of dust, gases, it
should be provided local exhaust gas and dust collectors, including mobile, embedded in
machines equipment or appliances.
2.7 While conducting gas-flame surface hardening, cleaning and heating for protection from
falling of peeling dross to employees, it should be envisaged special appliances (protective
shields, shrouds, etc.).
2.8 While realization of welding, cutting, hardening, cleaning and heating of bulky articles, it
should be applied the technological regimes, excluding the buckling of articles, leading the
employees to traumatism.
2.9 In automation of the process of flame machining of metals, it should be envisaged a distant
control.
2.10 While flame machining of internal surfaces of closed spaces and places difficult of access, it
should be used ventilation in accordance with the normative and technical documentation for a
specific technological process.
2.11 Assembly-welding shops, which carry our flame machining of metal, should be equipped
with load-lifting devices and accessories.
Employment of load-lifting devices should be envisaged while flame machining of articles
weighing 15 kg or more.
2.12 While working with cylinders, containing liquefied and compressed gases, it is necessary to
be guided by the exploitation rules of vessels, operating under pressure, approved by the State
Technical Supervision of the USSR.
2.13 While working with cylinders, containing liquefied and compressed gases, it is necessary to
use gears according to TDS-13861-89.
(Revised version, Amendment № 1).
2.14 While reducing the pressure in cylinders with liquefied and compressed gases up to limit
below which it is impossible to maintain the required operating pressure, gas extraction should
be discontinued.

3. REQUIREMENTS FOR SHOPFLOORS

3.1 Shopfloors, where the flame machining of metals is carried out, should comply with
construction norms and regulations for buildings of industrial enterprises (production category
D), sanitary norms of designing of industrial enterprises approved by State Construction
Committee of the USSR.
3.2 Natural and artificial lighting should comply with construction norms and regulations.
Technology of flame machining belongs to the second category of visual works according to
accuracy.
3.3 Color design of premises and equipment should ensure the lowest reflection coefficient (not
more than 0.4) in accordance with the rules for designing color interiors of industrial buildings of
production enterprises approved by the State Construction Committee of the USSR.

p. 150 SNT 3.01.03-06


TDS12.3.036-84

3.4 floors of production rooms should correspond to the sanitation requirements, be


incombustible and nonslip, and have heat conducting qualities.

3.5 general combined extract and input ventilation in accordance with construction norms and
rules for heating, ventilation and air conditioning that affirmed by USSR state construction
should be provided for gas flame metal working process in the rooms.

3.6 coating materials of production rooms’ finishing shouldn’t gather dust, steam and gas
sorption, allow systematic cleaning of surface by wet method.

3.7 walls, ceilings and interior rooms’ structure for gas flame machining should have soundproof
facing with protective finishing.

Rooms’ soundproofing where implement detonation spraying should provide workers’ protection
from sound level 100-140 dBA.

3.8 gas flame metal working in the explosive places have to implement in compliance with
requirements of rules on organization of safety implementation of fire activities in explosive and
non fireproof objects affirmed by USSR state city technical inspection.

3.9 gas flame machining in the closed and out of the way places has to implement on the
following conditions:

-Presence of 2 more openings (doors, windows)

-Thorough cleaning and air testing for harmful substance content in the working area before
working process.

-checking fire risk number on TDS-12.1.004-85

- concentration of explosive substances not above 20% from lower explosive limit;

- presence of continuously running plenum-and-exhaust ventilation that supplies with fresh and
suction of polluted air from lower and upper parts of closed and out of the way places;

-placing of a special ventilation with the help of local suctions from stationary and movable
installations if general ventilation doesn’t supply with normal working conditions.

- Installation for control posts to watch after workers and connection between workers and
observers.

(changed version N1)

3.10 gas vessels, gas sectional posts, movable acetylene generator should be placed outside and
fastened according to the facility’s rules and safety vessels’ operation that working under
pressure and affirmed by USSR state city technical inspection working in the closed and far
spaces.
3.11 don’t leave hoses, cuttings, burners, metallizing apparatus during the break time and after
the working day in the closed area or out of the way places.

3.12 places for implementation of surfaces’ detonation spraying should be soundproofed.

3.13 microclimate indices in the production areas should correspond to TDS-12.1.005-88.

(There is an additional changing N1)

4. Requirements for source materials.

4.1 surfaces of blanks and parts should be dry, cleaned from scobs, oiling and other dust. Edges
of blanks and parts shouldn’t have barbs.

4.2 degreasing of products’ surfaces before gas flame metal working should be implemented with
solution and solvents the application of which conform to USSR Public health Ministry.

4.3 storage and transportation of gas using in the gas flame metal working should realize in
compliance with TDS-12.2.060-81, safety regulations of gas economy and device rules, vessels’
safety operation that work under the pressure affirmed by USSR state city technical inspection.
p. 151 SNT 3.01.03-06

TDS- 12.3.036-84

4.4 methods of storage and transportation of source material, ready output and waste products
shouldn’t create extra danger during working process and provide with mechanization of loading
and unloading operations.

4.5 During flame spraying of surfaces and welding it is necessary to use powder, rods, wires that
emit harmful substances in the process of flame spraying and welding in quantity that do not
exceed maximum permissible concentration due to sanitary norms in accordance with the
established procedure.

5. Requirements for placing of industrial equipment and organization of working


places.

5.1 dimensional planning of working place at the mechanized and automated processes of gas
flame metal working at the expense of grouping, control placing (levers, cut off switches and
changers), display means should correspond to TDS12.2.032-78, TDS-12.2.033-78. General
safety requirements to the working places on TDS- 12.2.061-81.

5.2 places of gas flame metal working could be constant that prepared in specially conditioned
areas for these purposes or in open area, temporary places on the adjusted territory of the
enterprise with the purpose of equipment’s repair as well as construction and other structures.

5.3 It is necessary to eliminate a possibility of influence of danger and harmful factors to the
personnel near the working area during gas flame metal working process.

Working places for welding, cutting, scraping and heat should installed with collective protective
equipment from noise, infrared radiation and molten metal fragments with shades and screens
from flame-retardant material.

5.4 working place for gas flame machining should be equipped with local exhaust ventilation.

5.5 Signs of safety on TDS 12.4.026-76 should be established in the working places.

5.6 manually flame spraying of surfaces should be implemented in the soundproof rooms,
cabinets or in a special area with the help of soundproof covers that meant according to the
construction norms and rules on protection from noise, affirmed by USSR state construction.

Cabins’ walls should have layer structure and consist of soundproof materials. Front walls of
cabins should close with light filter and hand doors in leaves.

5.7 stationary plants of gas flame machining should be operated in separate rooms or in the
isolated area of workshop.

5.8 installations of detonation spraying surfaces is placed in separate buildings or in the first
floors of production buildings, in separate rooms.

5.9 it is necessary to isolate areas of gas flame machining with soundproof and heat proof facing
preventions during conveyer or progressive operations.
5.10 it should be placed gas sectional posts before each equipment for gas flame metal working
(burner, cutter, machine for thermal cutting and others) during organization of fuel feeding and
oxygen from net through pipeline for protection from back stroke.

5.11 pipelines, air and gas hoses as well as ventilation facilities should be placed for equipment’s
operation without problem. Fittings’ construction where put on hoses should provide convenient
and durable fastening and tight connection.

5.12 working places’ organization should eliminate heating of current carrying facilities placed
nearby during welding, cutting, hardening, scraping and heating process.

5.13 (eliminated, change N1)

5.14 working places for gas flame metal working in the assembly operations, placed on wooden
floors or boards should be released from combustible materials.
p. 152 SNT 3.01.03-06

TDS12.3.036-84

(hurds, chipping and others) within a radius of not less than 5 meters. Wood floors should be
covered with metal plates where installed vessels with water.

5.15 not less than 4 square meters of area besides the territory occupied by equipments and
incomes should be allotted for each stationary workplace for gas flame metal working, in
working cabin it should be not less than 3 square meters. Corridors should be not less than 1
meter.

Flame spraying operator’s work place should be not less than 10 square meters.

(additional change N1)

5.16 protection enclosures of work places should correspond to TDS12.2.062-81.

5.17 safety instructions should put up on the workplaces during gas flame work.

6. Requirements for staff permitted to production process.

6.1 persons over 18 years old who have got appropriate training, instruction, testing of safety
rules and presence of qualifying certificate are allowed to work on gas flame metal working.

Women are allowed to this activity only according to the list of production, occupations and
activities with laborious and harmful working conditions where it is impossible to employ
women’s labor that affirmed by decision of USSR state labor committee and Presidium ВЦСПС.

6.2 persons permitted to the gas flame metal working have to pass preliminary and periodic
medical examinations in compliance with requirements of USSR Public Health Ministry.

6.3 organization of workers’ training on TDS- 12.0.004-79 labor safety.

6.4 personnel permitted to the gas flame metal working have to render first aid at acute
poisoning, skin burn and mucous membrane.

7. Requirements to application of workers’ protective equipments.

7.1 Persons engaged in gas flame metal working should use equipments of personal protection
provision of which is implemented in compliance with industry norms that affirmed in
accordance with established order at the expense of carried out works.

7.2 storage, regular repair, cleaning and other kinds of preventive treatment of equipments of
workers’ personal protection should implement according to the products’ standard technical
documents.
7.3 it is necessary to use insulating means of personal protection on TDS-12.4.034-85 with fresh
air input for breath while working in closed and hard to reach spaces for respiratory organs. it is
impossible to have a work with oxygen content less than 19% and more than 20% in the air.

(changed version, N1)

7.4 workers should have welding shields on TDS-12.4.023-84 for face protection during
welding, cutting, cleaning, heating processes.

(changed version, N1)

7.5 used eye shields on TDS-12.4.003-85 for eyes protection.

(changed version, N1)

7.6 personal hearing protectors should select on the private sector’s bases of workplace.

Kinds and groups of hearing protectors on TDS-12.4.051-87

(changed version, N1)

7.7 used gauntlets on TDS-12.4.010-75 for hands’ protection.


p. 153 SNT 3.01.03-06

TDS12.3.036-84

8. Control methods of safety requirements’ implementation.

8.1 control over content of harmful substances in the air of working zones should be realized in
compliance with requirements of TDS-12.1.007-76 and TDS-12.1.005-88, with norms of
sanitary and chemical investigations in the industrial enterprises, affirmed by USSR Public
Health Ministry.

(changed version, N1)

8.2 control of ventilation’s sanitary efficiency should be realized in compliance with rules on
sanitary control of systems of production rooms’ ventilation, affirmed by USSR Public Health
Ministry and TDS-12.3.018-79.

(changed version, N1)

8.3 control of noise level of workplace should implement on TDS-12.1.050-86 with the help of
methods on measure and sanitary noise estimation in the workplace affirmed by USSR Public
Health Ministry.

8.4 control of temperature of outer surfaces and technological equipments or its protected
devices and microclimate indices according to the TDS-12.1.005-88.

(changed version, N1)

8.5 control over lighting level on TDS-24940-81.

8.6 fire risk control on TDS12.1.044-89.

(changed version, N1)

8.7 (eliminated, change N1)

p. 154 SNT 3.01.03-06

TDS-12.3.036-84

Danger and harmful industrial factors

influencing on workers during gas flame

metal working process. (Information appendix)

Gas Danger and harmful industrial factors


flame
1.autogen + - + + +* +* + + + + +
ous
welding

2.autogen + + + + +* +* + + + + +
ous
cutting

3. gas + - - + +* +* + + + - -
flame
welding

4. gas - + + + - - + - - - -
flame
surface
hardening

5. - + + + - - + - - - -
cleaning
and heat

6. flame + + - + +* +* + + - - +
spraying

p. 155 SNT 3.01.03-06

TDS12.3.038-85

УДК 662.998.002.72:658.382.3:006.354 МКС13.100 Group T58

Intergovernmental standard

Occupational safety standards system. Construction

WORKS ON THERMAL INSULATION OF EQUIPMENT AND PIPELINES


Safety requirements

Current standard establishes requirements on warning influence of danger and harmful


production factors in the preparation process and implementation of heat insulation of
equipments and pipelines during new construction, widening, reconstruction and technical
extension of enterprise, building and facility.

1. General requirements
2.
1.1 organization and implementation technologies of the heat insulating works should provide
safety for people working in all stages of production process and correspond to the requirements
of present standard TDS-12.3.002- 75, TDS-12.1.004-76, and TDS-12.1.007-76, СНиП III-4-80,
rules of fire safety during construction and assembly works, affirmed by state administration of
Law Enforcement of Ministry of Home Affairs of USSR, as well as sanitary norms and rules
affirmed by USSR Ministry of Public Health.

1.2 workers should protect from danger and harmful production factors during heat insulating
works as:

dust and gas content of air.

Noise and vibration level on the workplace.

Not enough illumination

Departure from the optimal norms of temperature, relative humidity, air speed in the work place.

1.3 content of harmful substances in the air of work place and microclimate quantity shouldn’t
exceed the norms established by TDS-12.1.005-76.

Sanitary characteristics of harmful substances in the air of work place during heat insulating
works given in the required appendix 1.

1.4 allowed value of noise and shaking level by machines and gears should conform to TDS-
12.1.003-83 and TDS-12.1.012-78.

1.5 workplaces’ illuminating should be not less than 30 meter candle.

1.6 during heat insulating works in danger zones tolerance order to production works, danger
zones’ borders where influence of harmful factors should conform to СНиП III-4-80.
p. 156 SNT 3.01.03-06

TDS-12.3.038-85

2. Technological processes’ safety requirements.

2.1 It should be used mechanization means as a rule in the technological processes while
manufacturing heat insulating products, construction and implementation of heat- insulating
activities.
2.2 Activities in all stages of technological processes should be carried out with the usage
of personal and collective protection equipments on TDS-12.4.011-75.
2.3 Area where used isolation from foamed polyurethane (priming and dust) on fire risk
should conform to СН 542-81.
Besides during manufacturing and filling with foamed polyurethane it is necessary to
follow next requirements:
Heating of foamed polyurethane’s components should be fulfilled with the help of closed
heaters and without open flame use.
During technological operations it is eliminated to get components to the human body.
Working with Freon 11- on “regulation of device and safe operation of vessels that
working under pressure” (part-10), affirmed by USSR state city technical inspection.
It is not allowed to smoke, make a fire and do welding activities in 25 m radius zone
during staff collection and filling activities.
Before working process on preparation and filling foamed polyurethane it is necessary to
hand work order for responsible worker that carries out increased danger works.
2.4 It is necessary to have a project of work production or checklist as basic document for
preparation, organization and implementation of heat insulating activities considering labor
safety. Structure and content of main decisions by project of work production or checklist on
provision of labor safety should meet requirements that brought in required appendix 2.

3. Safety requirements for organization of construction site,


area and working places.

3.1 Requirements for organization of construction site and working area should
correspond to СНиП Ш-4-80.
3.2 Facilities for workers’ comfort and safety should correspond to TDS-12.2.012-75 and
scaffolds to TDS-24258-80.
3.3 Stand and outboard framing scaffolds have to be issued for normative load on TDS-
24258-80.
3.4 Area for workers’ staffs and foamed polyurethane filling should be equipped with
primary fire-extinguishing means in compliance with TDS -12.4.009-75.

4. Requirements for basic materials and components.


4.1 All batches of received basic materials and ready output, including imported one
should have registration certificate. At the same time it is necessary to check out presence of data
about the content of harmful substances, parameters characterize fire and explosive risk, term
and storage conditions, usage methods, method of safe heat insulating works, recommendations
on collective and personal protection means in the certificate.

5. Production facility requirement.

5.1 Equipment for heat insulating activities should correspond to TDS-12.2.003-74


requirements.
5.2 Implementation of heat insulating works should be provided with necessary and
efficient mechanization means, tools, inventory scaffold means, and
p. 157 SNT 3.01.03-06

TDS-12.3.038-85

also with facilities supplying safe work on TDS-12.2.012-75 and protection inventory enclosure
on TDS-12.4.059-78.
5.3 electrical safety of machines and equipments should correspond to requirements of TDS-
12.1.013-78, TDS-12.1.018-79 and TDS-12.1.019-79.

6. Requirements for keeping and transportation of


materials and construction.

6.1 Besides present department it is necessary to follow standard requirements for concrete
kinds of materials during transportation and storage of heat insulating materials and
construction.
6.2 during transportation and storage of heat insulating materials and construction it needs to
implement following requirements.
height of product’s pile from fibrous materials in soft packing shouldn’t exceed 2 meters.
articles and structures should lay down in pile not more than 2 stages in the containers
and saves.
articles in the form of cylinder and semi cylinder as well as coiled materials (ruberoids,
asphalt paper, sheet metal) should put upright in one stage, foil coated and polymeric coiled
materials should put not more than 2 stages, sheet metal, asbestos cement sheets in bags put in
pile not more than 1 meter height.
height of article’s and structures’ packing could be increased during implementation of
measures on provision of stability and safety.
6.3 Feed stock and ready output for preparation of foamed polyurethane should be kept in
compliance with requirements that affirmed by technical conditions and standards for
these materials.
6.4 Safety requirements for loading and unloading activities should correspond to TDS-
12.3.009-76 and facility rules and safety operation of hoisting cranes, affirmed by USSR
state city technical inspection.
7. Workers requirements.

7.1 Persons who engaged in heat insulating works should pass medical examination in
established order affirmed by USSR Public Health Ministry.
7.2 People passed appropriate training, instruction and examination of knowledge of
safety requirements are allowed to work in heat insulating activities in compliance with TDS-
12.0.004-79.
7.3 Conditions of personnel’s tolerance to production process is defined by normative
and technical documents:
works with danger and harmful labor conditions and steeplejack works with СНиП Ш-4-
80 requirements.
On loading and unloading works TDS-12.3.009-76.
On electric welding works TDS-12.3.003-75.

8.Requirements for application of


workers’ personal protective equipment

8.1 Workers should supplied with personal protective equipment in compliance with
“standard branch norms of free serve of uniform, special foot wear and other kinds of
workers’ personal protective means that are busy with construction, construction and
assembly and repair construction activities” and “instructions about order of workers’
provision with special uniform, special foot wear and other personal protective means”
affirmed by USSR state labor Committee and Presidium.
8.2 Workers that have got means of personal protection should be informed with the order of
application and their care.
p. 158 SNT 3.01.03-06

TDS-12.3.038-85

8.3 it is necessary to create conditions for the first medical aid and maintenance of
personal hygiene in the construction sites.

9. Control over implementation of labor safety requirements.

9.1 Control over implementation of requirements on labor safety should be carried out by
engineering staff and safety services of construction organizations, but on unhealthy
industrial factors by sanitary-hygienic laboratories.
9.2 Control of harmful substances’ content in the air of workplace should implement in
compliance with requirements of TDS-12.1.016-79.
9.3 Control over equipment’s safe work being under inspection and control of USSR city
technological inspection should be implemented in compliance with requirements of
“rules of facilities and safe operation of vessels working under press” affirmed by USSR
city technological inspection.
9.4 Control over condition and safe operation of equipments should be implemented in
compliance with “regulations of technical maintenance of electrical installation- users”
and “instructions of electrical installations’ code”, affirmed by state energy inspection of
Ministry of Energy of USSR.
9.5 Control over noise level working with stationary machines should be implemented on
TDS-12.1 .023-80, hand- held machines on TDS-12.2.030-78, and vibration level control
on TDS-12.1.012-78.
9.6 Control over personal protection means’ condition should be implemented in compliance
with requirements instituted by normative and technological documents for personal
protection means.

p. 159 SNT 3.01.03-06

TDS-12.3.038-85

Appendix 1
Required

Sanitary characteristics of harmful substances in the air of workplace during heat


insulating works on TDS -12.1.005 -76

Names of technological processes or work


conditions during which workers could be
under the influence of harmful substances.
Names of agents. пдк Danger class
Мг/м3

Insulation with the application of articles on Glass and mineral fiber.


the base of glass and mineral fiber.
4,00 4
0,30 2
Insulation with the application of coarse Phenol
stuff.
Asbestos 2,00 4
Asbestos cement 6,00 4
Cement 6,00 4
2,00 4
Sprayed insulation Asbestos
chromia-alumina phosphate 1,00 2
Caustic magnesite 10,00 4
Nepheline antipyrin 6,00 4
Dymethylethanolamine 5,00 3
Insulation with the usage of priming of Methylene chloride 50,00 3
foamed polyurethane

0,05 1
Propylene oxide 1,00 2
Carbonic oxide 20,00 4
Insulation implementing on the territory of Hydrogen sulfide 10,00 2
operating enterprise
Hydrogen sulfide in the
composition with
hydrocarbon
С-С 3,00 3
sulfurous anhydride 10,00 3
Carbons:
Aliphatic maximum С1
- С10 300,00 4
Benzol 5,00 3
toluol
xylene 50,00 J
Methylene chloride 50,00 J
50,00 4

p. 160 SNT 3.01.03-06

TDS-12.3.038-85

Appendix 2
Required

Structure and content of main decisions in project of


work production and checklist on provision of
industrial safety.

1 . technical-organizational solutions on provision of labor safety should be developed in


the structure of work production project and checklist taking into account of present
standards’ requirements.
2 . work production project and checklist should be included requirements on decrease of
work volume and labour coefficient, their implementation in the condition of danger and
harmful substances’ effect at the expense of application of:
Disassembling insulation of equipments and pipelines;
Stacked assembly of equipment and pipelines with blocks’ insulation before their
installation in the project;
Industrial construction of insulation (prefabricated and packaged)
Machineries, tool, apparatuses, production tools (scaffolds means, load gripping devises,
personal and staff protection means)
Development order and testing of production tool, personal protection means, hand tool
and machineries are defined with appropriate normative documents, operation requirements- by
operational documents of enterprises- manufacturers.
3 work production project and checklist should be also included joint actions of main
contractor, assembly organizations and enterprises that implement heat insulating works
on provision of safe work in the conditions of:
combination of construction, assembly and insulating works;
reconstruction of enterprises or its separate objects without their stop, with partial or full
stop.
near the operated enterprises or installations that effect on work safety.
4 Drawing a calendar plan of activities in the structure of work production project and
checklist it is necessary to take into consideration additional works connected with
fulfillment of safety and time requirements that needed for their implementation.
5 At the working process under the stated appendix 3, work production project and
checklist should have decisions that supplying implementation of safety works
requirements and also brought permission term for workers and engineering manpower to
work on СНиП Ш-4-80.
6 Technical- organizational decisions in the structure of work production project in the part
of safety work provision should come to agreement with building owner of enterprises,
general contractor and organization that carrying out assembly works.

p. 161 SNT 3.01.03-06

TDS-12.3.040-86

УДК 69.024:699.82.001.2:658.382.3:006.354 МКС 13.100 Group Т 58

Occupational safety standards system


Construction
ROOFINGANDWATER
PROOFING
Safety requirements
Current standard applies to roofing and waterproofing activities during construction, expansion,
reconstruction and re- equipment of enterprises, buildings and facilities except of buildings with
polymer warmth covering and institute safety requirements at works with application of roll
materials, hot and cold mastic(further mastic) on the base of oil asphalt.

1. General requirements

1.1 roofing and waterproofing activities should be safe in each stage:


preparation of foundation’s surface -drying, leveling and dedusting;
material feed to the work place.
spreading of mastic and pasting of roll materials: preparation of mastic
in the construction object.
1.2 It is not allowed application of roll and mastic materials not corresponded
to the standard and technical conditions, and also materials prepared on standard and
technical conditions that have no explosive and fire risk indices.
1.3 During working process it is necessary to have measures that prevent about the
influence of danger and harmful factors to the workers, such as:
Workplace’s location on the height and danger zone,
Mobile parts of equipment,
danger voltage of equipment’s electric circuit;
high temperature of used materials
gas and dust content of workplace’s air.
fire and explosive risk of used roll and mastic materials, reducers
and dissolvent.
not enough illumination of workplace,
noise and vibration.
1.4 Safety of roofing and water proofing activities should be supplied
Technological order of work.
Organization of workplaces and executors’ labor
placement of production equipments, machines and facilities
transportation methods of materials to the workplaces.

p. 162 SNT 3.01.03-06

TDS-12.3.040-86

application of workers’ personal and collective protective means as well as uniform and special
footwear.
Workers’ training of safe methods of labor
Maintenance of fire fighting requirements
Control over safety requirements
1.5 Measures on preventing effect of danger and harmful substances on workers should be
kept in the production work projects, checklist and correspond to TDS-12.3.002-75,
TDS-12.1.004-85, TDS-12.1.010-76, TDS-12.1.013-78, requirements
СНиП Ш-4-80, preventive fire-fighting regulations during construction and assembling
operations. Preventive fire-fighting regulations during welding and flame works at the objects of
national economy affirmed by USSR state administration of Law Enforcement of Ministry of
Home Affairs, and also other normative documents requirements on given issue that affirmed in
accordance with established order and present standard.
1.6 During electric lighting it is necessary to follow СНиП II-4-79, СНиП Ш-4-80,
regulation of electrical installations means affirmed by USSR Ministry of Energy and
TDS-12.1.046-85.
2. Technological processes requirements.

2.1 roofing and waterproofing activities should be implemented comprehensively with


the help of mechanization means.
2.1 Works implementing at a distance less than 2 meters from fall borders that equal on
height 1,3 meters and more, should to implement after installation of interim and constant safety
enclosures.
In the absence of such enclosures the work should carry out with the help of life belt.
Clasp points of life belt should be shown in the project.
2.3 It is necessary to use traps not less than 0,3 meters in width with transversal laths for
legs’ rest for passing over the surface that doesn’t estimated for workers’ weight.
Traps should be fixed for working period.
2.4 For working period it is necessary to separate area where necessary to fix danger
zones’ borders, signal enclosures, and safety marks and signs on TDS-12.4.026-76.
2.5 roofing and waterproofing activities are not allowed during surface icing and mist
that make everything invisible within the definite working territory, thunderstorm and wind at 15
m\s and more.
2.4 It is not allowed combination of waterproofing and flame activities working indoor,
room or tank using dissolvent forming explosive mixture.
2.5 In special cases by agreement with fire supervision it is allowed mastic preparation with
help of equipment that placed right on the covering in compliance with the project
developed or concerted with project organization.
2.6 Mastic that prepared on the construction site or centrally delivered should correspond to
state standard, technical conditions, branch standards or enterprise standard requirements.
2.4 bitumen-melting plant placed in the trenches should be installed with facilities for
forced feed and fuel’s bleed off outside the limits of trenches at a height of not less than 2,5 m
than trench’s surface.
2.10 bitumen-melting plant, inventory bitumen lines for compositions’ delivery should
be placed on rigid base that excluding their subsidence.
2.10 Devices for workers’ safety and comfort (stairs, stepladders, traps, bridges,
scaffolds, gangways, swinging platforms and others) should correspond to TDS-12.2.012-75
requirements.
2.11 During roofing and waterproofing activities in the danger zones of workers it is
necessary to hand work order to labor in СНиП Ш-4-80 established order.

p. 163 SNT 3.01.03-06

TDS-12.3.040-86
3. Production equipment’s and fields’ requirements.

3.1 Installation used in roofing and damp proof activities should correspond to TDS-
12.2.003-74 requirement.
3.2 Safety requirements for components and systems that enter into the structure of
production equipments should be pointed in standards and technical conditions for these
products and systems.
3.3 Bitumen-melting plant for mastic preparation should be installed by thermometer
with scale from 0 up to 300 degree, liquid level gage, pipe with 2500mm in height for fuel’s
bleed off, tight covers and taps with handles from heat insulating material.
3.4 Facility for foundation drying, fusion of welding ruberoid should have protective
shields that keep out influence of infrared radiation of burners to visual organs.
3.5 Machineries and installations the work of which gives redundant quantity of heat
near workers legs’ area should installed with heat shields not less than 500 mm in height.
3.1 Bitumen-melting plants should be installed with torches the handle of which is not
less than 700 mm.
3.7 Fuel tanks should be developed for mechanized filling.
3.7 Bitumen-melting plants should have sheds and inventory enclosures from fireproof
material and set of fire-extinguishing means as well.
Signal color of inventory enclosures should correspond to TDS-12.4.026-76
requirements.
3.9 Places of roofing activities should be provided with 2 more evacuation exits (stairs),
telephone or other communication and also primary fire fighting appliances in compliance with
preventive fire-fighting regulations during civil and engineering works, affirmed by USSR state
administration of Law enforcement of Ministry of Home Affairs.

3.10 Places for mastic, diluents, dissolvent keeping should be separated, carried out from
fireproof materials and installed with forced ventilation system.
3.11 Places for ruberoid’s keeping should be removed from constructing buildings and
objects at a distance not less than 24 m.
3.12 Bitumen-melting plants for mastic preparation should be removed from a building
and object at a distance not less than:
30 м – for buildings and objects IV-V level of fire
resistance ;
20 м » » » » III level of fire resistance;
10 м » » » » I and II level of fire resistance;
3.13 Fuel, diluents, dissolvent keeping areas, facilities’ and aggregates’ filling should
have safety sign on TDS-12.4.026-76.

4. Requirements for working places organization

4.1 organization of workplaces should take into account features of technological


process, machineries’ operation safety, minimum usage of manual labor, provision of workers’
safe evacuation in the case of incidents and keep out person that doesn’t include into the working
process.
4.2 roofing parts and details should deliver in the containers to workplaces.
preparation of pointed parts and details is not allowed right on the roof.
4.3 Usage of bitumastic with the temperature of above 180 degree at working place is not
allowed.
4.3 During roofing activities by several teams distance between them should be not less
than 10 m, putting hot applied mastic to the foundation shouldn’t outgo ruberoid tipping more
than 1 meter. One team’s work over another one vertically is not allowed.
Putting of mastic, diluents, dissolvent on surface should be implemented in direction that
corresponds to air speed.

p. 164 SNT 3.01.03-06

TDS-12.3.040-86

4.6. It is forbidden use of open flame or action, causing sparkling in use of dangerously
explosive substances on working places.

4.7. Working places should be equipped with manual mechanized instrument.

4.8. Locate on roof materials is allowed only on places provided by project of work
production with taking measures against their failure, including from wind forcing.
4.9. Technological accessories (instruments, materials and other small objects), located on
working places should be affixed or removed from roof, during work breaks.

4.10. It is necessary to equip capacities, chambers and enclosed spaces, in production of


works inside them with system of forced ventilation. Voltage for local electric lighting shouldn’t
exceed 12 volt, and armature should be manufactured in explosion proof implementation.

5. Source materials requirements

5.1. All delivered materials for production of roofing and waterproofing should have
markings, labels, analytical passports with reference of state standard and other reference
documentation on their manufacturing.

5.2. It is not allowed to change order of components introduction, provided by technical


conditions, state standards, branch standards and standards of enterprise in manufacturing
mastics.

5.3. It is not allowed use of materials not having preventives and instructions of safety
technique and fire-fighting regulations.

6. Materials storage and transportation requirements.

6.1. Order of storage and transportation of materials should be carried out in accordance
with instruction of plant-manufacturer.

6.2. Places of materials storage should be provided by project of work production.

6.3. Transportation of materials should be mechanized to working places.

6.4. Mutually reacting substances should be transported and stored separately.

6.5. Combustible and inflammable substances should be kept and transported in closed
container. Storage and transportation of materials in fragile (glass) container is forbidden.

6.6. Container with mastics, diluents, dissolvent, filling compound should be supplied
with labels with exact designations and name of materials.

6.7. Repair of metal container (welding, soldering and riveting) should be conducted in
specially intended places after their cleaning, washing and defatting.

6.8. Empty containers should be kept in specially intended places, provided in project of
work production, removed from place of work production on distance pursuant to preventives
fire-fighting regulations in conduction of building and assembly works.

6.9. Centralized delivery of mastics should be carried out on binder distributor to


construction object.

6.10. It should be protected from moistening and influence of direct sun rays in
transportation and storage of mastics.
6.11. It is necessary to flush with solution pipes and hoses by which transportation of
mastics delivered to places of work that will be poured out to special container upon completion
of the shift.

6.12. Delivery of mastics on working places should be carried out in metal containers
with frusta conical shape with storm proof covers in manufacturing them on building sites.

p. 165 SNT 3.01.03-06

TDS-12.3.040-86

7. Requirements to personnel

7.1. It is admitted persons no less 18 to production of roofing and waterproofing works that
pass:

 Preliminary medical inspection pursuant to requirements of the Ministry of Health;


 Vocational training;
 Introductory instruction on safety technique, fire and electrical safety;

7.2. Order and kinds of training of workers, as well as examination on safety technique
should meet requirements TDS – 12.0.004-79.

7.3. All workers should pass periodical medical inspection in order approved by the Ministry
of Health.

7.4. All workers should pass off-schedule instruction with record in log, examination of
workers on safety technique with compulsory signature of instructed and instructor in change of
work technology, substitution of materials, equipment, change of organization and conditions of
labor, as well as in the case of breach of safety requirements.

8. Requirements to application of workers security facilities

8.1. Personal protective gear of workers should be up to quality of TDS-12.4.011-75.

8.2. Workers should be supplied with personal protective gear, protective clothing and
protective footwear pursuant to model sectoral rules of free distribution of protective clothing,
protective footwear and safety devices to workers and employees, busy on building, building and
assembly and repair and building works, and Instruction of order of provision of workers and
employees with protective clothing, protective footwear and personal protective gear approved
by State committee of Labor, as well as collective protective equipment.

8.3. Use of collective protective equipment and control for their technical condition
should be conducted pursuant to operative normative-technical documentation.

9. Control for implementation of safety requirements


9.1. Control for content of harmful substances and dust in air of working zone should be
carried out pursuant to statute of state sanitary inspection of USSR, approved by Decree of the
Soviet Ministries of USSR, by TDS-12.1.005-76 (according to reference appendix).

9.2. Storage, distribution and exploitation of protective clothing and other devices of
personal gear should be up to operating normative-technical documentation.

9.3. Control for condition of collective protective equipment should satisfy TDS
-12.4.059-78 and TDS – 25772-83.

9.4. Control for safe condition of electrical equipment and its exploitation should be
guaranteed pursuant to requirements of “Rules of technical exploitation of electrical installations
of customers”, “Rules of safety technique in technical exploitation of electrical installations of
customers” and “Rules of electrical installations equipment”, approved by Main State Energy
Oversight of the Ministry of Energy of USSR.

9.5. Control for noise level on working places should satisfy TDS -12.1.003-83.

9.6. Control for vibration level on working places should satisfy TDS -12.1.034-81 nad
TDS-12.4.012-83.

p. 166 SNT 3.01.03-06

TDS-12.3.040-86

9.7. Control for adherence to safety requirements in exploitation of industrial container


should be carried out with instruction of plant-manufacturer, delivered materials in containers
and TDS -12.3.010-82.

9.8. Control for adherence to explosion safety on work production should satisfy TDS-
12.1.010-76.
9.9. Control for ensuring of fire safety are carried out pursuant to TDS-12.1.004-85 and
preventive fire-fighting regulations in production of building and assembly works, approved by
ГУПО of Ministry of Home Affairs of USSR.

Appendix

Reference

Harmful substances, compounds, dust and their maximum

concentration limit (MCL) in air of working zone (TDS -12.1.005-76)

in production of roofing and water proofing works

Name of substance MCL Technological operations, materials

mg/m³

Nitric oxide (in terms of NO2) 5 Firing in bitumen-melting plants and burners

Sulfuric anhydride 10 The same

Fuel gasoline (slate, cracking 100 Mixing of bitumen coating. Mastics of bitumen-
and others) in terms of C caoutchouc (cold)

Benzol* 5 bituminous-rubber cement

Kerosene (in terms of C) 300 Mixing of bitumen coating. Plasticization of weld


ruberoid.

xylene 50 Mastics of bitumen butyl rubber cold “Venta”

alcohol unlimited fat (allyl, 2 Mixing and heating of bitumen mastics


crotonic and others )

toluene 50 Mastics of bitumen butyl rubber cold “Venta”

White alcohol (in terms of C) 300 Plasticization of weld ruberoid. bituminous-rubber


cement

carbonic oxide 20 Firing in bitumen-melting plants and burners

Phenol* 0.3 Mastics bitumen-latex roofing

Mixed asbestos dust and 2 Mixing of bitumen plastics


content in them asbestos more
10%

Talc 4 Cleaning of ruberoid from mineral dressing compound

* Substance is skin toxicity.


p. 167 SNT 3.01.03-06

TDS-12.4.011-89

(СТ СЭВ 1086-88)

UDC 614.89:006.354 ISS 13.340 Group Т 58

INTERGOVERNMENTAL STANDARD

Occupational safety standards system


Means of protection

General requirements and classification

This standard is spread on means, applicable for prevention or decreases of influence on workers
dangerous and harmful industrial factors, and determines classification and common
requirements to means of workers protection.

1. CLASSIFICATION

1.1 Means of protection subject to character of their application subdivided into two
categories:
Means f individual protection

Means of collective protection

List of main kinds of means protection, entering to classes, is presented in appendix.

1.1.1. Means of collective protection subject to purposes is subdivided into classes:


Means of normalization of air quality of industrial premises and working places (from
increased and decreased barometric pressure and its abrupt change, increased and decreased
air ionization, increased and decreased concentration of oxygen in air, increased
concentration of harmful aerosol in air);

Means of normalization of lightning of industrial premises and working places (decreased


brightness, absence and shortage of natural lightning, reduced visibility, discomfort and
disability glare, increased pulsation of light flux, decreased color rendering index);

Means of protection from increased level of ionizing radiation;

Means of protection from increased level of infrared radiation;

Means of protection from increased and decreased level of ultraviolet radiation;

Means of protection from increased level of electromagnetic radiation;

Means of protection from increased tensity of magnetic and electric rays;

Means of protection from increased level of laser radiation;

Means of protection from increased level of noise;

Means of protection from increased level of vibration (common and local);

Means of protection from increased level of ultrasound;

Means of protection from increased level of ultrasonic vibrations;

Means of protection from electric trauma;


Means of protection from increased level of static electricity;

Means of protection from increased and decreased temperatures of surfaces of equipment,


materials, feedstocks;

Means of protection from increased and decreased temperatures of air and temperature
differences;

p. 168 SNT 3.01.03-06

TDS-12.4.011-89

Means of protection from chemical factors influences (moving machines and mechanisms;
mobile part of industrial equipment and instruments; moving items, feedstock, materials;
crippling of constructions; sloughing of geological materials; bulk solids; falling of items
from height; sharp edges and roughness of feedstock, instruments and items surfaces; sharp
angles);

Means of protection from chemical factors influences;


Means of protection from biological factors influences;

Means of protection from height fall.

1.1.2. Means of individual protection subject to purposes is subdivided into classes:


Insulating suit;

Means of protection of respiratory organs;

Special protective cloth;

Means of legs protection;

Means of hands protection;

Means of head protection;

Means of face protection;

Means of eye protection;

Means of organ of hearing protection;

Means of protection from fall of height and other preventive means;

Protective dermatologist means;

Complex means protection.

1.2. Classification of individual means protection subject to dangerous and harmful industrial
factors – by TDS-12.4.064, TDS-12.4.034, TDS-12.4.103, TDS12.4.023, TDS-12.4.013
and TDS-12.4.068.
2. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

2.1. Means of protection of workers should ensure prevention and decrease of dangerous
and harmful industrial factors.

2.2. Means of protection shouldn’t be sources of dangerous and harmful industrial


factors.

2.3. Means of protection should satisfy requirements of technical esthetics and


ergonomics.

2.4. Choice of concrete kind of workers’ means protection should be conducted subject to
requirements of safety for this process and kind of work*.

2.5. Means of individual protection should be used in those cases, when work safety
couldn’t be ensured by equipment construction, organization of industrial processes, architect
planning decisions and means of collective protection.

2.6. Means of individual protection shouldn’t change their features in washing, dry-
cleaning and disinfection.

2.7. Means of individual protection should be evaluated by protective, physiological


hygienic and exploitation performances.
2.8. Requirements to marking of means of individual protection should correspond to
TDS-12.4.115 and standards of marking on concrete kinds of means of individual protection.

2.9. Means of individual protection should have construction with instructions of purpose
and life time of item, operating and keeping rules.

2.10. Means of collective protection should be constructively combined to industrial


equipment or its elements of managing thus in the case of necessity coercive actions of means
protection is worked.

It is allowed use means of collective protection in the quality of control item for switching and
switching off of industrial equipment.

2.11. Means of collective protection should be located on industrial equipment or on


working place thereby that opportunity of its work control as well as safe care and repair will be
ensured.

p. 169 SNT 3.01.03-06

TDS-12.4.011-89

Appendix

Reference

List of

Main kinds of workers means of protection

1. Means of collective protection


1.1 Next facilities are referred to means of normalization of industrial premises and
working places’ air quality:
Facility for maintenance of barometric pressure’s normalized quantity;

ventilation and air cleaning;

air conditioning;

localization of harmful factors;

heating;

automatic control and signalization;

air deodorization;

1.2 There are following means of normalization of industrial premises and working
places’ lightning:
Light sources;

Lighting fixtures;

Area lights;

Sunshields;

Light filter.

1.3 There are following means of protection from increased level ionizing
radiation:
Guard devices;

Warming devices;

Hermetical devices;

Protective devices;

Devices for deentrainment and cleaning of air and liquids;

Means of deactivation;

Automatic control device;

Remote control device;

Means of protection in transportation and holding of radioactive material;

Signs of safety;

Capacities for radioactive wastes.

1.4 There are following devices for means of protection from infrared radiation:
Guard;

Hermetical;

Heat-insulating;
Ventilation;

Automatic control and signalization;

Remote control;

Signs of safety.

1.5 There are following means of protection from increased level ultraviolet
radiation:
Guard;

Air ventilation;

Automatic control and signalization;

Remote control;

Signs of safety.

1.6 There are following means of protection from increased level electromagnetic
radiation:

p. 170 SNT 3.01.03-06

TDS-12.4.011-89

Guard devices;

Protective coating;

Hermetical devices;
Automatic control and signalization devices;

Remote control devices;

Signs of safety.

1.7 There are following means of protection from increased tensity of magnetic and
electric rays:
Guard devices;

Protective earthings;

Insulating devices and coverings;

Signs of safety.

1.8 There are following means of protection from increased level of laser radiation:
Guard devices;

Preventive devices;

Automatic control and signalization devices;

Remote control devices;

Signs of safety.

1.9. There are following means of protection from increased level of noise:

Guard devices;

Sound-insulation and sound-absorbing devices;

Noise suppressors;

Automatic control and signalization devices;

Remote control devices;

1.10. There are following means of protection from increased level of vibration:

Guard devices;

Vibration-isolating and vibration-absorbing;

Automatic control and signalization devices;

Remote control devices;

1.11. There are following means of protection from increased level of ultrasound:

Guard devices;

Sound-insulation and sound-absorbing devices;

Automatic control and signalization devices;

Remote control devices;


1.12. There are following means of protection from increased level of ultrasonic vibrations:

Guard devices;

Signs of safety.

1.13. There are following means of protection from electric trauma:

Guard devices;

Automatic control and signalization devices;

Insulating devices and coverings;

Protective grounding and nulling devices;

Automatic release device;

Potential balancing and under voltage devices;

Remote control devices;

Safety cutoffs;

Lightning dischargers and dischargers;

Signs of safety.

1.14. There are following means of protection from increased level of static electricity:

Earthing devices;

p. 171 SNT 3.01.03-06

TDS-12.4.011-89

Neutralizers;

Moistening devices;

Anti electrostatic devices;


Screening devices.

1.15. There are following means of protection from increased and decreased temperatures of
surfaces of equipment, materials, feedstocks:

Guard;ntrol;

For radiant firing and cooling.

1.17. There are following means of protection from mechanical factors influences:

Guard;

Automatic control and signalization;

Preventive;

Remote control;

Brake;

Signs of safety.

1.18. There are following means of protection from chemical factors influences:

Guard;

Automatic control and signalization;

Hermetical;

For ventilation and air cleaning;

For removal of toxic agents;

Remote control;

Signs of safety.

1.19. There are following means of protection from biological factors influences:

Equipments and drugs for disinfection, disinsection, sterilization and deratization;

Guard;

Hermetical;

For ventilation and air cleaning;

Signs of safety.

1.20. There are following means of protection from fall from height:

Barriers;

Protective nets;

Signs of safety.
2. Means of individual protection

2.1 Insulating suits:


pressure suit;

waterproofing suits;

environmental suit.

2.2 Means of protection of respiratory organs:


gas mask;

respirators;

self-rescuers;

pressure helmets;

pressure masks;

pressure jackets.

2.3 Special protective cloth:


Sheepskin, coat;

short coat, short sheepskin coat;

p. 172 SNT 3.01.03-06

TDS-12.4.011-89

cloaks;

raincoats, short raincoats;

overalls;
suits;

jackets, shirts;

trousers, shorts;

coveralls, short coveralls;

vests;

dresses, sundresses;

aprons;

shoulder straps.

2.4 Means of legs protection:


High boots;

High boots with elongated top;

High boots with shortened top;

Short boots;

Shoes;

Shoe covers;

Rubbers;

Slippers (sandal);

High fur boots;

Jackboots, knee-pads, puttees.

2.5 Means of hands protection:


Gauntlets;

Gloves;

Fingerstalls;

Wristlets;

Over sleeves;

Elbow patches.

2.6 Means of head protection:


Protective helmets;

Headpieces;

Caps, berets, hats, headscarves.

2.7 Means of eye protection:


Protective glasses;
2.8 Means of face protection:
Facial protective cover sheets;

2.9 Means of respiratory organs protection:


Antinoise helmets;

Earplug;

Antinoise headphones.

2.10 . Means of protection from fall of height and other preventive means:
Life belts, ropes;

Fingertip prehension, handlers;

Knee-pads, elbow patches, shoulder straps.

2.11. Protective dermatologist means:

Protective;

Skin cleaners;

Reparative means.

2.12. Complex means protection.

p. 173 SNT 3.01.03-06

TDS-12.4.059-89

UDC 62-758:69:006.354 МКС 91.220 Group Т 58


INTERGOVERNMENTAL STANDARD

Occupational safety standards

CONSTRUCTION. PROTECTIVE INVENTORY STANDARDS

General specifications

This standard is spread on inventory safeguards of working places and passage to them (further
safeguards), applicable for prevention of workers from fall in places of difference on height in
construction of new and reconstruction of operating buildings and facilities.

Standard is not spread on shields and floorings, intended for blocking of horizon embrasures,
protective canopies, safety horizon facilities, as well as safeguards which is inalienable
constructive elements of scaffolds, assembly and other kinds of technological equipment.

Explanations of terms, used in this standard, are presented in appendix 1.

1. TYPES

1.1 Type of safeguard is determined on the basis of describable features, mentioned in


table.

Describable features Name of safeguard type on Designation of safeguard type


describable features
describable features

1. Functionality Protective Pr

Safety Sf

Signal Sg

2. Location place relative to Internal In


working place boundaries near
External Ex
differences on height

3. Manner of safeguard Supporting Sp


fastening to building’s
Up-and-over Uo
elements

1.2 Next structure of conditional designation of safeguard is established


Designation of safeguard type on functionality

Designation of safeguard type on location place relative to


working place boundaries near differences on height

Designation of safeguard type on manner of safeguard

Designation of this standard

p. 174 SNT 3.01.03-06

TDS-12.4.059-89

Example of protective external supporting safeguard’s conditional designation:

Safeguard Pr Ex Sp TDS -12.4.059-89


1.3 Schemes of safeguards and their conditional designation are presented in
appendix 2.

2. TECHNICAL REQUREMENTS

2.1 Safeguards should be manufactured in accordance to requirements of this standard and


technical documentation, approved in established order.

2.2. Characteristics

2.2.1. Protective safeguards are figured out on tenability and resistance to by-turn action as
well as horizon, as vertical even distributed basic loads equaled to 40 kilogram-force/m, applied
to handrail.

It is allowed to accept in the quality of basic one concentrated load, equaled to 40 kilogram-
force/m by –turn applied as well as horizon, as vertical in any place on handrail’s length in the
places intended for stay of no more two persons.

2.2.2. Safety safeguards are figured out on tenability and resistance to action of horizontal
concentrated load no less 70 kilogram/force, applied to any point on safeguard’s height to the
middle of span, and safety external safeguards, in addition, on tenability to action of load with
mass 100 kg, falling from height 1 m from level of working place in the middle of span.

2.2.3. Reliability coefficient of load for protective and safety safeguards should be accepted
1,2.

2.2.4. Value of handrail’s sag’s quantity of protective safeguard under action of calculating
load should be no more 0.1 m.

2.2.5. Height of protective and safety safeguards (distance between from level of working
place to the lowest point of head horizontal element) should be no more 1,1 m, signal one – from
0,8 to 1,1, m inclusive.

2.2.6. Distance between attachment fittings of protective and safety safeguards to stable
structures of building or facility (length of one section) shouldn’t exceed 6 meters, signal is
allowed till 12m.

2.2.7. Distance from border difference on height should be for:

External protective and safety in the limits of 0.2-0.25 m;

Internal safety – no less 0.30 m;

Signal – no less 2, 0 m.

Protective internal safeguards are installed without restriction from border difference on height.

2.2.8. Differences between horizontal elements in vertical plane of protective safeguard


should be no more 0,45 m.

2.2.9. Height of protective safeguard’s side piece should be no less 0.10 m.


2.2.10. Size of reticular safeguard’s filling cells should be no more 0.05 m.

2.2.11. Opportunity of spontaneous detachment should be excluded by construction of


fixation to building constructions.

2.2.12. Signal safeguards should be executed in the form of rope, not calculating on loads and
fixed to uprights or stable structures of building (facility), with hanging signs of safety in the
form of yellow right triangles with black edging with side no less 100 mm. Design of safety
signs – by TDS – 12.4.026, distance between signs should be no more 6 meters.

2.2.13. Breaking load of network leaf’s ell should be no less 175 kilogram /force.

2.2.14. Service life and deterioration of network materials should be accounted in calculation
of tenability of network safeguards.

2.2.15. Details and assembly units of safeguards, with mass no more 25 kg should have
erection loops and other accessories for strapping.

p. 175 SNT 3.01.03-06

TDS-12.4.059-89

2.2.16. Construction elements of safeguards shouldn’t have sharp angles, knife-edges,


and rough edges.
2.2.17. Filling elements’ surface of protective and safety safeguards should be dyed with
yellow signal color by TDS-12.4-026.

Synthetical network web before coloring should be treated with bituminous varnish Б-577 by
TDS -12.4.026 diluted white-alcohol or turpentine.

2.3. Requirements to materials, componentry and protective coverings.

2.3.1. Rolled iron bearing the trademark of C235 by TDS-27772, aluminum alloys of
trademark of AMг6 and 1915 by TDS -4784, bold timbers from wood of coniferous trees no
lower 2 sort by TDS -8486, network leaf from synthetic materials and others are used for
manufacturing of synthetic network leaf.

2.3.2. Synthetic network leaf should be manufactured from capronic and lavson twisted
ropes with diameter 3.1 mm with technologic shrinkage in dabbing no more 10 % conditioned
humidity no more 1 %. Network leafs are twined round contour with capronic rope with
diameter 8 mm. tenability characteristics of network materials should be correspond to project
one.

2.3.3. Safeguard elements from metal-roll should be coated and colored at the enterprise-
manufacturer with paint-and-lacquer materials, pursuant to weakly regressive environment by
BN and R 2.03.11-85. Covering class –VII by TDS -9.032.

Surface of safeguard’s elements should be peeled to 4th level by TDS -9.402.

2.4. Completeness

2.4.1. One kind of safeguard in the quantity of 20 pieces, instruction manual and quality
license should be included in the complement of safeguard delivered to enterprise-customer.

2.5. Marking and packing

2.5.1. Safeguard elements with equal names (uprights, borders, rod horizontal elements
and others) from metal roll should be bonded together in packets with wire.

2.5.2. Small parts (clamps, cramp iron and others) should be packed in wood boxes by
TDS-18617.

2.5.3. Network leafs should be packed to bags.

2.5.4. Each packet and box with elements of safeguards form metal roll, as well as bag
with network leafs should have table containing:

Trademark and name of enterprise-manufacturer;

Reference designation of safeguard;

Date of manufacturing (month, year);

Mass;

For network leafs of large test and data of tenability.


2.5.5. Documentation is available with delivery should be rolled in packet from
polyethylene film by TDS-10354 and attached to complement reliably with wire or passed to
customer in direct supply them completion of safeguards.

2.6. Life service of safeguards in condition of observance by customer requirements of


exploitation documentation is mentioned in technical conditions on concrete kinds of safeguards
and should be no less:

5 years for metal elements;

2, 5 years for wood elements and synthetic network leafs.

3. ACCEPTANCE

3.1. Manufacturer should conduct acceptance inspection of safeguards for test of


conformance inspection of safeguards to requirements of this standard by results of which
decision of their suitability to deliveries and use will make.

p. 176 SNT 3.01.03-06

TDS-12.4.059-89
3.2. Each safeguard was put on acceptance inspection in the next consequence:

Inspection of complement;

Conformance inspection of material and sizes to working schemes;

Integrity checking of elements;

Quality test of weld joints, ropes, bolting, nailed connections and rivet bonds on compliance with
requirements of technical documentation;

Conformance inspection of signal color to requirements of TDS -12.4.026.

3.3. Results of acceptance conducting are reflected in the quality document.

4. Methods of control

4.1. Control of presence of cracks, cuts, breaks, knife edges, burrs and weld joints are
conducted visually to coloration.

4.2. Quality of materials from which elements of safeguards are manufactured should be
determined by certificates or determine by results of laboratory analysis.

4.3. Quality of safeguard’s elements color is determined visually in accordance with


TDS-9.032.

4.4. Test of safeguards’ sizes is measured by measuring instruments or patterns, ensuring


precision of measurements to 1 mm.

5. Transportation and storage

5.1. Transportation and storage should be conducted in accordance with conditions 5 by


TDS-15150.

5.2. Shipment, unloading, transportation and storage of safeguards should be conducted


in conditions excluding their deformation and damage of paint-and-lacquer coating. It is not
allowed to throw safeguards in unloading, and to portage them.

5.3. Synthetic network leafs should be kept in places excluding their contamination,
effect of high temperature and direct sun rays.

6. Instructions on exploitation

6.1. Safeguards should be operated pursuant to requirements of this standard, BN and R –


4-80 and instructions on exploitation of safeguards.

6.2. Control for serviceable state and right use of safeguards during exploitation,
installing and disassembly is entrusted to engineering and technical workers of building and
assembly organizations (manufacturers of work, masters, district mechanic), determined by order
of organization.

6.3. Safeguards should be entered to normative completion and assigned to complex or


specialized brigade by order of building and assembly organization, and from number of workers
of brigade appointed persons, especially trained who could conduct assembly and disassembly
works.

6.4. Periodic inspection of safeguards should be conducted by master (clerk of works)


and consists of visual inspection (test) of serviceable state of assembly units and elements of
safeguard.

6.5. Elements of safeguard with revealed shortcomings are liable to replacement or


reconstruction.

6.6. It is allowed exploitation of safeguards with synthetic materials in temperature from


minus 40 to plus 40.

p. 177 SNT 3.01.03-06

TDS-12.4.059-89
6.7. Fire works should be conducted at the distance no less 1,5 m form synthetic materials
in order to avoid reducing of tenability.

6.8. Installation and demounting of safeguards should be conducted in technological


consequence ensuring safety of building and assembly works implementation. Length of
enclosure is presented in technological maps.

6.9. Persons implementing installation and demounting of safeguards should use safety
belt for fixation during the work to safely fixed structures of building or guideline.

6.10. Dismantled safeguards should put to containers for giving them by crane on next
assembly horizon.

7. Manufacturer's warranty

7.1. Manufacturer guarantees pursuant safeguards to requirements of this standard.

7.2. Warranty lifetime of safeguards on conditions of observance by customer conditions


of transportation, storage and exploitation, approved by this standard- 18 months from the day of
putting into operation.

Appendix 1

Reference

Terms and explanations

Term Explanation

Preventive safeguard Safeguard of working places on height and passages to them,


constructions of which located in vertical plane, serving for prevention
of falling human

Protective safeguard Preventive safeguard, serving for prevention of unintentional access of


man to the border of difference on height

Safety safeguard Preventive safeguard, ensuring holding of man in loss of stability near
border of difference on height

Signal safeguard Preventive safeguard, intended for designation of danger zone, in the
limits of which is the danger of fall from a height

Internal safeguard Preventive safeguard, mounting in the limits of working place till
border of difference on height

External safeguard Preventive safeguard, mounting within limits of working place till
border of difference on height

Filling of safeguard Safeguard’s element, located between uprights of constructional


structures of building

Supporting safeguard Preventive safeguard, having element of bearing structure (abuttal,


frame ant etc) using for hanging of filling

Up-and-over safeguard Preventive safeguard, not having element of bearing structure and
having directly on constructional structures of building

p. 178 SNT 3.01.03-06

TDS-12.4.059-89

Schemes of safeguards and examples of their designations


Protective internal supporting safeguard

(Safeguard Pr In Sp RDS – 12.4.059-89)

1 – filling, 2 – upright, 3 - guard board, 4 - floor slab

Drawing 1

Protective External Supporting safeguard

(Safeguard Pr Ex Sp TDS – 12.4.059-89)

a) fastening on dead wall b) fastening on window opening


1 – filling, 2 – upright, 3 - guard board, 4 - attaching point (to wall or on window opening); 5 –
wall of building

Drawing 2

p. 179 SNT 3.01.03-06

TDS-12.4.059-89

Protective Internal Up-and-over safeguard

(Safeguard Pr In Uo TDS – 12.4.059-89)


1 – filling, 2 - column of building, 3 - guard board, 4 - screw-clamp (clamp);

5 - floor slab, 6 - tightening screw

Drawing 3

Safety internal up-and-over safeguard

(Safeguard Sf In Uo TDS – 12.4.059-89)

1 – column of building, 2 – filling, 3 – clamp, 4 - floor slab

Drawing 4
p. 180 SNT 3.01.03-06

TDS-12.4.059-89

Safety External Supporting safeguard

(Safeguard Sf Ex Sp TDS-12.4.059)
1 – frame, 2 – filling, 3 - attaching point of safeguard to wall of building

Drawing 5

Signal Internal Supporting safeguard

(Safeguard Sg In Sp TDS -12.4.059)

1 – upright, 2 – filling, 3 – signs of safety, 4 – floor slab

Drawing 6
p. 181 SNT 3.01.03-06

TDS-12.4.059-89

Signal Internal Up-and-over safeguard

(Safeguard Sg In Uo TDS-12.4.059)
1 – column of building, 2 – floor slab, 3 – filling, 4 – clamp, 5 – sign of safety

Drawing 7

p. 182 SNT 3.01.03-06

TDS-12.4.087-84

UDC 687.434:006.354 МКС 13.340.20 Group


J 07
INTERGOVERNMENTAL STANDARD

Occupational safety standards system

Building

BUILDING HELMETS

Specifications

This standard is spread on plastic helmets, intended for protection of worker’s head from
mechanical damages, water and electricity in production of building, building and assembly
and repair and building works.

1. BASIC PARAMETERS AND SIZES

1.1 Helmets should be manufactured of 2 sizes with stages of regulation of backing


strip’s length no more 10 mm:
I – from 54 to 58 sm;

I – from 58 to 62 sm;

It is allowed to produce helmets of big sizes from 62 to 64 sm on requirements of customer.

1.2 Basic parameters of helmets should correspond to mentioned on drawing and in


table 1.

Diagrammatic representation of helmet’s construction


a – height of globe, б – depth of internal rigging,

в – width of peak, г – width of brim, д - annular space,

e - vertical safety space; 1 – globe, 2 - stiffening bar,

3 - absorber, 4 – hanger, 5 - backing strip

p. 183 SNT 3.01.03-06

TDS – 12.4.087-84
Table 1

Number of size Norm for helmets

size

I II

height of globe, a, no more 160 165

depth of internal rigging, б, no less 80 85

г – width of brim, no more 15

в – width of peak, no more 60

e - vertical safety space From 25 to 50

д - annular space between globe of helmet and From 5 to 20

stiffening bar

Note. Basic sizes should correspond to II size in manufacturing of helmets with size from 63
to 64.

1.3 Differentiated performances of helmets by categories of quality are indicated in


table 2.
1.4 Helmets, subject to exploitation terms have next kinds of completions:
Completion A – for workers in premises; helmet;

Completion B – for workers on open air in hot climatic zone; helmet and pelerine;

Table 2

Value of quality index for helmets

Name of quality index First category Second category


of quality of quality

Mass of helmets (with pelerine and neck guard), g, no


more, for size:

I
400 390
II
430 410

Maximal power transmission, in nominal energy 50 K


joule, no more
5 4.0-4.5
Availability of mounting facilities of other kinds of - Should have
individual protection

Coefficient of materials consumption 0.81 0.80

Completion B – for workers on open air in temperate climatic zone: helmet, pelerine and
neck guard on sheet wadding;

Completion G – for workers on open air in cold climatic zone: helmet, pelerine, neck
guard wool;

Completion D – for workers in special climatic zone: helmet, pelerine and neck guard on
sheet wadding, neck guard wool.

Instruction on assembly and exploitation with indication of terms of exploitation should


be enclosed to each helmet.

Example of conditional designation of completion A helmet, size I, white:

A–Iw

The same, completion G, size II, red:

G – II r

2. TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS

2.1 Helmet should be manufactured according to


requirements of this standard and correspond to example-
standard, approved in established order.
p. 184 SNT 3.01.03-06

TDS – 12.4.087-84

2.2 Helmet should consist from globe, internal rigging and


genial belt.
Helmet should be supplied by means for fastening of cover sheets, anti noise headphones and
other means of individual protection.

2.3 Globes of helmets should be from 4 colors:


White – for supervisory personnel of organizations and enterprises, section and workshop
foreman, public inspectors on labor protection, workers of safety engineering service;

Red – for masters, engineers and technical workers, master mechanic and chief power man;

Yellow and orange – for workers and junior service staff.

2.4 Materials allowed by Ministry of Health Care should be used for manufacturing
of helmets. Globe and internal rigging should be manufactured from nontoxic
materials, and details directly contacting with skin of head and face shouldn’t produce
pathologic changes of skin. Materials should be resistant to oil products, acid and
alkali electrolyte, hot water (80º), disinfectants.
2.5 Materials used for helmet manufacturing should correspond indicated in table 3.
Table 3

Name of helmet elements Name of materials Reference documentation

Helmet globe and click of Polyethylene of high density TDS -16338


genial belt

backing strip, hanger The same, low density The same

Pelerine, cover of backing Operating reference


strip documentation

Note. Application of other materials is allowed, but their physicochemical property should
be no less mentioned in table 3 and ensuring compliance of helmet with all requirements of
this standard.

2.6 Details of internal rigging should be manufactured from strong and elastic
materials. Backing strip (except for its cervical part) should have cover from natural
and perforated artificial leather or other porous material, protecting your skin from
rub.
2.7 Internal rigging of helmet should ensure opportunity of its size regulation, in
necessity of neck guard use, and shouldn’t allow helmet moving in head rotation and
work implementation in tilted position.
Structure of backing strip and absorber should ensure regulation of helmet fitting’s depth on
head.

2.8 Internal rigging and genial belt should be removable and have means for fastening
to helmet. Genial belt should be regulated by length, and way of fastening should
ensure opportunity of its fast detachment.
2.9 External surface of helmet’s globe should be smooth, without cracks and bubbles.
Inclusions of other colors in the quantity, permissible by norms on materials are
allowed on surface of globe.
2.10 . Internal surface of helmet globe, as well as external and internal surfaces of
rigging should be processed smoothly, and edges should be blunt.
2.11. Quality of joints on internal rigging should satisfy TDS-12.4.116-82.

2.12. Side surfaces of helmet globe should have air holes of total area no less 200 mm²,
blocking with rotating cover sheets hermetically.

2.13. Mechanical resistance, amortization, strength of joint of internal rigging with globe of
helmet, inflammability, electric protective characteristics of helmet should correspond TDS –
12.4.128-83.

2.14. Helmet globe should exclude opportunity of penetration o f globe point to surface of
head mockup in testing on perforation with blow 30 joule.
p. 185 SNT 3.01.03-06

TDS – 12.4.087-84

2.15. Helmets should keep protective features during whole operation life in temperature of
environment from minus 50 to plus 40 ºC.

3. PROCEDURE OF ACCEPTANCE

3.1 Helmets are delivered by lots. Lot is any quantity of helmets no more 3000
pieces. One color, one size, manufactured from one material in one operating
practices.
From lot with capacity from 51 to 1200 helmets, by randomization 5 helmets are selected for
tests, and 8 helmets are selected from lot with capacity from 1201 to 3000 helmets.

3.2 Acceptance testing is conducted for test of compliance of helmets with


requirements of this standard at enterprise-manufacturer.
3.3 Hard hats for hand-over and periodic trials are chosen in accordance with Table no.4.

3.4 Periodic tests are held not less than once in half an hour in specialized laboratories or at
the enterprises-manufactures towards the person, responsible for the application of personal
safety means.

3.5 Periodic tests are used to test hard hats, taken from the batch that has passed hand-over
tests and accepted from the enterprises-manufactures.

Table 4

Number of hard hats for the trial

Type of tests Hand-over Periodic

Amount of batch

From 51 to From 1201 to


1200 3000

Outside appearance test All hard hats

Sample-standard compliance test

(sub-clause 2.2, 2,3. 2.8, 2.10, 2.11 ) 5 8 -

Vent holes leakage test* (c. 2.12) - - 3

Water pressure tolerance test (c. 2.4) - - 3

Inflammability of hard hat frame** (c.2.13) - - 3

Examination of overall dimensions* (c.1.2) - - 15

Determination of weight* (c. 1.3) - - 15


3 5

- -

2 3

Mechanical strength test (c. 2.13) -


- -
Damping test (c. 2.13) 6

Perforation test (c. 2.14) -


2 3
Examination of electrical protection
*Hard hats may be used in other tests

**Hard hats that have passed other tests are tried

Note: All hard hats that have been subjected to destructive kinds of tests (perforation,
inflammability, fastness of connections between inner gear and frame as well as electrical
protection properties of the frame), are excluded from the list of vendible products and cannot
further used.

3.6 If the results of any of the hand-over and periodic tests are not satisfactory, additional
tests are held using doubled number of samples from the same batch of hard hats as was used in
the first tests. Results of the additional trial are not applied to the entire batch.

3.7 If during the hand-over and periodic tests, 10 batches of hard hats were accepted in
succession, it is allowed to exercise less strict control. Meanwhile, the following amounts of
sample collection are determined:

p. 186 SNT 3.01.03-06

TDS – 12.4.087-84

For the batch consisting of 51 to 1200 pieces – 2 hard hats,

For the batch consisting of 1201 to 3000 pieces – 3 hard hats,

All the chosen hard hats chosen are subjected to the sample-standard compliance test and
compliance with the requirements of c. 2.2, 2.3, 2.8, 2.10, 2.11, 2.13, 2.14.

If one batch of hard hats could not stand the test, it is then subjected to a normal control
in accordance with Table 4.

4. METHOD OF TESTS
4.1 Outside appearance test, as well as tests of linear dimensions, weight, and mechanical
strength, damping, perforation, fastness of connections between inner gear and frame, water
absorption, inflammability, resistance to chemical agents, as well test of the fire-resistance
properties are carried out in compliance with TDS-12.4.128-83.

4.2 Testing of the frame material in terms of water absorption is to be as per TDS-4650-
80.

4.3 Testing of the vent holes leakage

4.3.1 Method of sample collection

Samples are collected in compliance with the requirements of c.3.3

4.3.2 Equipment

Device for the irrigation of hard hats is to have a quench and ensure water consumption of (1,0 ±
0,2) l/min.

4.3.3 Preparation for the test

Vent holes in the hard hats are blocked with the rotating shields, specified in the instruction.

4.3.4 Testing

Hard hat is put on the rack in the bathtub of the quench and irrigate it with water at a temperature
of (20±2)˚C from the height of (400±20) mm for 5 min.

4.3.5 After the test, during the visual examination of hat frame, there should not be any
signs of moisture entering through the frame.

5. MARKING, PACKAGE, TRANSPORTATION AND STORAGE

5.1 Every hard hat should be marked.

5.2 In the middle of the upper part of the hat peak, the word – “Builder” is inscribed with
the help of casting method.

5.3 A trademark of the enterprise-manufacturer, indication of the present standard, hat


size, date of manufacture (month, year) and image of the state mark of quality as per TDS-1.9-
67, if this hat has one, is drawn on the inner part of the peak or hat using the method of casting or
molding.

5.4 Every hard hat must be wrapped in paper or placed into a polyethylene bag or
cardboard box, made in compliance with technological normative documents.

Package of hard hats disassembled is also allowed in case if assemblage instructions are
attached. Meanwhile, frames are packed in special packaging paper as per TDS-8273-75 by 5, 10
or 15 pieces and each package is provided with a box as per TDS-12302-83 with an appropriate
number of inner gear and chin belts.
5.5 When transported, hard hats are packed according to their sizes into dry wooden as
per TDS-2991-85, plywood as per TDS-5959-80 or cardboard as per TDS-9142-90 boxes or
paper bags as per TDS-2226-88.

Gross weight of such box, bag should not exceed 50 kg.

5.6 Marking of the transportation tare – as per TDS-14192-96. Meanwhile, every box or
bag is to be provided with a label or tag with the indication of:

Name of enterprise-manufacturer;

p. 187 SNT 3.01.03-06

TDS – 12.4.087-84

Specified indication of hard hats;

Number of batch and date of manufacture;

Number of hard hats;

Notes of the packer;

Indication of the present standard;

Warning symbols as per TDS-14192-96;

Image of the State quality mark as per TDS-1.9-67 (for hard hats, which has one);

Packaging list with the same data is to be enclosed in the box or bag.

5.7 Upon concurrence with consumer, other package, ensuring integrity of hard hats is
also allowed to be used during the transportation and storage.

5.8 Hard hats can be transported by all types of transport, ensuring their protection from
the mechanical damage and impact of atmospheric precipitations.

5.9 Hard hats should be kept packed in dry premises on racks, located at a distance of not
closer than 1 m from the heating systems, and are to be protected from direct sunrays.

6. OPERATION INSTRUCTIONS

6.1 Hard hats are not repairable.

6.2 Hard hats should be subjected to every day visual examination until the expiry date in
order to reveal defects, if they are available.
6.3 Hard hats, subjected to strikes, as well as those which have damaged frame or inner
gear should be replaced.

6.4 During the operation, if necessary, hard hats can be subjected to sanitization through
immersion of hard hats into 3-5 % solution of chloramines or 3% solution of chloride lime for
30-60 minutes with the following rinsing with a cold water, wiping and natural drying.

7. MANUFACTURER’S WARRANTY

7.1 Manufacturer guarantees compliance of hard hats with the requirements of the
applicable standard provided for observation of operation, transportation and storage terms.

Warranty period of storage and operation – 2 years beginning from the date of
manufacture.
p. 188 SNT 3.01.03-06

TDS-12.4.089-86

UDC 687.386-783.4:69:006.354 МКС 13.340.01 Group J 07

INTERGOVERNMENTAL STANDARD

Occupational safety standards system

Building

SAFETY BELTS

General technical specifications

This standard is applicable for all strap and non-strap safety belts (Further - belts), used for the
protection of workers when falling down from a big height during the execution of construction
and installation works.

Description of terms, used in this standard, is given in the reference appendix.

1. Basic parameters

1.1 Belts should be adjustable in length and provide a waistline from 640 to 1500 mm.
Dimension type of the belts is established by the standards or technical specifications for the
belts of certain structures.

1.2 The width of the belt straps, carrying the load, should not be less than 50 mm and 80 mm
for the strapless belts in the back.

1.3 The lifeline length is also established by the standard or technical specifications for the
belts of certain structures.
1.4 The weight of the belt must not exceed 2100 gm.

2. Technical requirements

2.1 Specifications
2.1.1 Belts are to be manufactured in compliance with requirements of the applicable
standard, standards or technical specifications.
Safety requirements, taking into account the specific character or using belts during the
execution of construction and installation works, must be established by the standards or
technical specifications for the belts of certain structures.

2.1.2 Belts should be manufactured in climatic executions of U and CL as per TDS-15150-


69, with the limitation of the lower temperature range up to 40˚C for the execution of
U.
Climatic execution of belt must be specified in the standard or technical specifications for the
belts of certain structures.

2.1.3 Static breaking load on the belt should not be less than 7000 Н (700 kilogram-force).
2.1.4 The belt should be able to sustain a dynamic load, occurring during the fall of objects,
weighing 100 kg from the height, equal to the length of two lifelines.
2.1.5 Dynamic force with a protective action for strapless and strap belt, having only
shoulder straps, should not exceed 4000 H (400 kilogram-force), whereas for strap
belt, having shoulder and leg straps, - 6000 H (600 kilogram-force).
2.2 Requirements made for materials and component units
2.2.1 Synthetic materials, used for the manufacture of load-bearing parts (belt, straps) and
lifeline, are expected to sustain a static breaking load of not less than 15000 H (1500
kilogram-force), of damper – 10000 H (1000 kilogram-force).
2.2.2 Load bearing parts of belt made of fabrics should be wholly cut
2.2.3 Fabric materials of belts are to be painted in bright color.
p. 189 SNT 3.01.03-06

TDS-12.4.089-86

2.2.4 For the manufacture of belts, one should use materials and agents, approved by the
state sanitary control authorities of the Soviet Socialist Union.
2.2.5 Carbine must ensure a quick and reliable locking and unlocking with one hand in a
warm gauntlet. The durability of a cycle “locking and unlocking” should not be
longer than 3 s.
2.2.6 Carbine should have a safety unit, which excludes its accidental opening. Lock and
fuse of carbine should be locked automatically.
2.2.7 Effort, required for the opening of carbine should be not less than 29,4 H (3 kilogram-
force) and not exceeding 78,4 H (8 kilogram-force).
2.2.8 Lifeline, used in production of fire works (electric and wiring, gas cutting and so on)
should be made of steel rope or chain.
When using another type of material for the manufacture of lifeline, the terms of its safe use
should be developed in standards or technical specifications for the belts of certain structures.

2.2.9 Every lifeline made of steel chain before it is attached to the belt should be tested
under the load of 700 kg.
2.2.10 Metal parts of the belt must have anti-corrosion coating (zinc, chromatin or cadmic
chromatin as per TDS-9.301-86.
2.2.11 Metal parts should not have any cracks, blister, tears and burrs. Sharp edges are not
acceptable.
2.2.12 The support of the belt, made of artificial polymer materials, preventing the sweat
evaporation, should have holes for ventilation.
2.3 Marking
2.3.1 Marking of belts is made in compliance with the requirements of TDS-12.4.115-82.
2.3.2 Every belt should have:

Trademark of the enterprise – manufacturer;

Size and type of belt;

Quality (control) department’s mark

Indication of standard or technical specifications.

The location of marking should be specified in the standards or technical specifications for belts
of concrete types.

2.4 Package
2.4.1 Belts should be shipped in boxes as per TDS-2991-85 or bags as per TDS-19317-75,
covered from inside with a wrapping paper – as per TDS-8273-75. Gross weight
should not be more than 50 kg.
2.4.2 Transport marking of tare – as per TDS-14192-77.
2.4.3 Every belt should have its own operating instructions manual.

3. Acceptance
3.1 Belts are subjected to hand-over, periodic and model tests.

3.2 Acceptance of belts is made in batches. The batch includes belts of one and the same
structure, manufactured according to one and the same technology and from materials of one and
the same type and quality. The scope of batch should not be less than 100, and not exceeding 500
belts.

3.3 Hand-over tests of belts are carried out by the enterprise-manufacturer in scope and
content, showed in the table and technological normative documents for belts of concrete
structure.

3.4 Periodic tests of belts are carried out by the enterprise-manufacturer or specialized
laboratory on samples of belts of one structure, selected with random order from batches, which
p. 190 SNT 3.01.03-06

TDS-12.4.089-86

passed hand-over tests, in scope and content, showed in the table and technological
normative documents for belts of concrete structure, not less than twice a year.

3.5 Model tests of belts are conducted in case of altering the structure or technology of
their manufacture, as well as replacement of materials for the manufacture of load bearing belt
parts. At that, belts are checked against all parameters of technical requirements of the applied
standard and standards or technical specifications for belts of concrete structure.

Model tests are carried out with the compulsory participation of representatives of
organization-designer and specialized laboratory of occupational safety.

3.6 In case of obtaining not satisfying results on one of the requirements even while
testing one belt, additional trial of the doubled amount of belts, selected from the same batch is
conducted. If, the additional trial gives unsatisfactory results, the batch is recognized to be
defective.

Type of tests Items of technical Number of belts tested


requirements
Hand-over Periodic Model tests

1. Visual inspection 2.2.2, 2.2.3, 2.2.6, All belts 6 18

2.2.10, 2.2.11

2. Checking the basic 3 6 18


dimensions
1.1 – 1.3

3. Weight determination 1.4 3 6 18

4. Static tests: 2.2.9 All belts -


lifeline from steel chain

2.1.3 3* 3* 3*

5. Dynamic test: 3*

- Without force 2.1.4 3* -


registration
- With force registration 3* and when
putting into
production
2.1.5 - 3*

6. Checking the carbine 2.2.7 3 3 18


opening force
*belts, subjected to tests, cannot be send to the customer.

4 METHODS OF CONTROL

4.1 When carrying out hand-over, periodic and model tests, the following is to be
examined:

Linear dimensions (it. 1.1-1.3) – with measuring instruments as per TDS-427-75;

Weight of belt (it.1.4) – on scales with drift not more than ±1% b measurement range not more
than 5 kg.

Carbine opening force (it. 2.2.7) – dynamometer with measurement limit from 10 to 100 H (from
1 to 10 kilogram-force) as per TDS-13837-79;

Visual inspection – belt’s outer appearance.

4.2 Testing of belts with static and dynamic loads is carried out on special stands in
compliance with diagrams on drawing 1-3.

Equipment, gear and other accessories, necessary for the tests, as well as the basic safety
rules during testing should be specified in the standards or technical specifications for belts of
concrete structure.

4.3 Compliance of belt with item 2.1.2 is checked according to standards or technical
specifications for belts of concrete structure, as well as on the basis of working drawings. These

p. 191 SNT 3.01.03-06


TDS-12.4.089-86

documents should specify the climatic execution of belt as per TDS-15150-69 and
climatic regions, where it is allowed to be used.

4.4 Testing of belts using static load until destroyed to check the compliance with the
requirements of item 2.1.3 is conducted with the help of cable hoist on the basis of a diagram on
drawing 1. Value of breaking strength of belts elements is fixated by a dynamometer.

The belt is recognized to have successfully passed the test, if the damage of one of the
load bearing elements (carbine, carrying belt, lifeline, raw yarn and side ring) occured when
using the load, not less than 7000-0+10 H (700-0+10 kilogram-force).

4.5 Testing of belt with dynamic load to check the compliance with the requirements of
item 2.1.4 is exercised using 100 kg load with the constant hardness in the measurement range,
falling down freely from the height, equal to the length of two lifelines, on the basis of a
diagram, shown on the drawing 2.

The belt is recognized to have successfully passed the test, if none of its parts was not
damaged, except those, damage of which is envisaged by the protective functions of the belt.

4.6 Testing of belt in terms of its compliance with requirements of item 2.1.5 is done on
the basis of method, described in item 4.5. At that, to determine the tension force of the belt
lifeline a sensor, located between the telescopic rod and carbine (diag.3) is used, whereas the
height of load falling is taken equal to 2,0 m.

Diagram of test, using static load.


1-support; 2-dynamometer; 3-special clamp; cylindrical roll; 5-belt; 6-lifeline; 7-
carbine; 8-tension cable; 9-guide pulley; 10-cable hoist.
Drawing 1.

The belt is recognized to have successfully passed the test, if the force, registered by the sensor is
not exceeding the value, specified in the item 2.1.5.

4.7 Static breaking force of materials, used for the manufacture of belt in compliance
with item 2.2.1, is determined on the basis of certificate, given by the factory-supplier of the
corresponsing material.

In case such certificate is not available, laboratory tests of samples are exercised
according to the method, explained in standards or technical specifications for materials of
concrete type.

p. 192 SNT 3.01.03-06

TDS-12.4.089-86

Diagram of tests with dynamic load without lifeline tension force registration

1- tripper; 2-split eye bar; 3-belt ring; 4-load; 5-belt; 6-lifeline; 7-carbine; 8-rod; 9-hard
support
Drawing 2.

4.8 Testing of metal surface quality in terms of its compliance with the item 2.210 is
exercised as per TDS-9.302-79.
4.9 Methods of belt test and equipment, gear and tools used for that, can be changed with
consideration of the technology, available at the enterprise-manufacturer with the
compulsory term of preserving the direction of force impact on the belt elements, which
must be maximally approached to the terms of its use. These changes must be agreed on
the stage of development of technical specifications for the belts of concrete structure.

p. 193 SNT 3.01.03-06

TDS-12.4.089-86

Diagram of test with dynamic load with the lifeline

tension force registration


1- tripper; 2-split eye bar; 3-belt ring; 4-load; 5-belt; 6-sensor; 7-lifeline; 8-carbine; 9-
rod; 10-hard support
Drawing 3.

5. TRANSPORTATION AND STORAGE

5.1 Belts are to be transported in closed or covered with waterproof material transport
vehicles in compliance with the shipment rules, applicable for a particular transport means.

5.2 Belts are to be stored in ventilated premises in suspended way or placed on the rack in
one row. The premise must be dry (humidity not exceeding 70%) and protected from the direct
sun beams.

5.3 It is not allowed to keep the belts close to the heat-generating devices, acids, alkali,
solvents, petrol and oils.

6. OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS

6.1 Operating Instructions and safe operation rules for the belt must be developed and
approved in the established order.

6.2 Customer is liable to ensure the use of belts in strict accordance with the instructions,
developed for the belts of concrete type.

6.3 customer should subject every belt to static load test, equal to 4000 H (400 kilogram-
force), before use, as well as during the use every 6 months.

Method of testing is to be specified in the standards or technical specifications for belts of


concrete structures.
p. 194 SNT 3.01.03-06

TDS-12.4.089-86

7. MANUFACTURER’S WARRANTY
7.1 Manufacturer guarantees compliance of belts with the requirements of the applicable
standard provided for observation of operation, transportation and storage terms.

7.2 Warranty period of storage and operation – 2 years beginning from the date of
manufacture.

Appendix 1

Reference

Terms and their explanation

Term Explanation

Safety belt Means of individual protection of people when falling from a


height

Strapless belt Belt, having one element, enveloping the waist and chest

Strap belt Belt, having two and more elements (straps), enveloping the
body

Protective function of belt Height of fall limitation, reduction to safe size of dynamic load,
acting on the body when falling

Shock absorber Belt element, intended for the reduction of dynamic load with
the protective action to the set level

Lifeline Belt element, intended for height of fall limitation with


protective action

Carbine Belt element, intended for fastening to the structures

Load-bearing part, straps Belt elements, receiving and distributing the load, affecting the
body with protective action
p. 195 SNT 3.01.03-06

TDS-12.4.107-82

UDC 658.382.3:669.14-427.4:006.354 МКС 13.340.01


Group J 07

INTERGOVERNMENTAL STANDARD
Occupational safety standards system

Building

SAFETY ROPES

General safety specifications

This standard is spread on steel safety ropes (further ropes), located horizontally or under
angle to 7º to horizon, in production of building and assembly works for protection of workers in
fall from a height, and establish general operating specifications to the them, as well as terms of
their use.

1. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

1.1 Ropes should be manufactured in accordance with


specifications of this standard and standards or technical
terms on ropes of concrete structures.
Safety requirements taking into account specifics of ropes use in their mounting and
exploitation should be provided by standards or technical terms on ropes.

1.2 Rope should be supplied with facility for its fastening to


constructive elements of building and facilities and tension.
1.3 Structure of rope details should exclude opportunity of damage of
worker’s hand.
Rope details shouldn’t have tears, burrs, rough edges, cracks and cissing.

Schematic installation diagram of safety rope.

Higher of bearing area for foot


On the level of bearing area for foot

p. 196 SNT 3.01.03-06

TDS-12.4.107-82
1 – steel rope; 2 – fastening details of steel rope with tensioning device; 3 – constructive
element of building, to which rope is fixed in the exploitation process; 4 – sharp angles liner
in bending places of constructive elements by steel rope; 5 - safety hook; 6 - erection loop in
factory-made ferroconcrete elements of constructions and special facility for rope fastening.

1.4 Mass of rope should be set by standards or technical terms on concrete


construction mass; meanwhile every erection unit or detail of rope should have mass
no more 20 kg.
1.5 Rope should be set higher and lower of bearing area for foot.
In passage of workers by bottom chord of truss or girder of rope should be set on a height no
less than 1,5 meters from foot bearing area, and on passage by crane girder – no more 1,2 meters.

1.6. Length of rope between points of its fastening (extent of span) should be assigned

subject to size of constructive elements of buildings and facilities, on which it will be fixed.

Intermediate bearing that should be set in length of rope more 12 meters should have
distance more than 12 meters; meanwhile surface of intermediate bearing with which rope have a
contact shouldn’t have rough edges.

Intermediate bearing and its attachment fittings should be calculated on vertical static load no
less 500 kilogram/force.

1.7. Steady-state breaking force of rope, set on height more 1,2 m from foot bearing area of
worker shouldn’t be no less 40400 H (4040 kg/f), and rope set on height till 1,2 meters – less
56000 H (5600 kg/f).

1.8. It should be used steel ropes with diameter 8,8 mm by TDS-3077-80, with diameter
9,1mm by TDS 2688-80 or diameter 9,7 by TDS-3069-80 for manufacturing of safety rope
set on height 1,2 meters, and steel ropes with diameter 10,5 mm by TDS-3069-80 or by TDS-
3069-80 and diameter 11,0 by TDS-2688-80 for rope set on height till 1,2 meters; meanwhile
it should be used steel ropes of marking group no less 1558 M Pa (160 kilogram/force/mm²).

Use of ropes from other materials should be justified by standards or technical specifications
on ropes of concrete constructions.

1.9. It is necessary to preliminary stretched rope on effort from 1000 H (100 kg/f) subject to
distance between rope attachment fittings in mounting of it higher foot bearing area.

Prestretching of rope should be conducted till mounting it on intermediate bearings.

Effort on handle in rope tightening shouldn’t exceed 160 H (16 kg/f).


Prestretching value should be checked by sag value in the middle of span of tightened rope in
accordance with table.

Distance between Prestretching of rope Checked value of rope sag in the middle of
attachment points, value, span, mm,

m H (kg-f) In rope with diameter, mm

8,8; 9,1; 9,7 10,5; 11,0

12 1000 (100) 55 75

24 1000 (100) 220 300

36 2000 (200) 240 340

48 3000 (300) 280 400

60 4000 (400) 330 480

p. 197 SNT 3.01.03-06

TDS-12.4.107-82
Relations between values of prestretching and rope sag in the middle of span for ropes,
not mentioned in table, should be set by standards and technical specifications on ropes of
concrete constructions.

1.10. Rope shouldn’t be preliminary starched in mounting of it on bearing foot area;


meanwhile length of rope should be selected in such way that fixed at the ends and stretched in
the middle by effort 100 H (10 kg/f) rope shouldn’t be beyond the scope of constructive
elements, on which it will be mounted.

1.11. Details of steel ropes fastening, as well as constructive elements of buildings and
other facilities, to which they will be fixed, should be calculated on horizontally applied load,
equaled to 22000 H (2200kg/f) and operating during 0.5 s.

1.12. Details of rope should keep their protective and exploitation features in temperature
from minus 45º to plus 50º and relative humidity till100 %.

1.13. Rope fastener means, that could be corrode should have anticorrosive covers.

Signal coloring – by TDS – 12.026 – 76.

1.14. Instruction manuals for ropes should be developed and approved in established
order.

1.15. Rope should be tested by static load on methods, stated in p.3.4. before exploitation
and in 6 moths in the process of exploitation.

1.16. Term used in this standard and its explanation is given in reference appendix.

2. ACCEPTANCE RULES

2.1. Rope should be put on acceptance, periodical and model tests that will be conducted
by plant-manufacturer and consumer.

Acceptance of ropes is conducted by lots. Number of ropes in lot should be no more 200 pieces.

2.2. Each rope should be put on acceptance tests on compliance of requirements of


subparagraph 1.2., 1.3., 1.13 and 4.1.

2.3. Test on compliance of rope to requirements of point 1.4. of this standard is conducted
by the way of weighting by TDS – 13882-68. 3 % of ropes, but no less 3 pieces are selected for it
from each lot.

3. INSPECTION METHODS

3.1. Each rope mounting altitude from bearing foot area (p. 1.5.) is determined by the way of
measurement with metallic ruler by TDS-427-75, in attachment points at the ends and distance
between attachment points in rope length more 12 meters (p. 1.6.) – steel tape measure by TDS
-7505-80.
3.2. Values of steady-state breaking forces of steel rope (p. 1.7), as well as corresponding
them sizes of rope section by standards, mentioned in p. 1.8. are established by results of
mechanical tests in acts-certificates.

3.3. Value of each rope prestretching (p. 1.9.) is determined by the way of measurement with
metal ruler by TDS – 42-75 value of sagging in the middle of rope span, set in working position.

Results of measurement should correspond to data given in table of this standard, meanwhile
limit deviation from controlled quantity +-15 mm.

Rope should be released from fastening and intermediate bearings in measurement of rope sag
value.

3.4. Compliance of mounted rope in working condition to requirements of p. 1.11. should be


determined by the way of its static loading in the middle of span with mass 400 kg, that is
put to mounted rope in working condition through flexible ropes (capronic or steel) or steel
rod.
3.5. Test of rope in the process of exploitation is conducted by methods, stated in p. 3.4.

p. 198 SNT 3.01.03-06

TDS-12.4.107-82

3.6. Rope is inspected after tests by p.3.4. and 3.5. Rope is recognized to have to passed a test
if in result of external inspection damages and interstice are found out. Meanwhile
exploitation of rope is permitted in the case if constructive elements of buildings, facilities
and other structures to which it fastened in process of exploitation haven’t damages and
interstice.
3.7. Test of rope by p. 2.2. , 2.3. , 3.2. is conducted by plant-manufacturer. Control of
compliance of rope to requirements, given in p. 1.2., 1.3., 1.13., 3.1., 3.3. and 3.4. and also
their tests by 3.4. and 3.5. is carried out enterprise that exploit rope.

4. MARKING, PACKING,

TRANSPORTATION AND STORAGE

4.1. Each rope should have marking. Marking should include:

 Trademark (or brief name of enterprise-manufacturer);


 Significance of static breaking effort;
 Date of manufacturing (month, year);
 Date of test (month, year);
 Designation of standard or technical specifications by which rope is manufactured.
4.2. Places of marking, requirements to package and storage of ropes should be established by
standards or technical specifications on ropes of concrete constructions.
p. 199 SNT 3.01.03-06

TDS-12.4.107-82
Term used in this standard,

and its explanation

Safety rope – device, intended for fastening of one or more operating of snaps life belt in
implementation of jobs on a height, consisting from flexible steel rope, located horizontally or
with a tip till 7º, ends of which immovable fastened to constructive elements of building and
facilities directly or through special elements.

p. 200 SNT 3.01.03-06

TDS-21807-76
UDC 621.86.063:693.32(083.74) МКС 53.020 Group G 45

INTERGOVERNMENTAL STANDARD

PORTABLE BUNKERS (BUCKETS) WITH CAPACITY 2 M³ CONCRETE MIXTURE

General specifications

This standard is spread on portable bunkers (buckets) (in what follows bunkers) with capacity till
2 m³ rotating and antirotating, using in construction for acceptance and transportation of concrete
mixture by cranes to place of construction concreting.

1. CLASSIFICATION

1.1. Bunkers are classified byL


constructive decision;

climatic implementation;

terms of completion.

1.1.2. By constructive decision bunkers are subdivided into types:

R – rotating;

A – anitrotating.

1.1.3. By climatic implementation for:

Districts with temperate climate;

CC – districts with cold climate.

1.1.4. By terms of completion:

V – with vibrator;

Without vibrator.
2. BASIC PARAMETERS AND SIZES

2.1. Basic parameters and sizes of portable rotating and antirotating bunkers fro concrete mixture
should correspond to mentioned on drawings 1, 2 and in table 1.

p. 201 SNT 3.01.03-06

TDS-21807-76
Rotating bunker

1 – vibrator

Drawing 1

p. 202 SNT 3.01.03-06

TDS-21807-76
Antirotating bunker

Drawing 2

Table 1

Type rated weight- Allowabl Rated Sizes, mm Mass


of capacity, carryin e disturbin (witho
a a1 b D L
bunke g overload, g force of ut
r m³ ability, %, not vibrator vibrato
kg more H (kg/f) r, kg,
not
more)

0.5 0.5 1250 5 1960 880 400 900 - 1100 325


(200)
1.0 2500 132 600 870 - 130 500
0 0

1.0 1.6 4000 142 600 840 - 130 630


0 0

2.0 5000 264 800 - 180 900


0 0

1.6 0.5 1250 - - 1100 129 230


0

1.0 2500 - - 150 155 350


0 0

Examples of conditional designations:

a) rotating bunkers with capacity 1 m³, without vibrator, for districts with temperate climate:
Bunker RB – 1, 0 TDS-21087-76

The same, for districts with clod climate:

Bunker RBCC – 1,0 TDS - 21807-76

p. 203 SNT 3.01.03-06

TDS-21807-76

The same, with vibrator for districts with temperate climate

Bunker RBV – 1,0 TDS -21807-76

The same, for districts with cold climate

Bunker RBVCC - 1,0 TDS -21807-76

b) Antirotating bunker with capacity 1 m³, without vibrator, for districts with temperate
climate:
Bunker AB - 1,0 TDS -21807-76

The same for districts with cold climate:

Bunker ABCC - 1,0 TDS -21807-76

The same with vibrator for districts with temperate climate:

Bunker ABV - 1,0 TDS -21807-76

The same, for districts with cold climate:

Bunker ABVCC - 1,0 TDS -21807-76

(Redraft, N1)

3. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
3.1. Portable bunkers for concrete mixture should be manufactured in compliance with
requirements of this standard, climatic implementations by TDS – 15150-69, by drawings,
approved in established order, as well by models of enterprise-manufacturer.

3.2. Limit deviations in sizes of portable bunkers are specified in drawings.

3.3. Latch of bunker should ensure:

a) Thorough blocking of discharge opening;

b) Opportunity of concrete mixture portion unloading;

c) Free (without jamming) turn on bearings;

d) Effort on handle not more 60 H (6 kg/f).

Latch should exclude opportunity of bunker self-unloading.

3.4. All threaded connection should be locked.


3.5. (Excluded, change № 1)
3.6. Basic details of bunkers should be manufactured from materials, specified in table
2.

Table 2

Name of details Material for districts

Temperate climate Cold climate

Body ВСтЗпс by TDS – 380-71 ВСтЗпс by TDS380-71

Loop Steel 20 by TDS-1050-74 15XСНД, 09 Г2С by TDS-


19282-73

Latch ВСтЗпс by TDS-380-71 ВСтЗпс by TDS-380-71

It is allowed to manufacture main details of bunkers from steel of other kinds, ensuring mehnical
features not lower than from steels of specifies marks.

(Redraft, N1)

3.7. Sizes of bunker loops should correspond to sizes of pull hooks by TDS-25573-82.
3.8. Loops (basic metal and weld joints) of bunkers should have safety factor relative
to yield point not less 5.
3.9. Permissible parameters and continuation of vibration influence on operating level
of bunker shouldn’t exceed permissible norms by TDS-17770-86.
3.10 Types and constructive elements of joints of welded connections should be taken
by TDS-5264-80 or TDS-8713-79.

. 204 SNT 3.01.03-06

ТDS-21807-76
3.11 Cracks, lack of penetration, burn-through in welded joints are not allowed.

3.12 Welding joints before painting must be accepted by technical control of enterprise-
manufacturer.
3.13 Outer surfaces of movable bunkers for concrete mixture must be covered with enamel PF-
115 by TDS-6465-76 for exploitation on open air in industrial atmosphere of moderate climatic
region by TDS-9.032-74, IV class, it is allowed to paint with other enamels by quality not lower
than abovementioned.
(changed version , changed №1).
3.14 Calculation of welding joints and painting of movable rotary and non-rotary bunkers for
concrete mixture, employed in regions with cold climate must be complied with requirements
TDS-14892-69.
3.15 All finished but not painted surfaces must be covered with solid oil J by TDS-1033-79.
(changed version, changed №1).

4. Completeness

4.1 Bunkers are delivered in arranged form.


4.2 In agreement with customer bunkers are delivered with vibrator or without it.
4.3 Passport must be attached to each bunker, including exploitation instruction. (Changed
version, changed №1).

5. Reception rules

5.1 Every bunker must be approved by technical control of venture-manufacturer.


5.2 At bunker reception checked: outlook;
Sixes of bunker, rightness of installation of fixers and loops; density for
covering discharge opening of bolt; probability of self opening of bolt;
quality of welding joints; quality of painting surfaces.
5.3 Consumer has right to conduct test of bunker’s compliance with requirements of present
standard, keeping selection order of samples and control order.
5.4 For control checking one bunker is selected from every type size. Not more than 10 bunkers
are considered as batch.
5.5 At selection, besides requirements, pointed out in p. 5.2, toughness of loops and their
welding joints for loading are checked, exceeding admitted by 25 %.
5.6 If at control checking one bunker will not satisfy requirements of present standard, consumer
has right to test very bunker of present batch.
5.7 By demand of customer venture-producer must give acts for testing of bunkers.

6. Control methods

6.1 Evaluation of exterior view (and shape) of bunkers is conducted by mean of


inspection.
(changed version, changed №1).
6.2 Rightness of body sizes, load lifting loops, bolt and installation of device, including its
spontaneous opening is checked up by metal tape measure of 2 class with accuracy by TDS-
7502-80.
6.3 Density for covering loading hole is checked at fully closed bolt at existence of gap between
body of bunker and bolt. Gap must be not more than 3 mm.
6.4 Control of welding joints must be held by TDS-3242-79. Kind of control – technical
inspection.
6.5 Quality control of welding joints is checked up by TDS-3242-69 (table 1, p.1).
6.6 quality of painting covering is defined by TDS-523367.
6.3-6.4. (changed version, changed №1).

p. 205 SNT 3.01.03-06


ТDS-21807-76

7. Marking, packing, transportation and keeping

7.1 On upper part of bunker must be attached metal square plate by TDS-12969-67 и TDS-
12971-67, containing:
Trade mark or short name of producer; name of bunker in compliance with present
standard; weight of bunker;
Maximum capacity lifting;
year and month of production.
7.2 Bunkers must be transported without packing with any means of transport, keeping rules for
freight transportation on relevant vehicles.
7.3 Bunkers must be kept on wooden laying in not more than 2 lines.

8. Safety measures

8.1 Vibrator must be switched on to line with not more than 42V through 3-pin plug. (changed
version, changed №1).

9. Guarantees of manufacturer

9.1 Manufacturer must guarantee compliance of bunker with requirements of present standard at
keeping transportation conditions, keeping and exploitation, fixed in standard.
9.2 Warranty term of bunker service is not more than 1 year from exploitation but not more than
18 months since shipping from venture- manufacturer.
p. 206 SNT 3.01.03-06

ТDS-23407-78

UDK 62-758;624.05;006.354 MKC 13.100 Group J 07

Interstate standard
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
---
FENCINGS FOR BUILDING SITES
Specification

Present standard is spread out to fencings, intended for building sites. .


Standard is not spread out for fencings:
Intended for preventing of people’s falling down from height at erection of various
premises;
Set for outlining construction areas, protected by terms of special regime.

1. Classification

1.1 Fencings by functional destination are divided into:


Protecting-guiding – intended for preventing access for alien people to area with
dangerous and harmful productive factors and ensuring guide of material values of construction;
Protecting - – intended for preventing access for alien people to area with dangerous and
harmful productive factors and ensuring guide of material values of construction;
Signaling – intended for warning about area boundaries with dangerous and harmful
productive factors.
1.2 Fencings by construction design are divided into panel, panel standing,
standing (draft 1a, б, в).
Panels of fencings could be compact and evacuated.
Protecting-guiding fencings could be just compact.
1.3 Fencings could be additional elements as protective canopy, handholds,
pavement, kneepiece (draft 2) and fencings without additional elements.

2. Technical requirements

2.1 General requirements


2.1.1 Fencing must be complied with requirements of present standard and working
drafts, approved in fixed order as well as samples (model).
2.1.2 Fencings must envisage gates for machines and people.
2.2 Requirements for construction.
2.2.1 Fencings must be demountable with unified elements, joints and fixing details
2.2.2 Height of panels must be:
Protecting-guiding (with canopy and without canopy) fencings of construction areas - 2,0
м;
Protective (without canopy) fencings at construction sites - 1.6 м; the same with canopy -
2,0 м;
Protective fencing fields of production activities. - 1,2 м.
Height of uprights for signaling fencing must be 0,8 м.
2.2.3 Panels of fencing must be square. Length of panels must be 1,2; 1,6; 2,0 м.
Distance between uprights of signaling fencing must be more than 6,0 м.
2.2.4 In rare panels of fencing distance in light between filling details must be 80 - 100
мм.
2.2.5 Gaps in pavement laying are allowed to be not more than 5 мм.
2.2.6 Canopy and asphalt road of fencing must be made in the form of separate panels of
square shape. Length of canopy and pavement panels must be equaled to length of fencing
panels.
p. 207 SNT 3.01.03-06

ТDS-23407-78

2.2.7 Protective canopy must be set on the top of fencing towards horizon under angle
20° to the side of asphalt rode.
2.2.8 Panels of canopy must provide overlap of pavement and come out to its edge for
50-100 мм.

Diagrams of fencings
Panel fencings

Panel-standing fencingsStanding
fencings fencingsСтоечные ограждения

Draft 1

Fencings with elements


1-fencing panel ; 2crippling of panel ; 3-support (ground beam ); 4-pavement panel ;
5horizontal element of handrails; 6-guard bar ; 7-handrail upright ; 8-canopy panel ;
9knee brace of canopy; 10-fencing upright; 11-capron rope, wire
2.2.9 Construction of pavement panels must provide passage for people with not less than
1,2m width.
2.2.9 Construction of canopy panels and pavements must provide outflow of water from
their surface in exploitation process.
2.2.10Pavements of fencings, located at construction fields must be equipped with
handrails, fixed from the side of transport movement. .

p. 208 SNT 3.01.03-06

ТDS-23407-78

2.2.11Construction of handrails must consist of uprights fixed to upper part of fencing or


canopy as well as guardbar and intermediate horizontal element, replaced at the height of 1,1
and 0,5 м from pavement level.
Guardbars must be fixed to uprights from interior side.
2.2.13Technological access of geometric elements of fencing must be not lower than 6-
class with accuracy by TDS-21779-76.
2.2.14The way of joining fencing elements provides convenience of their mounting,
durability at exploitation, simplicity of changing at repairing.
2.2.15Fixing construction of fencing elements must provide to install it on area, having
inclination 10 %.
2.2.16Elements of wooden fencing, adjoined with ground must be anti-septated. Metal
joining details and fixings must be anti septated. Metal joining details and fixings must have
anti-corrosion protection.
2.2.17Fencing must be painted in accordance with approved standard. Signaling painting
must be done by TDS-12.4.026-76.
2.2.18On the elements and details of fencing it is not allowed occurrence of sharp edges,
rough edges, and rubs could cause traumatism.
2.3 Requirements of resistance to external action. .
2.3.1 Normative-distributed loading for pavement panels must be 200 кf/м2.
2.3.2 Velocity wind pressure must be taken:
For fencing, exploited in Maritime Territory, Kamchatsk and Sakhalin oblasts, Pacific and
North oceans - 100 кf/м2;
For fencings, exploited in other regions of the country - 35 кf/м2.
2.3.3 Weight of snow cover for 1 м2 area for horizontal projection of canopy must be
taken:
For fencing, exploited in Maritime Territory, Kamchatsk and Sakhalin oblasts, Pacific and
North oceans - 150 кf/м2;
For fencings, exploited in other regions of the country - 70 кf/м2;
Coefficient of overloading at defining calculated snow load must be equaled to 1,25.
2.4 Reliability requirements
2.4.1 Service terms of fencing elements (besides panels of pavements) not less than 10
years. Service terms of pavement panels are not less than 5 years.
2.5 Requirements to materials
2.5.1Materials, applied for making fencing must be complied with relevant standards and
technical terms.
2.5.2Compliance of materials must be approved by certificate of the plant-producer, at
their absence-testing of plant lab.
2.5.3Solid panels of fencing, canopy panels and pavement, upright, handrails, knee brace
must be made from wood of 3rd sort. Metal is allowed to apply at making details for joints and
fastening.
3. Acceptance rules

3.1 Elements of fencing must be approved by authorities of technical control of venture-


producer.
3.2 Reception of fencings is done selectively in 5% sum from batch by means of
inspection of elements and checking of sizes.
Batch is considered the number of similar elements, made by one technology within one
shift.
3.3 Customer has right to test for which 5% of fencing elements are selected. In case of
disparity of even one element repeated checking is performed.
At unsatisfactory results of checking of double quantity of the batch reception is not
envisaged.
p. 209 SNT 3.01.03-06

ТDS-23407-78

4.Methods of quality control

4.1 Checking of geometric sizes of elements and details of fencing must be done be means of
measuring tool and standards, providing accuracy, mentioned in drafts.
4.2 Checking of color and quality of paint, existence of anti-corrosion protection and anti-septic
soaking is made by visual inspection.

5. Marking, packing, transportation and storage


5.1 Each element of fencing must have marking in which mentioned:
Trade mark of venture-producer;
Number of batch;
Due date;
weight (for elements with weight more than 50 кg).
5.2 Marking method must be given in working drafts of fencings.
5.3 Single-types of fencing must be delivered to customer in bags. Overall dimensions and
weight of bags must provide perseverance of fencings at their transportation and possibility of
mechanized loading on transport vehicles and shipping at the place of fencing installation.
5.4 At transportation and keeping of fencings at the places of mounting joints must be protected
from pollution but screwing and hinged joints are covered with preserved smearing.
5.5 Panels, protective canopy, pavement boards, gate, door must be kept in vertical position but
uprights, handrails, glaciers and knee brace must be laid on wood plates with not more than 1,5
м. Height.

6. Warranty of producer

6.1Venture-manufacturer must accompany each batch of fencing with passport which contains:
Name and address of plant-producer; number of
batch;
Marking of standard and specification;
Name, number and weight of elements;
Instructions on mounting of fencing and if necessary demounting;
date of passport issuing.
6.2 Producer guarantees compliance of fencings with requirements of present standard at keeping
terms of transportation and keeping, mentioned in standard.

p. 210 SNT 3.01.03-06

ТDS-24258-88

UDК 69.057.6:006.354 МКС 91.220 Group J 30

Interstate standard

DIFFERENT TYPES OF SCAFFOLDING

General specifications

Present standard is spread out for scaffolding types, implemented in the production process of
construction-mounting works at erection, reconstruction, repairing of premises and buildings for
organization of working places at height.
Standard does not concern constructions, combining functions of scaffolding with any other
functions or used for lifting and reception of freights as well as base mounting of scaffolding
vehicles and hydraulic drive of scaffolding types.

Explanation to terms, used in present standard is given in appendix 1.

1. Types and main parameters

Types and main parameters of scaffolding types must be complied with given table.

p. 211 SNT 3.01.03-06

ТDS-23407-78

2. Technical requirements

2.1 Scaffoldings must be elaborated and made in compliance with requirements of this standard,
standards for scaffolding means of concrete type TDS-15.001; by instructive documentation,
approved in established order. Scaffolding means with machine drive for shifting working place
at height must be complied with requirements «Rules for safety exploitation of freightlifting
cranes» of state technical inspection of the USSR.
2.2 Characteristics
2.2.1 Scaffolding means must be elaborated and made in climatic performance U or ХL by TDS-
15150.
2.2.2 At elaboration of scaffolding means must be guided by СНиП 2.01.07-85, СНиП И-23-81,
СНиП 2.03.06-85, СНиП П-25-80.
2.2.3 Scaffolding must stand loading from own weight and temporary loading of people,
materials, wind.
2.2.4 At elaboration of construction documentation must be considered:
reliability coefficient on loading:
1.2– from people and
materials;
1,1 –from own weight;
1.3 – from wind;
Reliability coefficient by destination:
7 – at calculation of brackets from steel
rope;
9 – at calculation of gear rope, intended for lifting of people;
4 – at calculation of torsion-bar suspension;
1,5 – at calculation of fixing of scaffolding means to constructions; 3,0 – at calculation of
specific pressure of support on ground; 1,0 – at calculation of other elements; coefficient
of working conditions for construction elements: 0,9 – at calculation of uprights for
firmness; 1,5 – at calculation of fencing handrails: reserve coefficient for tripping:

p. 212 SNT 3.01.03-06

1,4 – at calculation of firmness of self-supporting and movable scaffolding means.


2.2.5 Marks of materials having elements of scaffolding means must be pointed out in
standards and technical terms for scaffolding means of concrete type.
2.2.6.Limit deviations of items’ sizes of scaffolding means must be given in constructive
documentation.
2.2.7 Weight of mounting elements must be not more than:
25 кg – at mounting scaffolding means at height; 50 кg – at mounting scaffolding means on
ground or overlapping.
2.2.8 Value and direction of normative loading for handrail fencing must be pointed out
in standards or technical conditions for scaffolding means of concrete types.
2.2.9 Force on handgrip at winding manual drives of scaffolding means must be not more
than 160 Н (16 кf).
2.2.8 Decrease of weight of scaffolding means from projected must be not more
than 3 %.
2.2.9 For lifting with cranes scaffolding means must be used safety devices.
2.2.10In box and pipe-sized constructions must be considered measures against
accumulation of moisture.
2.2.11Steel constructions of scaffolding means must be primed and painted with painting
materials, corresponded with weak-aggressive environment by СНиП 2.03.11-85.
2.2.12Surface of steel elements for scaffolding must be cleaned before painting up to 4
level by TDS-9.402.
2.2.13Steel items, having contact with construction elements from aluminum alloy
materials must have covering, excluding formation of electric pair between them.
2.2.14Scaffolding means which working floor is located at height 1.3 м and more from
land surface or covering must have breast rail and boarding fencing.
2.2.15Height of fencing is mentioned in standards for scaffolding of concrete type.
Distance between horizontal elements of fencing must be not more than 0.45 м or fencing must
have latticed filling.
2.2.16Scaffolding means with machine drive for shifting working place at height must
have: management apparatus for shifting, located directly on working place, limiter of height
lifting, safety catch, preventing spontaneous dropping of working place.
2.2.17Construction off joints must have fixing devices, protecting them from adjoining.
2.2.18On metal items and elements it is not allowed to have sharp edges, cracks.
2.2.19 Signaling painting of scaffolding means ust be complied with TDS-
12.4.026.
2.3 Complicity
2.3.1 Kit should include: scaffolding mean of concrete type, exploitation instruction
2.4Marking
2.4.1Each scaffolding means must have marking, containing trade mark or name of
plant-producer, number of item or batch, due date.
2.4.2Way, place of marking is mentioned in standards.
2.5 Packing
2.5.1 Way of packing, transport marking is mentioned in standards.
3. Acceptance

3.1 For checking compliance of scaffolding means with requirements of present standard
plant-producer must hold acceptance-delivery, periodical, standard tests.
3.2 Order for tests, volume of batches, composition of tests, employed parameters and
technical features must be mentioned in standards or technical terms for scaffolding means of
concrete standard.
3.3 Plant-producer of scaffolding must make up passport, given in appendix 2.

4. Control methods

4.1 Quality of materials and items must be certificated by plant-producer.

p. 213 CHT 3.01.03-06


TDS-23407-78

4.2 Geometrical sizes of scaffoldings and their elements are checked by TDS-7502, metal ruler
by TDS-427, beam caliper by TDS-166, bevel square by TDS-5378 or other tools, providing
accuracy of measures up to 1 мм and checked by metrological organizations of state standard of
the USSR in compliance with requirements TDS-8.002 MTDS-8.513.
4.3 Weight of scaffoldings must be measured on scales by TDS-23676 or dynamometer by TDS-
13873.
4.4 Quality of welding joints is checked up visually in compliance with TDS-3242.
4.5 Quality of painting is defined visually in compliance with TDS- 9.032.

5. Transportation and storage

5.1 Transportation of scaffoldings must be done by any vehicle that provides their preservation
from mechanical injury, painting injury, dust.
5.2 Scaffoldings must be kept in keeping terms 5 by TDS-15150.

6. Exploitation instructions

6.1 Scaffoldings must be exploited with instruction requirements attached to item and СНиП Ш-
4-80.
6.2 Scaffoldings must be registered in journal in compliance with appendix 3, which must be
kept at every construction site. .
Register number must be fixed on plate to scaffolding.
6.3 Results of acceptance and periodical inspection of scaffoldings must be written in journal in
compliance with appendix 3.
Terms of conduction of examination are mentioned in standards.
7. Warranty of producer

7.1 Producer must guarantee compliance of scaffoldings with requirements of present standard.
7.2 Warranty terms of exploitation is not less than 12 months since beginning of exploitation, at
terms of keeping rules of exploitation by customer, transportation and keeping, established by
present standard.

p. 214 CHT 3.01.03-06


TDS-23407-78

Appendix 1

Reference

Terms and explanations

Terms Explanation
scaffoldings Installation, designed for organization of working places at
production of construction-mounting activities at height or depth
more than 1,3 м from ground level
Self-supporting scaffoldings Installation, having self support in working position and not
demanding fixing to constructions and erections
Attached scaffoldings Installation, which firm position is provided by fixing them to
constructions
Adjustable scaffoldings Installations, shifted from working front by means of crane or
manually.
Movable scaffoldings Installation, moving from working front on wheel supports
Hanging scaffoldings Installation, fixed to constructions by flexible hangings
Up and over scaffoldings Installation stationar5y fixed to constructions with special items
Scaffolding Multitiered construction, designed for organization of working
places on various horizons
board one-tier construction designed for fulfillment of works
demanding shifting of working places
tower Movable construction designed for short-time works at height
Swinging platform Swinging platform with working place, movable along height
Ground(area) Hanging construction designed for formation of working place
in the area of short-time working p laces
ladder Construction designed for people shifting along height and
creation of short-time working places.

p. 215 CHT 3.01.03-06


TDS-23407-78

Attachment 2
required
Passport for scaffoldings of concrete type(Form)

1. General specifications_______________________________________________________
Name-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Organization-designer------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Code of the project----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Plant-manufacturer---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Due Date --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Admitted temperature of environment, °С (minimal and maximum )-------------------------------
Norms of projecting (СНиП, РТМ and others.)---------------------------------------------------------.
Norms of making (TDS, СНиП and others )--------------------------------------------------------------
2. Characteristics and main technical data-----------------------------------------------------------------
Normative loading, Н (кf)-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Maximal height of installation, м______________
Weight, kg------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
3. Data on material of calculated elements

Name of elements of items Material Mark of material Designation of НТД

p. 216 CHT 3.01.03-06


TDS-23407-78

Мас

Producer informs the following:


1._____________________________complied with drafts and ________________________
Name of item
2.Tests are undergone with static load------------------------------------------------------------------kf
Duration of testing ______________________________________________________min.

3._________________________________________________acknowledged as suitable for work


Name of item

Chief engineer--------------------------------------------------
signature

Head of CCD---------------------------------------------------
signature
L.S.
Date
p. 217 CHT 3.01.03-06
TDS-23407-78

Attachment 3

Reference

Form of cover registration for scaffoldings

Journal for registration of scaffoldings

(name of civil-engineering

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-

Organization and its subordination)

Person, responsible for journal registration

Occupation, surname, name, patronymic

Form of journal pages for registration of scaffoldings

Characteristics of scaffoldings

Type and destination. Grade Inventory number Main characteristics


Plant-manufacturer Minimal working temperature Weight, Name of project
of exploitation, C kg organization,
numbers of
working drafts

Data about repairing

Data Inventory number Content of Main (numbers of Name, surname


repairing drafts) and occupation of
a person,
responsible for
repairing

Data on technical
inspection

Registratio Acceptance Form of Results of Conclusio Surname, Signature


n number into inspectio inspection n of name,
of exploitation n suitability occupation
scaffolding to of a
Periodical
s exploitatio person,
inspectio
n responsibl
n and its
e and
reason
taking part
in
inspection

p. 218 CHT 3.01.03-06


TDS-24259-80

UDK 62-
771.001.33:69.057.1:006.354
МКС 91.220
Group J 30

Interstate standard
ASSEMBLING EQUIPMENT FOR TEMPORARY
FASTENING AND ADJUSTING CONSTRUCTION
BUILDINGS
Classification and general technical requirement
Present standard is extended to inventory assembly
equipment FOR TEMPORARY FASTENING AND
ADJUSTING CONSTRUCTION BUILDINGS

1. Classification

1.1 Assembly equipment is classified by: functional


destination;
Number of elements of constructions, fixed by means of fastening, construction design.
1.2 By functional destination assembly equipment is divided: retaining –clippings, tie-
rod, strut;
bounded abut, fixer;
universal (retaining - bounded) – communications, conductors. Terms, used in standard
concerning assembly equipment are given by means of reference appendix.
1.3 By number of constructions, set by means of one adjustment assembly equipment is divided
into:
single;
group.
1.4 By construction design assembly equipment is divided into:
linear;
flat;
spatial .

2.Technical requirements

2.1 Equipment must satisfy requirements of present standard, TDS-12.2.012-75 and standards or
technical conditions for concrete assembly equipment.
2.2 Construction of assembly equipment must provide:
Quick and free fulfillment of operations, connected with installation and adjustment of
construction elements;
Firmness of construction elements before their fastening in accordance with project;
maintainability and interchange of items;
2.3 Exception of jamming and spontaneous disclosure of item’s joints.
Limiting and regulated assembly equipment must provide accuracy of construction adjustment
conditioned by calculation of geometric accuracy,
But not less than 1 class upper of limit deviations, envisaged by construction norms and
rules.
2.4 Weight of assembly equipment set manually must not exceed:
clippings, tie-rod, strut at length up to 3 м - 18 кg;
The same at length up to 6 м -
35 kg;
strut - 5 кg;
clamp - 7 кg;

p. 219 CHT 3.01.03-06


TDS-24259-80
conductors - 50 кg.
2.5 Weight of some items of assembly equipment, mounted manually must not exceed 20 кg but
length-6 м.
2.6 Supporting elements of assembly equipment must be designed for combination of the
following loads:
From mass of set constructions and own mass of fixings with reliability coefficient by loading
1,1;
From regulated screws, jacks with reliability coefficient by loading 1,2;
From influence of wind in compliance with СНиП by loads and influence.
2.7 At calculation of elements of assembly equipment from steel rope must be taken reliability
coefficient not less than 3.
2.8 Seismic loading at calculation of assembly equipment is not considered.
2.9 At projecting steel constructions of assembly equipment must be guided by СНиП on
projecting of steel constructions.
2.10 Not mentioned in drafts limit derivations at making metal elements and items of assembly
equipment must be taken:
Made by means of mechanical work - by 14-th quality class (accuracy class “medium”)
СТ СЭВ 302-76;
made without mechanical work - by 16-th quality class (accuracy class is “rough” ) СТ
СЭВ 302-76;
made by means of stamping -by 2-nd accuracy class TDS-7505-89; made by means of
forging - by TDS-7829-70.
2.11 Welding joints must be complied with TDS-5264-80 and TDS-11534-75.
2.12At making elements of assembly equipment from steel rope splicing of rope is not allowed.
2.13At bending elements of assembly equipment with steel rope ratio of diameter of bending
element to diameter of rope must be not less than 4.
2.14 Efforts on handles at winding separate details of assembly equipment must not exceed 160
Н (16 кf).
2.15 On elements and items of assembly equipment it is not allowed to have sharp edges and
fins. .
2.16 Requirements to materials for making assembly equipment of concrete type must be given
in standards. .
2.17 Color of assembly equipment must be complied with TDS-12.4.026-76.
2.18 Assembly equipment must be done in climatic execution U (for regions with moderate
climate) and ХL for regions with cold climate)by TDS-15150-69.
p. 220 CHT 3.01.03-06
TDS-24259-80

Attachment
Reference

Explanations of terms, used in standard

Hard assembly equipment, not having self-support, working of pressing


1. knee brace and intended for keeping one element of construction in set position
2. brace Flexible assembly equipment not having self-support, working just on brace
Hard assembly equipment, not having self-support, working just on pressing
3.girt and designed for construction elements and shifting inside
Assembly equipment, limiting position of construction element in one or two
4. abut directions (longitudinal and transversal) by one of limits of tolerance range
5. clamp Assembly equipment, limiting position of construction element in one of two
directions by both limits of tolerance range
6. joining Linear assembly equipment not having self-support running on bracing and
pressing
Spatial assembly equipment having self-support and servicing for temporary
7.conductor fastening and adjustment of one or group of construction elements
p. 221 CHT 3.01.03-06
TDS-26887-86

УДК 624.05:006.354 МКС 91.060.30 Group J 30

Interstate standard

PLATFORMS AND LADDERS FOR CIVIL- ENGINEERING WORK

Table 1
Specifications

Present standard is extended for metal platforms and ladders, used in production process
of civil-engineering works at erection and reconstruction of edifices for replacement of 1-2
workers in the area of production works.

1. Types

1.1 Types of platforms and ladders must be complied with table 1


1.2 The following structure of definition is fixed for platform and ladder grades
Designation of type of platform or ladder by table
1

Normative value of loading for platforms

Sizes of working covering for platforms


Height for ladders
Sizes of working covering and height for ladders
with platform

Designation of present standard


p. 222 CHT 3.01.03-06
TDS-26887-86

Example of reference designation of platforms, hung on ladders from aluminum alloy with
normative value of loading 1000 Н and sizes of working covering 6 х 0,6 м:

ПЛА = 1000-0,6 * 0,6 TDS-26887-86

The same, attachable bending ladders with steel height 8,0 м with platform, having sizes
of working covering 1,5 х 0,6 м and normative loading value 2000 Н:

ЛПНС = 2000 -1,5 * 0,6 х 8,0 TDS-26887-86

2. Technical requirements

2.1 platforms and ladders must be done with compliance of present standard, TDS-24258-80 by
working drafts, established in set order.
2.2 platforms and ladders must be done with compliance of climatic executions U and Хl by
TDS-15150-69.
2.3 Bearing elements of railing fencing for platforms and ladders must stand loading 400 Н (40
кгс), attached to fencing handrail in direction, perpendicular to axes in horizontal and vertical
flats. Maximal size of handrail bending must not exceed 0,05 м.
2.4 Elements of platforms and ladders must be made from materials, mentioned in table 2.
2.5 Supporting edge of vertical and inclined ladder must have shoes from not sliding material on
asphalt, concrete and other hard surfaces.
2.6 Painting of platforms and ladders -by TDS-12.4.026-76.
2.7 Distance between bridgeboard of ladder must be from 0,45 up to 0,80 м.
2.8 Distance between stairs of ladder must be from 0,30 up to 0,34 м, but distance from first
stair up to level of floor, covering –not more than 0,40m.
2.9 attached and self-supporting ladders with more than 5 m height, set at 75°angle to horizon
must have beginning from 2 m height for lower end arc fencing or must be equipped with rope
for fastening carbine but fixed at angle from 70 and 75° to horizon – railing fencing from both
sides with height along vertical from 0,9 up to 1,4 м, beginning from 5 m height.
Elements Materials for making construction elements in compliance with climatic execution
constructions by TDS-15150-69
U Хl

Примечание. По согласованию с разработчиком технической документации допускается применение других марок сталей и ал
Aluminum alloy Aluminum
Steel grade grade Steel grade alloy grade

Bearing ВСтЗпсб and AM гб and 09Г2С12 and АМгб and


elements ВСтЗсп5 noTDS- 1915 TDS- 15ХСНД12 by 1915 by TDS-
380-71and ТУ 14-1- 4784-74 TDS-19281-73 4784-74
3023-80 and TDS-
19282-73
Fencing ВСтЗкп2 The same ВСтЗпсб and The same
elements by TDS- ВСтЗсп5 by TDS-
380-71 380-71

Note. In concordance with elaborator of technical documentation it is allowed to apply


other steel grades and aluminum alloy which mechanical features must be not lower that
mentioned in table 2.
2.10 Hanging ladder with 5 m length vertical and fixed with inclined angle to horizon more than
75° must have arc fencing or ropes with catchers for fastening carbine.
p. 223 CHT 3.01.03-06
TDS-26887-86

2.11 Fencing arcs must be replaced at the distance of not more than 0,80 м from each other and
connected with not less than 3 longitudinal stripes. Distance from ladder up to arc must be not
less than 0,70 and not more than 0,80 м at width of fencing from 0,70 up to 0,80 м.
2.12 Height of railing fencing of platforms must be not less than 1,00 м.
2.13 Height of border fencing of platforms must be not less than 0,1 м.

3. Completeness

3.1 The kit of platforms and ladders includes: platform


and ladder;
Passport;
Exploitation instruction.
3.2 At delivery of platforms and ladder with batches passport and exploitation instruction each
10 items of one type is attached.

4. Acceptance rules
4.1Platforms and ladders must be accepted by technical control of plant-producer with batches.
Batch includes item of one type and grade made by working drafts and one technology not more
than 100 pieces.
4.2 For conduction of acceptance-delivery tests not more than 3 items are selected from batch.
4.3 At tests linear sizes are checked up, quality of welding, quality of covering, completeness,
grade
4.4 Test for durability and firmness is held not less than 1 time per year with loading, exceeding
normative loading by 20%. Items must be placed in exploitation position.
4.5 If one of items would not get through test the repeated checking of sample quantity is held.
4.6 In case if at repeated checking even one sample would not get through test, single – piece
checking must be conducted.
4.7 Consumer has right to conduct acceptance of items, keeping rules of samples selection and
control methods, fixed in present standard.

5. Control methods.
5.1 Geometrical sizes of platforms and ladders are checked up by tale line by TDS-7502-
80, metal ruler by TDS-427-75, caliper by TDS-166-80, goniometer by TDS-5378-66 or other
tools, providing accuracy of measures up to
1 мм.
5.2 Quality of welding joints is checked by examination and measurement by means of patterns.
5.3 Quality of painting is defined visually in accordance with requirements TDS-9.032-74 and
TDS-9.105-80.
5.4 Quality of materials is fixed by certificates in case of absence of such-lab analysis.

6. Marking, package and keeping

6.1 each construction of platforms and ladders must have plate on each element performed in
compliance with TDS-12969-67, containing data: trade mark and name of plant-producer;
marking of item; value of normative loading; number of item or batch; due date (month, year).
6.2 Sizes of numeric and lettering symbols must be complied with font PО-5 by TDS-2930-62.
6.3 Package must ensure preservation of items and possibility of their mechanized loading and
shipping. Transport tare must be marked by TDS-14192-77.
6.4 It is admitted in agreement with consumer to send items without package.
6.5 Documentation, included into set of delivery must be wrapped into bag from polyethylene by
TDS-10354-82 and reliably fixed to item with wire of 1-2 мм diameter by TDS-3282-74.
6.6I t is not allowed to throw down the item at shipping, portage and other effects than could
injury construction elements.

p. 224 CHT 3.01.03-06


TDS-26887-86

6.7 Platforms, ladders and their elements must be kept in piles with 1500 mm height protected
from influence of environment.
6.8 Wood strips must be laid between items of square section with not less than 40 mm thickness
at distance not more than 1000 мм from each other.
6.9 Strips of all mentioned layers must be placed vertically one above another.

7. Exploitation instructions

7.1 Platforms and ladders must be exploited in compliance with instruction requirements for
platforms and ladders of concrete types.

8. Warranty of producer
8.1 Producer guarantees compliance of produced platforms and ladders with
requirements of present standard.
8.2 Warranty term of platforms and ladders exploitation is 1 year since beginning of exploitation.
p. 225 CHT 3.01.03-06
TDS-27321-87

УДК 69.057.64:006.354 МКС 91.220 Group J 30

Interstate standard

DEMOUNTABLE TUBULAR SCAFFOLD FOR CONSTRUCTIONAL WORK


Specifications

Present standard is extended for DEMOUNTABLE TUBULAR SCAFFOLD from steel


pipes, used at erection, reconstruction and repairing of premises at replacement of workers and
materials directly in the area of production process of civil-engineering works.
1. Technical requirements

1.1 Scaffoldings must be complied with requirements of TDS-24258-80 and requirements


given in relevant parts of present standard. Scaffoldings must be made in compliance with
present standard by designing documentation established in fixed order.
1.2 Main parameters and sizes
1.2.1 Types, main parameters of scaffoldings must be complied with table 1.
Table 1 Sizes, m
Definition Name of type Normative surface Maximal Minimal width Minimal width St
load (кf/м2) height of of tiers in light of tiers in light ep
scaffoldin of
gs tie
r
ЛСПХ Scaffoldings 1000(100), 100 1,0 1,9 0,5;
attached 2000 (200), 1,
clipped 2500 (250), 0;
3000 (300), 2,
5000 (500) 0
ЛСПШ Scaffoldings 80
attached
pinned

1.2.2 Set the following definition structure of scaffoldings grade.

X X X X

Definition of scaffolding type-------------------

Normative surface load, Па ----------------------------------

Maximal height of scaffoldings, м--------------------------------------------

Definition of present standard ---------------------------------------------------------------------------


Example of reference designation of attached pinned with normative value of loading
2000 Па and maximal height 60 m:
ЛСПХ 2000-60 TDS- 27321-87
The same, scaffoldings of attached clipped with normative surface load 2500 Па and
maximal height 40m;
ЛСПШ 2500-40 TDS-27321-87
1.3 Characteristics

p. 226 CHT 3.01.03-06


TDS-27321-87
1.3.1 Scaffoldings must be made in climatic execution U by TDS-15150-69 at limiting
lower bound of temperature up to minis 40°С.
1.3.2 For making elements of scaffoldings must be used pipes by TDS-3262-75 и TDS-
10704-76.
1.3.3 Pipes for making elements of scaffoldings must be without cutting, straight,
without hollows and other defects, breaking durability of elements.
1.3.4 Main elements of scaffoldings at effect of lower temperature up to minis 40 0 С
must be made from steel grade mentioned in table 2.

1.3.5 Covering of scaffoldings must stand load, equaled to scaffolding grade. Wood
baffles of scaffolding covering must be made from boards of coniferous tress of 2 sort by TDS-
8486-86, exposed to anti septic protection. .
note:
1. In concordance with elaborator of technical documentation it is allowed to apply other steel grades and mechanical, chemical featur
2Steels, applied for making scaffoldings must have impact strength at temperature minus 40 "С not less than 3105 Дж/м2. Tests for i
Wood baffles of covering and fencing of scaffoldings must be exposed with deep
impregnation of fire protective composition.
1.3.6 Exploitation life of scaffoldings must be not less than 5 years.
1.3.7Scaffoldings must have fencings, excluding falling of people and various objects.
1.3.8 Height of fencing rails must be not less than 1,1 м.
1.3.9Fencing rails should stand concentrated static load 700 Н (70кf), applied in the
middle of element in direction, perpendicular to its axes in horizontal and vertical planes.
1.3.9 Fencing must have not less than 1 intermediate horizontal element or net.
1.3.9 Height of side fencing for scaffoldings must be not less than 0,15 м.
1.3.10 All bearing horizontal elements of scaffoldings must stand static load 1300 Н (130
кгс), applied in the middle of element.
1.3.10Weight of mounted subunits at manual mounting must not be more than 30
кg.
1.3.11 For lifting and descending of people scaffoldings must be equipped with ladders
by TDS-26887-86, located at distance not more than 40 м from each other. Scaffoldings with
length not less than 40 м must be equipped with 2 ladders. Inclination angle of ladder to
horizontal surface must be not more than 60 °.
1.3.11Scaffoldings must be provided with lighting protection system by СН 305-
77 .
1.3.12Signaling painting of scaffoldings -by TDS-12.4.026-76 .
1.4 Completeness
1.4.1 Scaffoldings must be delivered packaged. The package consists of:
Package of scaffoldings (uprights, girders as well as fastening to constructions);
Passport with exploitation instruction.
1.4.2 In concordance with customer package includes containers for transportation and
keeping of scaffoldings.
p. 227 CHT 3.01.03-06
TDS-27321-87

1.4.3 In concordance with customer of scaffoldings must be delivered without


baffle covering.
1.4.4 The volume of scaffoldings for delivery must be: 500; 1000; 1500 и 2000 м ~
(projection square of scaffoldings for premises wall).
1.5Marking
1.5.1Main bearing elements of scaffoldings must have marking. Marking is fixed by
method, keeping it within the whole exploitation term for scaffoldings.
1.5.1 Marking must contain the following data:
Trade mark, name of plant-manufacturer;
Definition of item (mark);
Number of scaffolding package;
Due making date (month, year).
1.5.3Each package and box, container with scaffolding elements must have label with
marking. Size of label, placement of signs as well as way and material for marking must be
complied with TDS-4192-77.
1.5.4 Marking of label must contain the following data:
Trade mark, name of plant-manufacturer;
Definition of item (mark);
Number of scaffolding package;
Due making date (month, year).
Weight.
1.6 Packing
1.6.1 Elements of scaffolding is tied as sorted by kinds in packages with wire not less
than 4 mm diameter by TDS-3282-74 with twisting.
1.6.2 Small items must be packed in wood boxes by TDS-18617-83 or returned tare.
1.6.3 Scaffoldings, delivered in agreement with customer for their transportation and
keeping, are not packed additionally.
1.6.3Documentation, included into package must be wrapped in bag from polyethylene
by TDS-10354-82 and stuck to scaffoldings, providing their safety and given to consumer.

2. Acceptance

2.1 For checking compliance of scaffoldings with present standard manufacturer must conduct
acceptance-delivery and periodical tests.
2.2 Every element by the piece must undergo acceptance-delivery examination.
2.3 Acceptance-delivery examination must include:
Checking of quality of scaffoldings elements and establishing their compliance with
requirements of designing documentation;
Checking of quality of welding joints;
Checking of quality of painting;
Checking of scaffoldings marking.
2.4 One kit of scaffoldings undergoes examinations not less than 1 time in 3 years.
2.5 Periodical tests must include:
checking of scaffoldings weight ;
Test mounting of scaffoldings;
Test of scaffoldings for durability and firmness.
2.6 Tests for durability must be conducted in working position of scaffoldings. It is admitted to
conduct test mounting and test for durability on fragment, consisting of minimal kit of
scaffoldings (500 м2) with height not less than 20 m and loading, occurring at installation of
scaffoldings on maximal height.

p. 228 CHT 3.01.03-06


TDS-27321-87

3. Control methods.

3.1 Geometrical sizes of scaffoldings are checked up by tale line by TDS-7502-80, metal ruler by
TDS-427-75, caliper by TDS-166-80, or other tolls, providing accuracy of measures up to
1 мм and tested metrological organizations of state standard of the USSR in compliance with
requirements of TDS-8.002-86.
3.2 Quality of welding joints is checked visually in compliance with TDS-3242-79.
3.3 Quality of painting is defined visually.
4. Transportation and storage

4.1Transportation of scaffoldings is carried out by vehicles of any kind, ensuring preservation of


scaffolding elements from injuries.
4.2 It is not allowed to drop items at shipping, portage transportation and other influences,
causing injury for construction elements.
4.3 At transportation and keeping packages and boxes must be laid in 3 tiers.
4.4 Elements of scaffoldings must be kept in closed spaces or under hovel excluding touching
with ground.
4.5Scaffoldings are transported and kept in compliance with TDS-15150-69 by group of keeping
terms ОJ4.

4. Exploitation instructions

5.1 scaffoldings must be exploited in compliance with СНиП П-4-80 and exploitation instruction
on scaffoldings.
p. 229 CHT 3.01.03-06
TDS-27321-87

6. Warranty of manufacturer

6.1 Manufacturer guarantees compliance of scaffoldings with present standard at keeping terms
of transportation, storage and exploitation. Warranty term of exploitation is 12 months since
commissioning of scaffoldings into exploitation but not late than 6 months since their delivery to
consumers.
6.2 Manufacturer within warranty period repair or change al elements of scaffoldings free of
charge, change must be done within 1 month since getting notice.
p. 230 CHT 3.01.03-06
TDS-27372-87

UDК 69.057.66:006.354 МКС 53.020; 91.220 Group J 30

Interstate standard
TRAVELLING CRADLES FOR CONSTRUCTIONAL WORKS
Specifications
Present standard is extended for TRAVELLING CRADLES with electrical gear, used at
erection, reconstruction and repairing of premises at replacement of workers and materials
directly in the area of production process of civil-engineering works.

1. Technical requirements (specifications

1.1 Traveling cradles must be complied with requirements of present standard. Traveling cradles
must be made in compliance with present standard TDS-24258-80, TDS-15.001-73 by designing
documentation established in fixed order.
1.2 Main parameters and sizes
1.2.1 Types, main parameters of traveling cradles must be complied with table 1..

Name of parameters Norm at carying capaçity of


cradles, кg, not less than
300 500

120
Capacity of men not more than 1 2 4
Sizes of working covering:
length, м,not less 1 2

4
Width , м, not less 0,7 0,7 0,7
Speed of lifting (dropping ), м/min, not more than 10 10 10
Height of lifting is maximum, м 150 150 100

1.2.2 The following structure of cradles’ definition is fixed:

X X X XX

_________________________________Definition of traveling cradles of type (electric

traveling cradle)____________________Number of cradle modification

---------------------------------Maximum height of cradle raising , м

_______________Carrying capacity of cradle, кg

--------------Definition of present standard


Example of reference designation of electrical cradle of the third modification with
maximum height of loading 150 m and carrying capacity 200 kg:

ЛЭ-3 - 150 - 200 TDS-27372-87


1.3 Characteristics
1.3.1 Traveling cradles must be made in climatic execution U by TDS-15150-
69.

p. 231 CHT 3.01.03-06


TDS-27372-87
1.3.1 Ropes of cradles must be complied with type freight-people, servicing for lifting
people and freight only for BE grade by TDS-3241-80.
Diameter of ropes must be calculated but not less than 7 мм.
Supply coefficient of freight rope durability must be not less than 9. Coefficient of freight
rope durability at tearing freight rope must be not less than 3.
1.3.3 Changing of parameters and sizes of cradles must be fulfilled on the basis of
modulus principle by means of demounting of relevant sections.
1.3.3 Resource of cradles up to write-off must be not less than 3200 machine-
hour.
1.3.4 Drive Controlling must be carried out from cradle by means of uninterrupted
pressing on button of controlling apparatus.
At stopping pressing on button cradle drive must be stopped.
1.3.6 Cradles must be provided with limit switch automatically disconnecting electrical
engine of drive at approaching of cradle to cantilever, fixed on premises’ roof at distance
0,5...0,6 м.
1.3.7 Connection of electric engine’s shaft with shaft of winch barrel must be fulfilled
by means of toothed or worm transmission. Application of this chain of belt or fractioned
transmissions, fractioned or claw clutch is not admitted. .
1.3.8 Hoists of cradles must be equipped with 2 brakes, running automatically and
independently from each other at disconnecting hoist engine.
One of brakes must be blocked with reserve coefficient of braking not less than 2.
Reserve coefficient of braking of the second brake must be not less than 1,25.
1.3.9 Cradles must be supplied with catchers. Maximal height of dropping up to
stopping by catcher must be not more than 0,15 м.
1.3.9 Fencings must be installed by the whole perimeter of cradles.
Height of fencing from non-working sides must be not less than 1,20 м, but from the
front of works – not less than 1,00 м.
Height of board fencing by the whole perimeter of cradle must be not less than 0,15 м.
Installation of doors in fencings of cradles is not admitted..
1.3.11 Bearing elements of cradle fencings must stand load not less than 700 Н, attached
to fencing handrails in direction, perpendicular to axes in horizontal and vertical plaints.
1.3.12 Flooring of cradles must be flat.
Cradle drive must have device for manual omission.
The number of pressing of rope fastening must be calculated but not less than 3.
1.3.13 Firmness coefficient of cantilever balanced with cantledges must be not less than
2,2.
1.4 Completeness
1.4.1Kit of cradle delivery contains:
Traveling cradle;
cantilevers with
cantledges; load rope with
cantledges;
rope of catcher with
cantledges; electrical
cable;
passport with exploitation instruction.
1.4.2In agreement with customer the length of ropes and cable, number(weight) of
cantledge is specified.
1.5Marking
1.5.1 every traveling cradle and cantilever must have plate by TDS-12969-67, containing
the following data:
1) On cradle:
Trade mark and name of plant-manufacturer ;
Definition of cradles;
Carrying capacity;
Height of lifting (maximal);
Speed of lifting (dropping);
Working voltage;
Number of item by numeration system of manufacturer, month and year of production;
p. 232 CHT 3.01.03-06

TDS-27372-87

2) On cantledges:
Trade mark and name of plant-manufacturer;
Carrying capacity;
Cantilever;
Number of item by numeration system of manufacturer, month and year of production;
1.6Package
1.6.1 Cradle and cantledges are sent to customer without package. Electrical equipment
of cradle is wrapped with moisture-resistant paper or roofing felt by TDS-2697-83, or other
water-proof material.
Ropes and cable are wrapped into moisture-resistant paper or roofing felt by TDS-2697-
83, or other water-proof material, lay and fasten on cradle flooring.
Cantledges are tied with wire with not less than 4 mm diameter by TDS-3282-74, , lay
and fasten on cradle flooring.
Documentation, included into delivery kit must be wrapped into polyethylene bag by
TDS-10354-82 and packed together with cable of cradle or given to consumer at getting cradle
by him.

2. Acceptance

2.1 For checking compliance of cradles with requirements of present standard


acceptance-delivery, periodical and standard examinations must be held.
2.2 Acceptance-delivery tests
Acceptance-delivery examination must include:
Checking of quality of cradles and cantledge;
Checking of quality of welding joints;
Checking of quality of painting;
Checking of completeness;
Checking of marking
2.3 Periodical testing
2.3.1 Periodical tests undergo - 2 % of cradle and cantledges of yearly production of
manufacturer accepted by QCD but not less than 3 pieces (not painted); tests include:
Static tests; dynamic
tests;
Test of brakes; test of
catchers.
2.3.2 Static tests are held under load, exceeding freight capacity of cradles by
50%.
2.3.3 Dynamic tests are held under load, exceeding freight capacity of cradles by 10%.
2.3.3 Tests of brakes must be held consequently.
2.3.4 Tests of catchers must be held under load, equaled to cradle carrying capacity.
Tests must be held not less than 3 times at different height of cradle lifting.
2.4 Standard tests are held at changing construction.

3. Control methods

3.1 Geometrical sizes of cradles are checked up by tale line by TDS-7502-80, metal ruler
by TDS-427-75, caliper by TDS-166-80, or other tolls, providing accuracy of measures up to 1
mm and checked by metrological organizations of state standard of the USSR in compliance with
TDS-8.002-86.
3.1 Quality of painting is defined visually.
3.2 Quality of material is established by certificates or lab analysis .
3.2 Ropes, used in cradles must have certificate of manufacturer on tests in compliance
with TDS-3241-80. At absence of certificate ropes must undergo tests in compliance with TDS-
3241-80.
3.5Completeness of cradles is checked up, comparing nomenclature with register, made up by
manufacturer.
p. 233 CHT 3.01.03-06

TDS-27372-87

4. Transportation and storage

Cradles are transported and kept in compliance with TDS-15150-69 by group of keeping terms
ОJ 4 in part of influence of climatic factors of environment.

5. Exploitation instructions

Cradles must be exploited in compliance with СНиП Ш-4-80 and exploitation


instruction.

6. Warranty of producer
6.1 Manufacturer guarantees compliance of produced cradles with present standard at
keeping terms of transportation, storage and exploitation. Warranty term of exploitation is 12
months since commissioning of cradles into exploitation but not late than 18 months since their
delivery to consumers.
6.2 Manufacturer within warranty period repair or change al elements of scaffoldings
free of charge, change must be done within 1 month since getting notice.
p. 234 CHT 3.01.03-06

TDS-28012-89

UDK 69.057.68:006.354 МКС 91.220 Группа J 30

Interstate standard

DEMOUNTABLE
TRAVELLING STAGE
Specifications
Present standard is extended for metal DEMOUNTABLE TRAVELLING STAGE, used
at erection, reconstruction and repairing of premises at replacement of workers and materials
directly in the area of production process of civil-engineering works.

1. Technical requirements

1.1 Traveling stage must be complied with requirements of present standard. Traveling cradles
must be made in compliance with present standard TDS-24258-80, by designing documentation
established in fixed order.
1.2 Main parameters and sizes
1.2.1 Types, main parameters of traveling stages must be complied with table 1..
1.2.2 The following structure of stage definition is fixed.

X X X XX

_________________________________Definition of traveling stages


___________________________Normative surface loading , Па

---------------------------------Maximum height of stage working area , м

-------------------Definition of present standard


Example of reference designation of stages with normative value of surface loading 2000
Па and height of working covering 4,0 m;

ПСП--2000-4-TDS-28012-89

1.3 Characteristics
1.3.1 stages in whole, covering of working area and other supporting elements must be
designed for normative loading 2000 Н/м2 (200 кf/м2) and load from own mass of elements.
Traveling stages must stand static loading, exceeding normative by 1,25 times.
1.3.2 All bearing horizontal elements of stages
must stand concentrated static load 1300
H(130kf) applied in the middle of element.
1.3.3 Handrails of traveling stages’ fençing
must stand concentrated load 700 H (70kf),
applied in the middle of element in direction
perpendicular to axes, to horizontal and
vertical plaints.

p. 235 CHT 3.01.03-06

TDS-28012-89
Table 1
Sizes,m
Type of stages Height of upper Height of Sizes of working Sizes of working Number of Number of
working working area area (width X flooring (width X main intermediate
flooring length) length) flooring flooring
ПСП-stages 1,0 2,7-3,0 0,6X1,8 0,6X1,8 1 -
demountable from
flat sections
1,6 3,3-3,6 0,6X1,8 0,6X1,8 1 2
2,8 4,2-4,8 1,25X1,8 0,6X1,8 2 1
4,0 6,0 1,25X1,8 0,6X1,8 2 2
6,4 7,8-8,4 1,25X1,8 0,6X1,8 2 3
7,6 9,6 1,25X1,8 0,6X1,8 2 4
8,8 10,8 1,25X1,8 0,6X1,8 2 5
10,0 12,0 1,25X1,8 0,6X1,8 2 6
11,2 13,2 1,25X1,8 0,6X1,8 2 7
12,4 14,4 1,25X1,8 0,6X1,8 2 8
4,0 5,4-6,0 1,8X1,4 0,7X1,8 2 2
5,8 7,2-7,8 1,8X1,4 0,7X1,8 2 2
6,4 8,4 1,8X1,4 0,7X1,8 2 3
7,6 9,6 1,8X1,4 0,7X1,8 2 3
8,8 10,8 1,8X1,4 0,7X1,8 2 4
10,0 12,0 1,8X1,8 0,7X1,8 2 5
11,2 13,2 1,8X1,8 0,9X1,8 2 5
12,4 14,4 1,8X1,8 0,9X1,8 2 6
13,6 15,6 1,8X1,8 0,9X1,8 2 6
14,8 16,8 1,8X1,8 0,9X1,8 2 7

Note: at justified cases in agreement with basic


organization by standardization of scaffoldings it is
admitted to make stages with other parameters and
sizes.
1.3.4 Elements of stages constructions must be made
form materials, given in table 2
Table 2
Elements of construction Materials for making elements of constructions in compliance with climatic
execution by TDS-15150
ХL

U
Aluminum alloy Steel grade Aluminum
grades alloy grades
Steel grade
Main supporting elements С245, С255 by АМгб и 1915 by С345-3 by АМгб и 1915
TDS-27772 TDS-4784 TDS-27772 by TDS-4784
Supporting load elements and С235 by TDS- The С245, С255 по Th
fencing elements 27772 same TDS-27772 e
sa
me

Notе.In agreement with organization-elaborator of technical documentation it is


admitted to apply other steel grades and aluminum alloy, calculated characteristics of which
must be not lower than in table 2 and not creating electrical steam.
1.3.5 Height of fencing handrails of stages must be
not less than 1,1 m.
Height of board fencing of flooring of stages must be not less than 0,15 м.

p. 236 CHT 3.01.03-06


TDS-28012-89

1.3.6 For lifting and omission of people stages must be equipped with ladders by TDS-26887.
1.3.7 Every wheel of base mounting must be supplied with braking device.
1.3.8 Wood flooring of stages must be made of coniferous trees of 1 and 2-sorts by TDS-2695,
TDS-8486, TDS-9462 and TDS-9463.
1.3.9 Wood flooring and board fencing of stages must be processes with fire protection
composition.
1.3.10 Painting of stages -by TDS-24258.
1.311 Servicing term must be not less than 6 years.
1.4 Completeness - by TDS-24258.
1.5 Marking
1.5.1 Every stages must have plates by TDS-12969, containing the following data:
Trade mark, name of plant-manufacturer;
Definition of item (mark);
Number of scaffolding package;
Due making date (month, year).
Weight.
1.6 Packing
1.6.1 Elements of stages is tied as sorted by kinds in packages with wire not less than 4 mm
diameter by TDS-3282-74 with twisting
1.6.2 Small items must be packed in wood boxes by TDS-18617.
1.6.5Scaffoldings, delivered in agreement with customer for their transportation and keeping, are
not packed additionally.
1.6.3Documentation, included into package must be wrapped in bag from polyethylene by TDS-
10354- and stuck to traveling stages, providing their safety and given to consumer.

2. Acceptance

2.1 For checking compliance of stages with present standard manufacturer must conduct
acceptance-delivery and periodical tests.
2.2 Every element by the piece must undergo acceptance-delivery examination.
Acceptance-delivery examination must include:
Checking of quality of stages elements and establishing their compliance with requirements of
designing documentation;
Checking of quality of welding joints;
Checking of quality of painting;
Checking of stages marking.
2.3 At unsatisfactory results of acceptance-delivery tests item is returned for improvement.
2.4 Acceptance-delivery tests are fulfilled by plant-producer. Results of tests are written in item
passport.
2.5 travelling stages undergo tests, passed acceptance-delivery tests from 100 but not less than 1
time per year.
2.6 Periodical tests must include:
checking of stages weight ;
Test mounting of stages;
Test of stages for durability and firmness.
2.7 Tests for durability must be conducted in working position of stages, exceeding normative
load by 1,25 times. The time of effect must be not less than 10 min.
2.8 Results of tests must be considered as satisfactory if after their conduction absent:
Deformations of stages and their elements;
Breakage of welding joints ;
Delamination of covering.
2.9 At unsatisfactory results of tests repeated tests are conducted at double number of
stages.
2.9 If results of tests are unsatisfactory then every package of stages will be tested.

p. 237 CHT 3.01.03-06


TDS-28012-89

2.10 Periodical tests are held by plant-manufacturer at participation of representative of


customer.
2.11 Standard examinations are held by plant-manufacturer at changing construction of
stages, technology of their producing or change materials by program agreed with organization-
customer. Volume and structure of tests must be undergone at periodical tests.
2.12 Consumer has right to accept items at the plan, keeping rules of items’ selection and
control methods, set by present standard.

3. Control methods

Control methods of stages by TDS-24258.

4. Transportation and

storage Transportation and storage of traveling

stages by TDS-24258.

5. Exploitation instruction

5.1 Instructions on exploitation of stages by TDS-24258.

5.2 Planned and periodical inspection of stages must be conducted not less than one time in a
month.

6. Warranty of producer

Warranty of traveling stages’ manufacturer by TDS-24258.


Content

1. General regulations ................................................................................................................ 3


2. organization of construction area, fields of work and working places .................................. 7
3. exploitation of construction machines ................................................................................... 12
4. exploitation of technological equipment and tools................................................................. 14
5. Transport works ...................................................................................................................... 16
6. Electric welding and gas-flame works ................................................................................... 17
7. loading and unloading works ................................................................................................. 18
8. isolation works ....................................................................................................................... 19
9. earth works ............................................................................................................................ 20
10. Stone works .......................................................................................................................... 22
11. concrete and ferroconcrete works ........................................................................................ 23
12. Assembly works ................................................................................................................... 24
13. Electrical assembly works ................................................................................................... 27
14. equipment testing .................................................................................................................. 29
15. Roofing works ..................................................................................................................... 31
16. Finishing works .................................................................................................................... 32
17. installation of artificial foundation and drilling works ........................................................ 33
18. Underground works .............................................................................................................. 34
Attachment 1
Exemplary resolution on functional obligations of heads, specialists,
Foremen, and workers on labor protection in construction organizations ................................ -36
Attachment 2
Form of act-admittance for production of civil and engineering works on territory of running
plant 40
Attachment 3
Form of warrant-acceptance for production of dangerous work ........................................... 41
Attachment 4
Exemplary list of works, for fulfillment of which warrant-acceptance is given ....
--------------------------44
Attachment 5
Forms of documentation on checking knowledge of rules and norms on labor protection in
construction ...45
Attachment б
Exemplary list of professions in kinds of civil-engineering works on which extra requirements on
safety measures are given
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 50
Attachment 7
Content and composition of main decisions on safety measures in production
projects--------------------- 51
Attachment 8
Maximal concentration of some harmful substances in air of working area .
---------------------------------54
Attachment 9
Devices, used at sanitary-hygiene evaluation of harmful productive factors
----------------------------------- 55
Attachment 10
List of issues which must be reflected in training programs on labor safety
-------------------------------- 56
Attachment 11 list of normative documents ...........................................................................--
57
State standards, containing requirements on labor safety in
construction---------------------------------------59
TDS-12.0.004-90 ССБТ. Organization of training on labor safety. General requirements .......----
59
TDS-12.1.013-78 ССБТ. Construction. Electrical safety. General requirements .....................----
75
TDS-12.1.040-83* ССБТ. Laser safety. General requirements.................................................
----82
TDS-12.1.046-85 ССБТ. Construction . Norms of construction area lightning ........................
----87
TDS-12.3.002-75* (СТ СЭВ 1728-79) ССБТ. Production processes. General requirements.
-----------106 TDS-12.3.003-86 ССБТ. Electrical welding works. Safety measures .................----
111
TDS-12.3.009-76* (СТ СЭВ 3518-81) ССБТ. Loading-unloading works.
General safety measures. ...........................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................121
TDS-12.3.016-87 ССБТ. Construction. Anti corrosion works. Safety measures.
--------------------- 127
TDS-12.3.032-84* (СТ СЭВ 4032-83) ССБТ. Electrical assembly works. General safety
measures. ------135
TDS-12.3.033-84 ССБТ. Construction machines
General safety measures at exploitation
------------------------------------------------------------------------------138
TDS-12.3.035-84 ССБТ. Construction. Painting works. Safety measures. ..............................
---143
TDS-12.3.036-84 ССБТ. Gas-flame processing of metals . Safety measures. .........................----
148
TDS-12.3.038-85 ССБТ. Construction . Works on heat insulation of equipment and pipelines .
Safety measures.......................................................................................................................... 155
TDS-12.3.040-86 ССБТ. Construction . Roofing and hydro insulation works.
Safety requirements ................................................................................................................... 161
TDS-12.4.011-89 (СТ СЭВ 1086-88) ССБТ. Protection facilities of personnel .
General requirements and classification ....................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................167
TDS-12.4.059-89 ССБТ. construction. Preventive inventory fencings.
General technical terms...............................................................................................................
.....................................................................................................................................................173
TDS-12.4.087-84 ССБТ. Construction. Construction hats. Technical requirements. ...............182
TDS-12.4.089-86 ССБТ.Construction. Preventive belts.
General technical terms ............................................................................................................. 188
TDS-12.4.107-82 ССБТ. Construction. Safety ropes.
General technical requirements.................................................................................................. 195
TDS-21807-76 Bunkers movable with 2 м3 capacity for concrete.
General technical terms...............................................................................................................
200
TDS-23407-78 Inventory fencing of construction areas and production fields of construction-
assembly works. Technical terms --------------------------------------------------------- 206
TDS-24258-88 Scaffoldings. General technical terms .............................................................. 210
TDS-24259-80 Mounting equipping for temporary fastening. Classification and general technical
requirements .............................................................................................................................. 218
TDS-26887-86. Platforms and ladders fro civil-engineering works.
General technical terms .............................................................................................................
221
TDS-27321-87 Scaffoldings for civil and engineering works
Technical terms .......................................................................................................................... 225
TDS-27372-87 Traveling Cradles for civil and engineering works. Technical terms. ----------
---------------------230
TDS-28012-89 Movable mountable-dismountable traveling stages. Technical
terms--------------------------------234
Ministry of construction and industry of construction materials of Turkmenistan

Construction norms of Turkmenistan

СНТ 3.01.03-06 Safety measures in construction. Rules for acceptance and production of works.

Elaborated: by Turkmen information center of standards of the main state service


«Turkmenstandartlary».

Head – Lukmanov B.I.

Executors —Suhanov.А.С. Niyazova S.К

Technical version -Sopiyeva М. К., Nuriyev М.М. Translation into


Turkmen - Yazguliyev М.А., Durdyeva М.М.

Signed into issuing 18. 01. 2007 Format 60x84 1/8 printing sheets

Circulation 100 copies


TDS-23407-78
TDS-23407-78
вредными производственными Ограждения по
GURLU§YK MEYDANCALARYNYN факторами. функциональному
WE GURLU§YK-MONTAZ Ограждения по конструктивному назначению
I§LERININ ONUMCILIK решению подразделяются на подразделяются на:
MEYDANCALARYNYN INWENTAR панельные, панельно-стоечные и защитно-охранные -
GERMEWLERI стоечные (черт. 1а, б, в). предназначенные для
Tehniki sertler Панели ограждений могут быть предотвращения
сплошными и разреженными. доступа посторонних
ОГРАЖДЕНИЯ ИНВЕНТАРНЫЕ Защитно-охранные ограждения лиц на территории и
СТРОИТЕЛЬНЫХ ПЛОЩАДОК И должны быть только сплошными. участки с опасными и
УЧАСТКОВ ПРОИЗВОДСТВА Ограждения по исполнению вредными
СТРОИТЕЛЬНО-МОНТАЖНЫХ подразделяются на ограждения с производственными
РАБОТ доборными элементами: защитным факторами и
Технические условия козырьком, тротуаром, перилами, обеспечения охраны
подкосами (черт. 2) и ограждения материальных
FENCINGS FOR BUILDING SITES без доборных элементов. ценностей
Specification строительства;
2. ТЕХНИЧЕСКИЕ ТРЕБОВАНИЯ защитные -
предназначенные для
ANCALARYNYN INWENTAR предотвращения
Настоящий стандарт GERMEWLERI доступа посторонних
распространяется на инвентарные Tehniki sertler лиц на территории и
ограждения, предназначенные для участки с опасными и
выделения территорий строительных ОГРАЖДЕНИЯ ИНВЕНТАРНЫЕ вредными
площадок и участков производства СТРОИТЕЛЬНЫХ ПЛОЩАДОК И производственными
строительно-монтажных работ. УЧАСТКОВ ПРОИЗВОДСТВА факторами;
Стандарт не распространяется на СТРОИТЕЛЬНО-МОНТАЖНЫХ сигнальные -
инвентарные ограждения: РАБОТ предназначенные для
предназначенные для Технические условия предупреждения о
предотвращения падения людей с границах территории
высоты при возведении различных FENCINGS FOR BUILDING SITES и участков с
зданий и сооружений; Specification опасными и
устанавливаемые для выделения зон вредными
строительства, охраняемых по производственными
условиям специального режима. факторами.
Настоящий стандарт Ограждения по
1. КЛАССИФИКАЦИЯ распространяется на инвентарные конструктивному
Ограждения по функциональному ограждения, предназначенные для решению
назначению подразделяются на: выделения территорий подразделяются на
защитно-охранные - предназначенные строительных площадок и участков панельные, панельно-
для предотвращения доступа производства строительно- стоечные и стоечные
посторонних лиц на территории и монтажных работ. (черт. 1а, б, в).
участки с опасными и вредными Стандарт не распространяется на Панели ограждений
производственными факторами и инвентарные ограждения: могут быть
обеспечения охраны материальных предназначенные для сплошными и
ценностей строительства; предотвращения падения людей с разреженными.
защитные - предназначенные для высоты при возведении различных Защитно-охранные
предотвращения доступа зданий и сооружений; ограждения должны
посторонних лиц на территории и устанавливаемые для выделения зон быть только
участки с опасными и вредными строительства, охраняемых по сплошными.
производственными факторами; условиям специального режима. Ограждения по
сигнальные - предназначенные для исполнению
предупреждения о границах 1. КЛАССИФИКАЦИЯ подразделяются на
территории и участков с опасными и ограждения с
TDS-23407-78
доборными элементами: защитным
козырьком, тротуаром, перилами, 2. ТЕХНИЧЕСКИЕ ТРЕБОВАНИЯ
подкосами (черт. 2) и ограждения без
доборных элементов.
TDS-23407-78